《Echo Reincarnation Journey Through Multiverse》


 Chapter 1 - Prologue

    Echo Williams a genius child having a Photographic Memories and High Comprehensions making it easy for him to learn anything. He was born between a British father and an Indonesian mother making him quite handsome due to a mix gen between eastern and western gen. He lived with both parents in Bandung Indonesia. His father Edward Williams was an English professor in a College while his mother Linda Wulandari was a math teacher in a Highschool.


    He was bullied when he was little because of his intellect and popularity between girls making his males classmates jealous of him. Because of an excessive bullying when he was 4th year elementary school he begged his parents to hire him a martial art instructor for him so he can protect himself. From then he mastered many martial art which is Silat, Krav maga, Muay Thai, Combat Savate, Jujitsu, Shaolin Kung Fu, Bajiquan and Kenjutsu. He also learn how to use spear and bo staff art from the Shaolin and use Kriss and Kujang from Silat.


    Echo was a closet otaku because of having no friends his escape was in the form of watching anime''s while imagining himself as the protagonist having a Nakama fighting alongside him. He was quite a lonely child.


    This night was the night of his graduation from college. He graduated from Economic and Business Management Majors at the same time. After celebrating his graduation with both of his parents now he was alone watching the stars since he don''t have anyone to celebrate with except his parents.


    Echo POV


    ''Now that I graduate from college what should i do'' Echo thought while watching the stars atop his car.


    ''Should I work for a company? Nope, it will be like when i take an internship where my coworkers and superiors become jealous of me because of my excellent work by bullying me and creating an obstacle for me. A desease Indonesian people contract with where they hate people who are more excellent than themselves. Making smart people from Indonesia run to overseas because their intelligence is not appreciated here. That''s why this Nation has not advanced since theirs Independence day.'' Echo thought while grumbling about his Nation.


    Thid POV


    Having been granting many wish since its creation its energy have been depleted it can only grant five more wishes then it will dies. Having live for so long its wanting to die with a bang. When the star was thinking of this, its find Echo all alone daydreaming while watching the sky. It''s change its course towards Echo then killing him by hitting itself while using all its energy to grant five of Echo wish.


    Echo POV


    Echo wake up finding himself in a place with a kaleidoscopic color without limits.


    "Ugh... This is!! Where am I?" Echo thought while looking around.


    ??? : " Hello Echo!! For your information. You died!"


    Echo : " WHAT?? Who are you? What do you mean that I died?"


    ??? : " My name is Ouroboros. I was a wish granting star. I was at the end of my life and quite bored of my life then i hit myself towards you who was alone at that time so i can die with a bang. Then i give you my remaining energy to grant your wish. You can make five wish before i reincarnated you."


    Echo : " How can you just kill me like that? Damn it. Well whatever since it''s already happened and there''s no one who will be sad from my death except my parents. You said that you can grant me a wish how many wishes did I get?"


    Ouroboros : " Wow, you''re changing your gear so quickly. You have five wish and you can wish for anything but if the wish is too powerful I''ll nerf it a bit."


    Ouroboros : " Okay, i can grant all of them. But for your first wish the world you''ll be reincarnated will be randomized but i can make it that only a world that you know from your world fiction will be choosen. Will that be okay?"


    Echo : " Okay thanks for the opportunity. By the way can I choose how my face will be?"


    Ouroboros : " Yes, you can. I can also make it permanent for every time you reincarnated with that face even if you''re taking over someone body the face will change into your face and the world will recognize the new face as normal."


    Echo: " Wow!! Then i want my face to look like Zangetsu or Yhwach from Bleach when he''s young. So, when will i reincarnated?"


    Ouroboros: " Okay that will be your face from now on. Also your memories will only be back to you when you''re 3 yrs old so you don''t have to be a baby everytime you''re reincarnated and you''re reincarnating NOW! Bye bye Echo."


    After Ouroboros said that Echo blackouts while Ouroboros he died leaving a crater where he crashed the earth.

 Chapter 2

    Echo wakes up with a started then a new memories from his new body start flooding through him. From his new memories he knows his name Echo Fairbrook Wingates Hellsing he was born 5th January 1984 and he was the little brother of Integra Fairbrook Wingates Hellsing.


    Echo : " Hmmm, it seems i was reincarnated in the Hellsing universe and this day was my 3rd birthday in 1987 two years before my sister gets in contact with Alucard. Well, for now let''s get up from this bed then change this clothes."


    Echo get up from his bed wash his face and brush his teeth. When looking at his face in the mirror he was quite happy with his new face. After that he changes his clothes, as he was changing the door to his room was opened and there''s come Integra.


    Integra : " Echo!! Happy Birthday my cute little brother."


    She said while running toward him then she hugged him while rubbing theirs cheeks together.


    '' This is Integra?? The one that orders Alucard around and told him to search and destroy theirs enemies? It seems she''s still innocent before being betrayed by her uncle and she''s quite a brocon'' Echo thought while still being hugged by Integra.


    Echo : " Thank you Onee-Sama. What gift did you bring me?" He said getting out from her embrace while acting like a kid.


    Integra : " I bought you a Violin so you can learn to play it. How is it? Do you like it?"


    Echo : " yes, i like it. Later we can play together while you''re playing a Piano Onee-Sama"


    While they''re chatting with each other there''s someone come through the door.


    ??? : " Integra-Sama, Echo-Sama breakfast is ready and Echo-Sama congratulations on your third birthday. If you want anything please tell this Walter and I will search it for you as your birthday gift."


    Echo : " Ahh, Walter!! thanks for the info. As for gift I''ll think about it. Let''s go Onee-Sama"


    Integra : " ok, Let''s go Echo"


    We eat breakfast with just the two of us with Walter serving our food. Our father is already sick so he''s eating in his own room.


    After breakfast Integra leaves to start her study leaving Echo alone with Walter.


    Integra : "Bye Echo. Your Onee-Sama have to study now. Let''s play again later." She said leaving the room.


    Echo :" Unn, Let''s play later. Bye bye."


    Echo :" Hey, Walter! About my gift."


    Echo :" I know you can fight using a strings can you train me? I think it''s cool to fight with it. Hehehe"


    Walter :" you want to learn using a string? I can teach you. But, it''s going to be hard. Are you okay with that Echo-Sama?"


    Echo :" Of course i will train hard to master it so i can protect Onee-Sama."


    Walter :" Ahh. What an admirable goal. Then this Walter reaches your expectations and train you hard Echo-Sama. Well then I will start to make a plan for your training Echo-Sama, have a good day."


    Echo :" You too walter. And i want to start from tomorrow onward."


    Walter :" as you wish. Then, please excuse me."


    After Walter leaves now Echo was alone.


    ''Now, what should i do? There''s no way i can go out since i was still 3 yrs old. Ahh right, Let''s go to my room then try my abilities.'' Echo thought then he start to go back to his room.


    After reaching his room he locked the door then he tried to use his Gate of Babylon.


    He take Avalon out and it was shining in golden color then he brings it to his body and it started to go inside his body. After fusing with Avalon he started to look inside the GoB there he found Casull and Jackals so he can confirm the auto update function. He even found the blood that turned Alucard to become a Vampire.


    Echo POV


    That day I stayed inside my room all day playing around with the GoB trying all of its functions and looking at all the things inside it. There''s so many books inside off it since I perceive knowledge as wealth. I take out a book that teaches how to play Violin since I promise Integra to play with her. Then I take out books about beginner mage crafts to practice it to ensure my survival in this world.


    From morning until lunchtime I practice playing Violin according to the book and I learn it easily with my high comprehension. After eating Lunch that was sent to my room by a servant I started to read all the mage craft book I took out. But I wouldn''t start practicing it until I thoroughly understand it. Since to practice mage craft was walking along with death. So until I was sure enough I won''t rush in practicing it. Especially when I don''t have a teacher to monitor me.


    It was around 4 o''clock that Integra finish her study. Even though she studying at home they still can''t meet each other since she will be distracted if she was with me.


    DUG DUG DUG


    I stop reading my book when i heard someone knocking my door.


    Integra :" Echo, are you there? Open the door. The maid says that you locked yourself in your room. What have you been doing?"


    Echo :" Onee-Sama, wait a moment. I''ll open the door."


    Echo :" Good evening Onee-Sama how is your study? I''ve been trying to play using the Violin that you gift me."


    Integra :" Oohhh, can you already play a song? as for study it''s okay."


    Echo :" Of Course i can play it. Wait a minute."


    I then let her in while i take out my new Violin.


    Echo :" Here I go. Please listen to it Onee-Sama."


    (Play : Hunter X Hunter - Kaze no Uta)


    CLAP CLAP CLAP


    Integra :" Wow, you''re a genius Echo. You already be a able to play this good when you just learn to play!"


    Integra clapping while complimenting me.


    Integra :" Yes yes, you''re right Let''s play together later. So what''ve you been doing all day, except playing Violin."


    Echo :" Well I''ve been reading since noontime. Oh, and starting tomorrow I''ll train with Walter so I can be strong to protect you."


    Integra :" Ohh, Echo you''re so sweet."


    Intergra shout while hugging me. We then play until dinner. After eating dinner I then taking a bath with Integra following me with reasons to help me take a bath. Then we sleep together that night.

 Chapter 3

    Morning comes Echo wakes up finding himself inside of Integra embrace. She''s completely using him as her body pillow. He then tried to wake her up.


    Echo:" Onee-Sama, wake up. It''s already morning."


    Integra:" Hnn. Echo? It''s morning already? Thanks for waking me up."


    She gets up then went to her own room. Echo then wash himself up then change his clothes to training clothes. Then he heard a knock.


    Walter :" Echo-Sama ! Breakfast is ready. Please come to the dinning room."


    Echo :" I''m coming. Thanks, Walter!"


    When he arrived at the dining room there''s only Walter there. He sat and wait for Integra to come.


    Walter:" Echo-Sama, I already compile your training menu. We will start your training an hour after you eat breakfast."


    Echo:" Really? Thank you, Walter. Please take care of me."


    Third POV


    There Walter instructs him to do a light exercise to help to digest his breakfast. An hour later he was told to do bodybuilding first by doing 50 pushups, situps, squats and run until he can''t run anymore.


    After bodybuilding, Walter brought him back to the living room. After letting him rest for 20 minutes Walter starts to teach him how to weaves a strong as a weapon. After grilling him in theory for two hours they go to Aula Hall to practice it. After practicing for an hour and a half he was starting to get a hang of it and Walter is starting to think something is weird. After all, that exercise and practice all signs of fatigue or muscle contracts disappear after he rests for a while.


    Walter:" Echo-Sama! How do you feel after all that practice?"


    Echo:" Well, when I just finished that bodybuilding I feel like I was on fire. But after resting for a while I feel stronger instead. Is it good Walter?" ''Hmm, with healing power from Avalon and my adaptable body I will be stronger at a fast pace.''


    Walter:" Excuse me Echo-Sama. Please let me see your muscles." ''This is!!! It seems that Echo-Sama was endowed with a fast healing factor. With this, I have to up his training so as not to waste it.''


    Walter:" Well, all is good Echo-Sama. With this, we can up your training. Now, please do all that bodybuilding exercise again until you''re not able to move anymore." "Kay"


    After that Echo do what Walter told him until he was not able to move anymore. Walter then brings him back to rest. After sleeping for an hour he wakes up feeling hungry.


    Walter already prepared his meal for him so he starts to eat until he feels full. He then takes a bath since he was full of sweats. Feeling refreshed after a bath he plays Violin for an hour after that he reads books about magecraft again.


    Echo POV


    Looking through GoB there are so many things that I want to learn. But, let''s take it one step at a time. For now, let''s just focus on mastering the string, make my body stronger and magecraft. If my foundation is strong learning anything later is not too late. Besides, I already master many martial arts in my last live. I''ll just do a refresher on it and make it muscle memory.


    Let''s do just that I''ll just do the kata until it becomes a muscle memory then move to the next one. Let''s start with Muay Thai.


    After that, Echo trains for two hours until it was time for Integra to finish her studies. He then takes a bath again to wash his sweat. The rest of the day continues like yesterday except Integra didn''t come to sleep with him again.


    Walter POV


    Today discovery really too shocking. To think that Echo-Sama was that much of a genius. Not only his body regeneration and adaptability that is fast his learning speed is also monstrous the thing that took me two weeks to learn he just took an hour to do the same. I have to re-plan the Echo-Sama training regime. If it''s not up to standard it means that I was disqualified as Echo-Sama trainer. But this is making it so much fun to look forward. How much Echo-Sama will grow in the future.


    Now, let''s prepare the Echo-Sama training menu for tomorrow. I also have to increase his food, since he will need a lot of nutrients from now on.


    Third POV


    The next day after eating breakfast. Echo starts his training again. But, after knowing Echo''s condition Walter have adjusts his training menu to the spartan level.


    It starts with bodybuilding that he must do until he can''t move anymore. Then after rest, he starts training using strings. Then do bodybuilding again eats lunch. Then back to string training. This was repeated again and again up to three o''clock. He takes a bath after all that sweaty training. Then start to practice drawing magic circle and reading book in his own room.


    Echo also remastered all martial arts he masters in his last life and make it into muscle memory. It was easy to do with his new body spect that is adaptable along with his photographic memory.


    This night he will start the rituals to awaken his magic circuits. All preparation has already been done. He already triples check it.


    When the night comes he done the rituals and it was finished without a problem. When he checks his magic circuits he found out that he has 150 magic circuits and it can handle around 30 units of magical energy. His element was Sword and Chaos while his origin was Sword and Evolution. It''s clear that the Sword incarnation was because of the Avalon inside his body while the Chaos and Evolution was his original element and origin. But what surprised him was his eyes. He gets the mystic eyes of death perception, luckily he can turn it on and off. Maybe because he already died once that he receives these eyes and because of his second wish, all flaws from using the eyes were removed.


    Echo immediately goes to sleep after cleaning up his room. He was a little bit excited to start training magecraft for real starting tomorrow.

 Chapter 4

    Time Skip 2 years later Echo POV


    It''s been two years since my M.Circuit awaken. I''ve been training much harder after that day. I already exceed Walter in using string after a year and three months but I still lack experience so after that I''ve been sparing with Walter every day after my daily exercise.


    Two months ago I start to exceed Walter in physical strength and speed. But it is because of his old age. It''s still long before I can match Walter''s younger self. But, it won''t be that long.


    This day is June 14th, 1989. The day that my and Integra father''s death. I''ve been minimizing my contacts with him since I know that he was going to die and I don''t want to hurt so much from his death. But, it seems from that minimal contact he successfully worming himself into my heart. Making me a little sad about his death.


    In three days Integra is about to make contact with Alucard, and I''ll be accompanying her on that day. So I can have my first kill there, by killing the traitorous uncle.


    Right now father was telling Integra about Alucard that was sealed in the mansion dungeon. After telling her that he died and we start to proceed with his funeral.


    Three days later


    I was with Integra when our uncle come trying to kill us. Integra panicked and drag me to run. When running it seems that she remembered our father''s word before he died and change her course towards the basement.


    Echo:" Onee-Sama why are we running? I''m strong enough to defeat them and protect you." I ask her


    Integra:" You can''t Echo!! Uncle was bringing a gun with him. It''s dangerous." she answers me. Not believing that I can defeat him. Well not that I can blame her as it is only Walter that knows about my fighting prowess for now as I haven''t told her about it.


    While we run. We heard our uncle talk to us as he pursued us. Not long after we arrived at the cell where Alucard is. We got in after she opened the door.


    Echo:" I think I know what it is Onee-Sama. I read it in a book about our ancestors in the library. That one of our ancestors Abraham Van Hellsing defeated a Vampire then sealed it and our families have been bounding him to our family blood. So as long as we give him our blood he will do anything we told him."


    Integra:" Really? If that so let''s give him our blood."


    As we were about to cut our palm and give him blood Richard, our uncle have caught up with us.


    Richard:" Found you!"


    BANG BANG


    He shots at us. But, I was faster than him. As before he shots us I already weave my string in a net and catch the bullets coming towards us.


    Echo:" Onee-Sama hurry and give him the blood!" I shout at her while wrapping my wire around Richard''s hand that holds the gun and also around his neck. His two grunts are not spared from it.


    Integra:" Yes! Wait a minute." she answers while cutting her palm and give her blood into Alucard mouth."


    Right as the blood goes inside his mouth he wakes up. His shriveled body good back to normal while he was leaking an enormous miasma.


    Integra:" Echo!! Are you okay? It''s the first time you kill a person." ask Integra in worry.


    Echo:" Unn, I''m okay. I''m strong now so I can protect you Onee-Sama!" I answer while grinning at her.


    Integra:" Yess. As expected of my Echo. You''re a genius."


    As we''re talking Alucard walked towards us then he kneels in front of us in a knight position. Integra then asks him.


    Integra:" You! Your name?"


    Alucard:" Your father called me Alucard."


    Echo:" Alucard!! It''s a nice name. Good to see you, Alucard."


    Alucard:" the p???sur? is mine."


    10 years later


    In these 10 years, I''ve trained intensely. I''ve long have surpassed Walter in his younger day both in strength and in the mastery of using strings. I also learned how to use a firearm, all types of it. From guns, machine guns, sniper rifles, etc.


    I''ve also trained like how enforcers in fate series including the use of black keys. Then I trained in Kenjutsu and learn Tsubame Gaeshi, Niten Ichi-Ryu, and Tennen Rishin-Ryu.


    In Mage Crafts, I learned reinforcement, tracing of Shiro Emiya, memory partition, thought acceleration, transmutation, bounded field, item creation, curse, healing, shared perception, telepathy.


    When I learned Tracing I accidentally learned Denial of Nothingness. It seems because there''s no Alaya and Gaia here there is no degradation on something that I traced.


    Starting from when I was ten. I started to duel against Alucard every day. Right now I was only able to fight him equally at level 1 seal release.


    Right now I was trying to recreate Rokushiki from OnePiece. I was only able to recreate Soru Geppou and Kami-e. There is no information on how they train it in my memory. I also successfully learn Kenbunshoku Haki. It''s going to be useful when fighting Alucard since I can easily dodge his bullet with it.


    While training I heard the sound of a Helicopter. It seems they''re back from a mission. So I go to greet them.


    Echo:" So, How is the mission? Onee-Sama, Walter and Alucard. Also, who is that girl?"


    Integra:" it''s the usual. We came in, then Alucard deal with the damn Freak. This time it''s only a third-rated Vampire and it''s minion Ghoul. As for the girl, ask Alucard for it." Integra answer me. In these ten years her personality change like in the series. But, when it''s just the two of us she''s still the same brocon.


    Echo:" Ohh. So we have a new addition huh. Congratulations on your new servant."


    Walter:" Let''s just hope she can provide a new power to us."


    Echo:" Well well. Don''t be stiff Walter. It''s the girl that Alucard brings. I''m sure she''ll be useful to us."


    Walter:" If you say so Echo-Sama."


    Echo:" Let''s go inside. Onee-Sama waiting for us."

 Chapter 5

    Seras POV


    I was having a bad day. At first, the day goes like normal. That is until my squad was told to go catch the priest from the church. They were attacked by the Villagers that seems to have been turned into zombies. My comrades died one by one leaving me alone being chased by a horde of zombie.


    After running around for a while, I was caught by the priest whom about to **** me before he kills me. But, before any of that happens someone comes and stops it. He was a tall man wearing a red hat and coat with round sunglasses. How is he be able to see in the night while wearing sunglasses?


    Alucard:" Done yet?" he says, making the priest surprised as he hurriedly turns his head back.


    Alucard:" Youngsters this day. You disgust me! I can''t tell you apart from the dirty, rotten, punk-ass trash bag on the sidewalks."


    Priest:" Who are you? What do you want?"


    Alucard:" The name is Alucard. I''m part of the Hellsing garbage disposal unit. A specialist for cleaning up trash like you!"


    Priest:" A Specialist? Cleaning me up? HAHAHHA. Are you trying to be funny or something? Kill him!" the priest said while ordering his ghouls to attack.


    BANG BANG BANG


    ''Ratatatatata''


    The ghouls start to shot at him. While the man just stays silent receiving all the bullets in his body. After a while, they stop firing and the man fall down.


    Priest:" Hahaha. What? Done already? What a specialist. Hahahaha"


    Alucard:" Futility! That''s if you were to use ordinary guns!" the man said while taking a gun from his coat and he starts firing.


    BANG BANG BANG BANG


    The man shots and every ghoul that shots start to turn into ash. After a while, all the ghouls were killed leaving the priest all alone.


    Priest:" Why... Why are you doing this? Why is a Vampire helping mortal men?"


    Alucard:" if I were to let punk like you run around creating a problem, I would be trouble. If an ignorant fool like you creating more trouble than this then Mankind will perish. I still have a human reason. So I can''t let you do that."


    The priest getting desperate start to take me as a hostage.


    Priest:" Don''t move!!! Hold it right there. I''ll kill her if you do that. She''s the last survivor. You would be trouble if she were dead right? Let''s have a transaction. Just let me get out of here alive. I''ll go wherever you want."


    Alucard:" Oi, Police girl! Are you a v?r??n?"


    Seras:" Huh?" what is this person talking about? Virgin? Why is he asking that in this situation?


    Seras:" Yesss!!! I''m a Virgin!"


    "BANG" He shot right through me then he kills the priest after that.


    Alucard:" I have to shot his heart, so I shot through your liver. Unfortunately the wound is too large, you have no chance to survive. So, do you want to live?"


    He asks me. I just lift my hand towards him as I can''t answer.


    Alucard:" Good! Don''t blame me! It is your choice." he said biting my neck while I blackout.


    "Gasp" I woke up finding myself in a room that looks like dungeons inside a Castle. I immediately check my body up to find that there is no wound.


    Seras:" Fiuhh, so it''s a dream." I sigh of relief while looking at the side, to see the men in my dream looking at me while grinning. "Aaaaaaaaaa" I shout in surprise.


    Alucard:" So, Police girl. How is it feel to be dead?"


    Seras:" Huh?"


    He answers. I then look around for a mirror then I see a fang in my mouth.


    Seras:" eh. Eeeeeeeeh"


    Integra:" You''re too noisy, Police girl. Even if you''re a Draculina now. You still must act like an Englishwoman."


    Seras:" Draculina? Excuse me, where is this?"


    Integra:" The Royal Order of Religious Knights. Better known as the Hellsing Organization. We work as this country sword to hunt down freaks like the one you''ve met before and from now on you''re working for us. Walter, give the police girl the uniform! Is there anything you want to tell her Echo?"


    Echo:" Nope, I just want to see. What is Alucard''s new servant is like? Hehehe"


    Integra:" So, what do you think of her?"


    Echo:" She still has a long way to go. Well, let''s just leave her training to Alucard. His servant his responsibility. Hahaha"


    Seras:" excuse me, this man is?"


    Integra:" Let''s leave it here. We have a mission. Hurry and suit up. Don''t be slow, Police girl. Let''s go."


    She said then they all left. I start to change clothes and follow them.


    Echo POV


    ''Hehehe, it was funny seeing Seras reactions to herself becoming a Vampire.'' I thought as I walk alongside Integra and Walter towards the car. A while later Alucard comes along with Seras and we take off.


    Burmingham 17th Street.


    We arrive to see the place already being cordoned by the Police.


    Police1:" What is happened here?


    Police2:" it''s so vile."


    We get out of the car then Integra asks.


    Squad Leader:" I''m the squad leader here. So you''re from Hellsing Organization? This place already becomes a bloodbath."


    Integra:" We will take it over from here on. Tell me the summary about what happened here."


    Squad Leader:" Taking over? Well, just now we found three families were slain, 11 people in total both young and old. Six were drained from their blood while the other five was butchered. We''ve our hand full because of this and the higher up tells us to leave the rest to the Hellsing Organization."


    Integra:" it''s a good judgment they giving you. what we''re dealing is not some third rated villains. We''re dealing with freaks here to be precise a Vampire. This is what we Hellsing was build for! To hunt monster that plagues our land." Integra said while walking toward the house.


    Squad Leader:" a Vampire? It''s unbelievable but, what happens there really is not something a human can do."


    Echo:" Onee-Sama, I''ll go with Alucard. There''s nothing here for me to do."


    Integra:" Ahh, be careful."


    Echo:" alright! It''s not me who has to be careful, it''s them. Hehehe"


    We found the trail of the Vampire. It''s so amateurish that even Seras be able to find it. The three of us then go after them and we arrive at a house. It already smells of blood. Alucard goes in and disposed of one of the vampires. The other one runs from the place leaving her partner. Seras and me go to the rooftop and she was watching one of the Vampire runs away.


    Seras:" But, Sir. Echo! There''s no scope in this rifle."


    Alucard:" We''re a Vampire, Police girl. We don''t need anything like that. Shoot, Police girl. Shoot."


    Echo:" He''s right Seras even I was able to do that. Even though I was a normal human."


    Alucard:" There is nothing normal about you. There''s no normal human that able to fight equally with me, even though my strength was sealed."


    Echo:" Hahaha, If you say so. Well, while Seras does her job. I''ll have to take care of the rats that have been observing us for a while." I said looking toward the spy that I have been felt from my Observation Haki. I run toward him while throwing black keys towards his shadow. Making him unable to move. Then I captured him by wrapping his hand and body with my wire while gagging him so he can''t do suicide.


    When I was back Integra was there with them and Seras already kills her target.


    Echo:" I captured one of them. So we can know how they can produce so many Vampires. It''s weird that there is so many Vampire lately. It is obvious that someone has been producing them then they let them go to make a ruckus."


    Integra:" hmmm, you''re right. Let''s take him back to HQ. Let Alucard deal with him. Alucard churned out any information from him. Let''s go"

 Chapter 6

    A Suburbs of Rome "Catholic Orphanage"


    Priest:" Hei hei.. Quit fighting the two of you! What happens here?"


    Boy1:" it''s his fault, father Alexander."


    Bot2:" what are you saying? It''s your fault!"


    Boy1:" No, it''s yours."


    Priest:" SILENCE!!! Friends using Violence Against each other is not good. If you do that you''ll not be able to go to Heaven you know?"


    Boy1&2 :" Father Alexander we''re sorry."


    Priest:" Listen carefully. You only use Violence Against Monster and Heatens." while he was talking there is an old man coming towards them.


    Priest:" Yosh, the two of you. Go back to your room."


    Boys:" Yes, Priest-Sama"


    Oldman:" Father Anderson"


    Anderson walk as the old man follows him.


    Anderson:" Sigh, is something happens? It''s something important, right?"


    Anderson:" Ohh, then? You''re making it looks so secretive"


    Oldman:" Vampire! there''s been many sighting of them nowadays. Their number is unusually high."


    Anderson:" Hooo. then, isn''t it a good thing? The church of England has suffered a heavy loss, no?"


    Oldman:" No, it''s not like that. Hellsing! You must have heard about them. They''ve been doing a good job making the casualties minimal."


    Anderson:" heh, don''t compare us with those amateur. Compared to us they''re nothing than a bunch of kindergartens. Catholic, Vatican and us. We have been fighting all those monsters long before them. Besides, why should we concern ourselves with their problem?"


    Oldman:" Well, it''s not just England."


    Anderson:" What do you mean!!!"


    Oldman:" This time it''s occurring in Ireland. More specifically, a town in north Ireland Badrick."


    Anderson:" Hooooh."


    Anderson:" Brazenly sending someone. As if it were their own territory. That group doesn''t know their own limit."


    Oldman:" Ireland including northern Ireland is the land of ours Catholic not Protestant. We can''t let them do whatever they want in or soils. Our duty is to hunt down those Vampire. We can''t let them get ahead of us, Anderson."


    Anderson:" and? What if we met each other? What should I do?"


    Oldman:" We are the only ones that represent and enforced our God will on earth. We cannot back away from a challenge coming from heretics."


    Anderson:" If anyone does not love The Lord, Jesus Christ. Let him be accursed O''Lord come "Amen"."


    Northern Ireland Badrick


    Third POV


    While Alucard was inside a mansion hunting Vampires. Echo and Seras were waiting for his signals outside.


    Seras:" Echo-Sama! How can you be so strong? You''re able to fight with Master equally right?"


    Alucard:" Oi, Police girl. Come in!"


    They heard Alucard calling. Seras immediately got in and start shooting the ghouls inside.


    Seras:" the enemies are not human. Just think of it as a pumpkin." she murmured while shooting them. Her bloodlust was uncontrollable from seeing so many bloods.


    Echo was following behind her, watching her back while killing the one she missed by throwing black keys towards their head and heart.


    Alucard:" Ooohh, Police girl doing better than expected. Oi, You should aim for their head or heart to finish them off, Police girl."


    Seras:" Sir!! Yes my Master."


    Echo:" Uwaah, she''s completely drowning in her bloodlust. Is that okay, Alucard?"


    Alucard:" Well, isn''t that okay. Let her be submerged in it. Hahaha."


    Echo:" If you say so. Then, it''s alright." as he says this Echo look at Seras that exhaust and try to drink the blood in her hand. As she was about to lick it. Echo kenbunshoku Haki feels a bayonet coming towards them to impale Seras. Then he caught it with his wire letting her drink her first blood.


    Anderson:" Hmph, how I treat a monster is not your business boy!"


    Echo:" Hooo, Who are you then, Mr. Priest?"


    Anderson:" Division XIII Vatican special force. Iscariot Order, Paladin Alexander Anderson. So, who are you boy? Walking around with two Vampires even though you''re a human."


    Echo:" Ohhh, How rude of me. The name is Echo Fairbrook Wingates Hellsing. Nice to meet you."


    Alexander:" Ooohhh, you''re from that group of heathens Hellsing. In the name of The Lord Jesus Christ. All heathens that against his teaching shall be destroyed, Ameeen."


    Echo:" Hahaha, he''s really raring to go. Let me fight him Alucard. I''ve been too idle lately."


    Alucard:" Then, I''ll watch you from the side. Let''s go Police girl."


    Seras:" Yes, sir. Master is it okay to let Echo-sama fight alone?" Seras that have come to her sense ask Alucard.


    Alucard:" He''s going to be okay. He''s the human that I acknowledge. Just watch."


    Anderson:" I eliminate it. It''s just a weakling."


    They walk towards each other. Anderson takes out his bayonet while Echo brings out his black keys. *CLANG* They cross their weapons and start trading blow with each other. Their first bouts end in a draw with them cutting each other. Anderson got his arm a shallow cut while Echo got it on his face. The cuts got healed in an instant.


    Echo:" Oi oi, Father Alexander, aren''t envy a sin? Why are you keep aiming for my face? Your jealousy is too much, you''ve sinned"


    Anderson:" Shut up you heathens. I was aiming for your neck. Also, are you a Regenerator? Did Hellsing steal our technology?"


    Echo:" Hahaha, Don''t compare me with all of your experimental subjects. Like hell I let myself become a lab rat. My healing factor is naturally born with." '' Okay, that''s a lie. It was because of Avalon. Thought they wouldn''t know about it. Hehehe''


    Anderson:" Bastard!! You have a blessing from The Lord. But, you ally yourself with heathens."


    Echo:" Who said I got it from your Lord? Go do your preaching at home."


    Anderson was so mad he immediately attacks Echo. They trade blow for a while the suddenly Anderson stops moving or to be precise he can''t move.


    Anderson:" This!!! What happens? What have you done?"


    Anderson:" I can''t believe it. That I have been caught in a petty trick? Damn it."


    Echo:" Hahaha, don''t be hard on yourself. even the Lord of the night was caught by this petty trick that you call. Right, Alucard?"


    Alucard:" Yess, Master is really hard to deal with when he spread his net. Like a Spider that waiting for its prey."


    Anderson:" Damn you!! Kill me!!"


    Echo:" Well, that what I''ll do then."


    Just as Echo was about to kill him his phone rings.


    Echo:" Hmmm, wait a minute! Hello, Onee-Sama. What it is?"


    Integral:" Echo, did all of your meet Priest Alexander Anderson? If so, don''t engage him. If you already fight him, don''t kill him. It will make our relationship with the Vatican sour."


    Echo:" Eeehhhh, but he attacks us first!! And was about to finish him."


    Integra:" Don''t talk back. Listen!! No matter what don''t kill him."


    Echo:" Che. Alright, I understand bye." he closes his phone then looks at Anderson.


    Echo:" as you heard. My sister didn''t want to sour the relationship between us and the Vatican. Count yourself lucky to survive. There won''t be next time. Bye" Echo said while walking away.


    Echo:" Let''s go Alucard, Seras. Ohhh and Mr. Priest that net will let loose in two hours. Be a good boy and stay there for a while."


    Anderson:" Damn you, Boy!! I''ll make you regret letting me alive. You''ll pay for this humiliation!!"


    Echo:" Hai hai. Suit yourself, when the time comes. I''ll be your opponent."


    Seras:" is it okay to leave him like that?"


    Echo:" Okay or Not it is Onee-Sama order. What can I do? Let''s just go back. I want to take a bath after all that exercise. By the way, Seras. How is your first taste of blood? Now you''re no longer Virgin Vampire. Hahaha"


    Seras:" Vi..virgin!!" seras said blushing.


    Alucard:" Yes, you''re no longer a Virgin vampire now that you have tasted blood."


    Echo:" Haha. So, how do you feel?"


    Seras:" I don''t know. Normal?" she answers bewildered.


    Echo:" Sheeessh, Boring."


    Seras:" Eehhhh. How mean!"


    Meanwhile at another place.


    ???:" Ladies and Gentlemen, Let''s carry on with the plan for the war! For the next war! For the war after the next war!"

 Chapter 7

    Hellsing HQ Meeting Hall


    Echo POV


    Right now the oldman from the Round Table has been called. Integra was going to tell them what we found from all the incident that has occurred so far. As for me? I was with them, listening in the corner of the room as they bicker around. Haizz, I want to go to the basement seeing Seras reaction toward her new bed. Integra has ordered Walter to change her bed with a coffin, Hahaha. But, I am here.Why?? Because I want to fight the Valentine Brother. All those soldiers that killed in the series are such a waste. So, I''ll save them here. Ahh, the meeting starts.


    Sir. Hugh:" Sir. Integra, this meeting has been called is it because tdo something has occurred?"


    Integra:" Yes, Sir. Hugh."


    Sir. Gregory Pennwood:" so much happened in a short time. It''s been difficult to stop the news from leaking to the press."


    Sir. Hugh:" Yes, there''s a limit to how much information can be suppressed. So, what have you found? Director Integra."


    Integra:" As you have heard. Recently the incident regarding Vampire have been increasing a lot. Naturally we took the opportunity to research the new Vampire and we found this inside all of their body." Integra says while showing a microchip to them.


    Lt.General Rob Walsh:" and? What is this?"


    Integra:" It is a transmissions device. With this the one who implanted it can monitor all movements of the Vampires."


    All:" WHAT?"


    Integra:" Furthermore, the last incident are not isolated. It''s clear that there is someone behind it. We also secure a live Vampire at the Burmingham incident. It was hard to get the information but, we succeeded! Our enemies is the Millennium."


    Sir. Shelby M Pennwood:" Millennium? What is that?"


    Sir. Hugh:" Millennium! This is a Paramilitary created by Nazi as a means of researching and using supernatural phenomena for military purposes. Didn''t they were destroyed by Walter and Alucard in the last war?"(AN: In the anime and manga only Walter and Alucard know about Millennium. I change it that someone old like Sir. Hugh knows about them.)


    Sir. Hugh:" Hmmm, that maybe so."


    As they talk. I spread my Kenbunshoku outside the manors. To see if the Valentine Brothers has come or not and there they are Outside the gate. Killing the gate guards.


    I stand up, then walk towards the door.


    Echo:" Onee-Sama!! Call Walter and the others. We''re under attack." I said to her then go outside.


    I walk towards the front hall. Seeing the soldiers mingling around, i shout.


    Echo:" All Soldiers!!! Get your weapons ready and go to second floor. Aim your weapons towards the door. Kill any intruder that come."


    Soldiers:" SIR YES SIR" they answer and start to move while I was walking downstairs. I then wait in front of the door for them to come.


    *BANG*


    The door was destroyed and there walking in the Valentines Brother followed by their ghouls army.


    Echo:" All Soldiers. Fire at will!!!"


    Soldiers:" YES SIR."


    BANG BANG BANG


    Ratatatatata


    The soldiers start shootings the ghouls and the ghouls tried to shoot back. But, like hell I''ll let them do that. Before them noticing I''ve been spreading my net. And now they''ve become a prey. Trapped in my net.


    But, it''s not helpful in trapping the Valentine Brothers. The older brother was running toward me while avoiding my wire. He tried to cut it. But, it was useless. Since I''ve been reinforcing it with reinforcement. The little brother is jumping around avoiding the wire and bullet raining at him while trying to shoot back at the soldiers. But they have a high ground advantage so it was hard to shoot them from below and whenever he tried to go up my wire will prevent him.


    The older one was already in front of me and he tried to cut me with his knife. I block him using the Black Keys.


    Luke V:" Hello there. You''re more off a genius than what we heard from the information. Echo Fairbrook Wingates Hellsing."


    Echo:" Oohh. So, the Millennium has already got my information huh. How is the Major? Still ???k?n? his wound from the last time we raid his base? Hahaha"


    Echo:" Eeehh. Did you really think that we wont know about you? when you''ve been doing an experiment here and there. It seems that I''ve been thinking too highly of you."


    Luke:" Damn You!!! I''ll kill you and feed you to the ghouls you Fucking Bastard."


    Echo:" Ghouls? Which ghouls?"


    Luke:" Eh?" He was surprise by that question. Now that he thought about it, the sound of gunfire has been lessened. So, he look back only to see that their ghouls army has been decimated. There''s only his brother there tried to fire back at the Hellsing Soldiers with no success.


    Echo:" Did you think that you have the leisure to look back."


    When he heard echo voice he immediately follows his instinct to jump left. But, it was too late. His right hand was separated from his body. He jump back and shout.


    Luke:" Jan!!! Come here. They won''t shoot if there''s him on the line of fire."


    Jan:" Okay, Brother. I''m coming."


    Jan the stop shooting and start to run towards them."BANG" He abruptly stopped by a high caliber gun that was fired in front of him.


    Seras:" Echo-Sama!! Are you okay?"


    Jan:" Damn it!! Reinforcement huh. It seems that this mission is a failure."


    Echo:" Oohh. Walter and Seras, you''re late to the party!! So, where is Alucard?"


    Alucard:" I was already behind you, Master. You fight and play with your opponent mind beautifully. Like a puppeteer playing with their puppet. They''re dancing in your tune."


    Echo:" Hoooh. The praise from the no life king himself. I''ll gratefully accept it. So, do you want to play along too?"


    Alucard:" Nah. This type of third rated Vampire. My pet is enough. Come, Hound of Baskerville."


    From Alucard shadow come out a big black dog. This is the Hound of Baskerville, one of Alucard familiars. The hound attack Luke without mercy killing him in an instant since he was already wounded he become Baskerville food.


    Looking at the other. It seems that Walter and Seras also already finish their opponent.


    Back before the attack - In the Basement -


    Seras:" Walter-san. What is this?" Seras ask Walter while looking at the coffin that was placed in her room.


    Walter:" It is your new bed, Miss. Seras." he answer while stepping back from her.


    Seras:" My new bed? It''s a coffin! Where is the last one?"


    Walter:" I''ve already disposed of it." he said to her and bow.


    Seras:" Why? Why do I have to sleep in a coffin?"


    Walter:" it was Integra-Sama order. She said ''how can a Vampire not sleep in a coffin?" That was her word."


    Seras:" NOOOOOOO"


    Alucard:" You''re too noisy, Police girl. That coffin was good for you. Try to adapt to it."


    Walter:" Ahh. Alucard-Sama, I was about to go to your room. The gun that you order has finished. Please take a look at it."


    Walter:" it is your new custom weapon. Its weight is 10kg, is 39cm long, and carries six bullets. It''s cannot be used by humans. It uses a 13mm armor-piercing rounds."


    Alucard:" Hmmm, it''s a good weapon."


    Seras:" Really?"


    Walter:" Ahh. I also have a new weapon for you Miss.Seras. It''s a 30mm Cannon for use against the undead -The Harkonnen-"


    RIIING RIIING RIIING Cklk


    Walter:" Yes, Integra-Sama. Is there something you need?"


    Integra:" Where are you now, Walter?"


    Walter:" I was in the basement along with Alucard and Miss. Seras. Is something wrong Integra-Sama?"


    Integra:" Hurry go to the front Hall! We''re under attack and Echo was there fighting them. Go and aid him."


    Walter:" Affirmative, Integra-Sama." he closes the phone then look back.


    Walter:" As you have heard it. Right now we''re under attack. We''re to go to the front hall and aid Echo-Sama."


    Alucard:" I hope we''re not too late to the party. Since he must be able to decimate it alone."


    Walter:" That''s a possibility. Let''s go!"


    Seras:" is there no one that''s normal in this mansion?" she said while following them.

 Chapter 8

    Third POV


    The day after, Integra office. Integra along with Walter and Echo was in a meeting.


    Integra:" Walter, Tell me how many casualties we got from yesterday''s attack?"


    Walter:" Yes, Integra-Sama. Out of 96 of our force 20 of them died, 10 disabled, and 6 got a medium injury and have to be hospitalized for five months."


    Echo:" That''s quite a lot. Even though we have the high ground advantage. Is it because the enemy is stronger than we anticipated or is it because our Soldiers slack off too much and become weak?"


    Integra:" Echo''s right. We shouldn''t have this many casualties. Walter, get their training menus up. So that they won''t be a canon fooder later. Also, hire a Mercenary to fill out the gap that been lost from the 36."


    Walter:" Affirmative, well then. I''ll go arrange it. Have a good day Integra-Sama, Echo-Sama."


    Walter then left the room, leaving both Integra and Echo alone. She then changes from her serious self to her brocon self.


    Integra:" Echo, please give Onee-Sama a hug. I''ve been stressed out this day."


    Echo:" Here, I give you a hug."


    Echo then gives her a hug then a ??p pillow, letting her sleep. They stay like that for half an hour until Seras intrude and disturb them.


    Seras:" Integra-Sama!! About my bed. Why did you change it into a coffin?" she walks in without knocking then froze from what she sees.


    Integra:" You know Seras! That you should knock before getting inside other''s room." she says while her eyes twitching.


    Seras:" Yes, I know." seras answer getting nervous.


    Integra:" THEN WHY DIDN''T YOU KNOCK BEFORE ENTERING?"


    Integra:" Haizz, she just destroyed the mood. I''ll just go back to work."


    Echo:" Hahaha, that girl''s timing is really bad. Well, I''ll go see how Walter. Gotta check how good is the mercenaries that we will hire. Bye, Nee-Sama"


    Three days Later -Hellsing HQ- inside one of the rooms.


    Mercenary1:" Hey, Leader. What job did we get now?"


    Mercenary2:" Yeah, Leader. Are we going to be a bodyguard of this mansion master?"


    Mercenary 1:" Hahaha, if we can work in a place like this. We''ll have a lavish life latter. Right Guys!!!"


    Mercenaries:" YEAH!!! Hahaha."


    Leader:" Nope, it''s not a job like that. Guys, Listen and don''t be surprised. Our job now is killing monsters."


    Mercenary2:" Hahaha, you gotta be shitting us right?"


    Integra:" he''s not joking! You people were hired to fight monsters, to be precise it is a Ghouls and Vampire."


    Mercenary1:" Are you kidding us? There''s no such thing as Vampire!"


    Integra:" You just didn''t know that they exist. To be more accurate, we didn''t let civilians know that they exist."


    Mercenary2:" Yeah, right. Go tells your delusion to other people."


    Leader:" Wait!! Miss, if Vampire really exists then show proof to us that they exist."


    Integra:" I see. Well, I''ll let you see for yourself a real Vampire!!" Integra says while pointing to the right of the room and there are Seras there.


    Seras:" Hi!" she said while grinning.


    Leader:" Huuuh? This girl is a vampire?" he said then walk towards Seras.


    Seras:" Yes, I am." she answered while scratching her cheek.


    Seras:" Integra-Sama, they are laughing at me. This is why I told you to let Master do it."


    Integra:" Well, if I let Alucard do it he will slaughter them because he felt irritated by them. And you Seras, Show them what a Vampire can do."


    Seras:" Roger!!" she answers then faces the M.Leader " Come on!" she gestured at him to come at her.


    Leader:" Hahaha. Hey, little girl. If you''re a Vampire then I was a Frankenstein."


    He said while acting like a Frankenstein only to be blown away from Seras finger poke. Then she does it again three more times.


    Leader:" Wh.. What happened? All I see is her finger poking at me then I was blown away."


    Mercenary1:" Leader!! Are you okay?"


    Leader:" I can''t believe it. Is there really a Vampire in this world? And this girl is one of them?"


    Alucard:" Of course, She is. Although she''s just the lowest of the Vampire." Alucard walking through the wall while saying that. He sees the Mercenaries trembling in shock and fear.


    Walter:" Integra-Sama, I''m very sorry. I tried to stop him."


    Integra:" It''s fine Walter."


    Alucard:" Hmph, They are the ones that will be protecting my Master. I came to see what sort off people they are."


    As they were talking with each other. Echo comes in.


    Echo:" Oohhh. Is this the Mercenary that we hire?"


    Walter:" Yes, Echo-Sama. This is mercenaries that I pick up."


    Leader:" Hei, what is a kid doing here?"


    Echo:" hmph. This kid is your employer. You!!! Your name? It seems like you''re the leader of the bunch. I''ll test you! Come with me."


    Leader:" Huh? What is this kid doing? The name is Pip Bernadotte. You sure you can fight, kid? I''ve been coming out from many wars you know?"


    They arrived at the yard. Echo and Pip face each other. The rest of the Mercenaries along with Integra, Alucard, Seras, and Walter was watching them from the side.


    Echo:" Well, let''s start the match. Come at me at full power. Also, use your gun if you don''t want to be defeated miserably."


    Pip hearing this is a little angry to be looked down upon by a kid. But, was still be able to calm down. Thinking back of how he was played by the girl Vampire he thought maybe this kid also as strong as that. So he takes his word seriously.


    Echo seeing Pip being able to maintain his reasons after hearing his taunts was a little impressed.'' Hoo, he''s calm after hearing that. That''s good quality there.''


    Pip test the water and try shooting him with a handgun. But, halfway through the bullet was splits in two avoiding him. Seeing this he takes out his ?ssault rifle AK-74 and starts shooting at Echo.


    Echo seeing this started to dodge and once in a while block the bullets with his strings. After a minute exchange, he started to get bored and take out his Black Keys.


    Echo:" Since you are not coming and taking a distance. I''ll come to you."


    He said then use Soru closing their distance in an instant then placed the Black Keys on his neck.


    Echo:" You''re dead!!"


    Echo:" Nope! I''m just a normal human."


    Pip:" The hell is that normal? Can we be as strong as you if we trained here?"


    Walter:" That would be impossible in a short time. Echo-Sama is a special case. He was a genius that absorbed all thing that he was taught with at a fast pace and have a body that can adapt to any training he was given."


    Pip:" Damn, and here I thought that we can become that strong here."


    Echo:" Hahaha. Good luck with that Oldman. Oh right! Onee-Sama we got a letter."


    Integra:" a letter? From who?"


    Echo:" Just look at the sender''s address."


    Integra:" Division XIII, the Iscariot Organization. Enrich Maxwell?"


    Echo:" Yes!! It seems the Vatican wants to meet us knowing we''re attacked just the other days."


    Integra opens the letter then starts to read it.


    '' Dear Sir. Hellsing, Leader of England Royal Protestant Knight.


    Is the crisp fall air not perfect for visiting the museum. Met me at the above location on the 10th at 3:00 pm if you wish to join me.


    Sign. Knight of the Church Paladin, Father Alexander Anderson. Vatican Special Operations Division XIII, The Iscariots.''


    Integra:" Hmmm. Why not? Let''s see what they want to talk about."


    Echo:" Please don''t leave me behind!! I want to see how he is. That Alexander. Hahaha"

 Chapter 9

    10th, September 1999 -Imperial War Museum-


    Echo POV


    We''ve been waiting at the Imperial War Museum since 3:00 pm, it''s been 30 minutes from the promised time. Integra has been restless since a while ago, thinking that this was a trap.


    Integra:" Walter! What time is it?"


    Walter:" Now is 3:30 pm Integra-Sama."


    Integra:" then where are they? Is this really a trap?" she says while bitting her own thumb.


    Echo:" Calm down Onee-Sama, I don''t think that muscle brain priest have the capability to scheme. Hahaha"


    Anderson:" What did you say, boy? Do you want a fight?"


    Echo:" Ohhh, here they come!! You''re late Paladin Anderson! Didn''t sloth one of the seven deadly sins? You''ve sinned today father Anderson. Hahaha"


    Anderson:" Your mouth is still as sharp as ever, boy. Want me to saw it for you, HUH?" he says while taking out his bayonet.


    Echo:" Hooh, can you do it?" I answer, taking out black keys while spreading my wire.


    Integra:" Stop it, Echo! We''re not here to fight."


    ???:" Father Anderson, please don''t fight. We''re here to talk."


    Anderson:" Shut up!!! Originally it was because off you that we''re late here Maxwell!"


    Maxwell:" Yes yes, it was my fault that we''re late. Please calm your anger."


    Anderson:" ''Sigh'' Oi, Hellsing kid. You''ve got yourself lucky!"


    Alucard:" Hmmm, if you won''t fight. I''ll take your place. Kukukuku"


    Integra:" Stop it Alucard, don''t make the situation worse."


    Alucard:" Ahhh, as you wish. My Master."


    Maxwell:" well well. Director Integra, sorry for being late! This place is magnificent that I got lost in time!" he said walking closer towards Integra.


    Integra:" Don''t come closer! Just tell, what the Iscariot wants with us?"


    Maxwell:" ''Sigh'' DON''T BE SO FULL OFF YOURSELF!!! IF IT''S NOT FOR THE ORDER OF THE VATICAN, I WOULD NEVER DEAL WITH YOUR HERETICAL ILK. SO, JUST SHUT UP AND LISTEN. YOU IGNORANT HEATEN SOW!"


    Echo:" See that Onee-Sama!!! its hard to talk human language with fanatic people. Let''s just beat them up and show them that we''re human with free will!! Not just some Lamb to be herded like what they always preach!!"


    Anderson:" You heretical kid. Take back what you said or I''ll kill you now."


    Echo:" Hahahaha. You wanna fight? Don''t expect I let you live like last time."


    Third POV


    Just as it was heating up and they are about to go full blown fight.


    Seras:" Attention Tourist, this here is the art galleries."


    Seras comes, along with, full of elderly tourist.


    Elderly1:" Oooohh, this must be one of those juggling performance. I love to watch one of these when I was a boy."


    Elderly2:" Boy, what are you going to play with all this wire and sword?"


    Anderson:" Hehehe. You got yourself lucky, kid."


    Echo:" Hmph, let''s just say it''s your lucky day."


    Echo then left the place along with Alucard and Anderson left too not long after. Leaving the dumbfounded Integra along with Maxwell. Walter just chilling himself seeing all this.


    Integra:" Very well! It seems you have also got yourself a troublesome subordinate, though mine is my own brother. Speaking from one swine to another!"


    Maxwell:" still spiteful are we? Fine, call me whatever you want!"


    In the background, Walter tells Seras that she has done a ''Good Job''.


    ~~~


    They changed place to a cafe close to the museum. Echo was back and now sitting next to integra.


    Maxwell:" Now, Let''s start. We''ve heard about what happened a week ago. I''m sure you want to know who they are."


    Integra:" Yes, as expected of the Vatican. So?"


    Maxwell:" We know many things about them. Do you want to know? Do you want to know? If you want to know, just says Please! And we can have a cooperation and we will tell you anything about them!"


    Echo:" Hmph, you Vatican people are really shameless bunch. We already know who they are! ''Millennium'' the last battalion. A group that''s formed by Nazi to create a supernatural army, 50 years ago both Walter and Alucard destroyed them. But it seems that all that hold the highest position be able to escape and you vatican shelters them and give the a fund for ther experiments in hope that you gain something from it. But, right as they succeeded. They left the Vatican giving you nothing and now you want us to clean your shit up. Do you think us as an idiot?"


    Echo:" Hmph. Well!! Anything to say? Let''s go Onee-Sama. Oh yeah Mr. Maxwell the thing that Millennium want is a never ending war and your Vatican also was one off their target for this war."


    Echo and integra left leaving the shocked Maxwell.


    Maxwell:" How did they know? Even i just be able to learn about this recently through interrogation of the bishop that''s work with Millennium. And it seems they know about them better than us."


    Back to Echo and co.


    Integra:" Echo, How did you know about this information? And why didn''t you tell me?"


    Echo:" Of course I investigated them and I haven''t told you because we''ve been too busy lately. Their base is in South America, Rio. So, what are we going to do?"


    Integra:" We''ll send Alucard, Seras, and the mercenary to Rio."


    Echo:" Eeehhhh!!! What about me? I want to go too!" he said pointing at himself.


    Integra:" You''re holding the port with me and Walter. You''ve been playing around lately. Let Alucard have some fun."


    Integra:" Don''t jinx it!"


    Walter:" Hohoho, Echo-Sama has become quite a Battle Maniac."


    Integra:" and whose fault is it? It was you and Alucard that''s been following his whims."


    Walter:" Well, Echo-Sama is a genius that it was an honor to be able to nurture him to become a warrior. Hohoho"


    Echo:" Hahaha, isn''t that okay? This way I can protect Hellsing easier."


    Integra:" Haaah. What should I do with you? Whatever, let''s just go back! Alucard and Seras waiting for us."


    That night, Hellsing HQ.


    Third POV


    Alucard:" to think that the organization that we destroyed 50 years ago was still active."


    Alucard:" Haha, that boy is full of surprises. As for the Nazis, I''ve had a feeling that we are not as thorough as we thought in eliminating them last time and this confirmed it."


    Walter:" I see. It seems the undead units that they''ve been experimenting 50 years ago is completed. The power of the one we fight now is far stronger than the one we fight in the past."


    Echo:" Heh, whether they are strong or not is meaningless. We''ll just destroy them again. Right? Shinigami no Walter."


    Walter:" I''ll leave it to the young people this time. Us old people will just watch over in the back. Hahaha"


    Alucard:" it''s a terrible thing to be ''aging''"


    Walter:" Us English can enjoy aging."


    Walter:" Alucard, we''re going to be sending you to South America as soon as possible. We don''t have enough information about them. The one that will be going is You, Seras, and our newcomers."


    Alucard:" Taking them will be a bother, I''ll just use them as a messenger."


    Walter:" Ohh, but I think that they will do well. Echo-Sama has been grilling them with a Spartan training along with our soldiers that survived last time."


    Alucard:" Ooohh. Are they be able to handle his so-called training?"


    Walter:" It seems that Echo-Sama created a liquid that can help humans heal and restore stamina faster. So, every time they were exhaust. He will just dump them into the pool of the liquid then restart their training again and the result already showed itself."


    Alucard:" kukuku. That boy is really so full of surprises. To think that he make something like that in a short time."


    Walter:" Yes, you''re right"


    Alucard:" By the way, how do you plan to get her to South America? It looks like she can''t cross the oceans."


    Walter:" So, she can''t after all? How about an airplane?"


    Alucard:" No! she''s half-human half-vampire. *Dust to Dust*"


    The next morning. Echo, Integra, and Walter was walking toward the front hall.


    Integra:" So, how did you decide to transport the Police girl?"


    Walter:" About that. I think you should see it for yourself."


    Echo:" What is this? Acting so mysterious."


    As they arrived in the front hall, they see that the Mercenaries were working on loading a coffin where Seras was in while Alucard was ordering them.


    Echo:" Hahahaha. Do you decide to transport her in a coffin? Poor girl still hasn''t comfortable with her new bed and now she has to go overseas inside it."


    Integra:" This will never get through the custom."


    Walter:" There''s no custom?"


    Integra:" Why not?"


    Walter:" It''s a smuggling ship. We use it because we also have to transport our weapons."


    Integra:" I see. You dressed differently Alucard. I thought sunlight was Vampire''s worst enemy?"


    Alucard:" I can''t broad a plane looking like usual. Besides sunlight only work on weak Vampire. For me, I just don''t like it."


    Integra:" Is that so? Alucard! There is only one order. "Search and Destroy" over."


    Alucard:" Understood, My Master!"

 Chapter 10

    Echo was lounging around in his room, looking bored.


    Echo:" I wonder, have Alucard and the other safely arrived in Rio? They must be having fun in there. Well, let''s just learn something new to staves the boredom." he thought and start searching for something to learn inside GoB.


    Echo:" Let see, as the war is so close and there will be many Vampire that more powerful than usual. Let''s find an anti-immortal weapon. I find one, which is Harpe. The immortal slaying Scythe. Well then, let''s start to learn how to use a scythe." and so, he starts to train how to use a scythe that day.


    South America, Brazil. The capital city, Rio De Janeiro.


    Alucard arrived at hotel Lio then he starts to speak to the receptionist.


    Alucard:" I''m the one who reserved the suit."


    Receptionist:" Yes, your suit is at the top floor, Mr. J. H. Blender." as they were talking Pip comes in along with the rest of the mercenaries, bringing the luggage.


    Pip:"This way. This way!"


    Alucard:" The suit is on the top floor."


    Pip:" On it. You guys, to the top floor!"


    Receptionist:" Excuse me, sir. For luggage this large, this hotel is."


    Alucard:" There is no problem. There is no problem, you''ve seen nothing." says Alucard using hypnotism


    Receptionist:" Yes, there is no problem." answer him while looking blank.


    Pip:" What is that? Magic?"


    Alucard:" Nothing, how is the transport? Hurry and bring it to the room."


    Pip:" There is no problem, or more like it''s going too well."


    Alucard:" Really? Heh, it looks like this is going to be a fun vacation. Kukuku"


    Pip:" What with this room? We have to book a room at some cheap Hotel. What with this different treatment?"


    Alucard:" Heh, Sometimes its better to be in a cheap Hotel."


    Pip:" Is that really so?"


    Alucard:" By the way. Why is she so silent?"


    Pip:" She''s been a real pain in the ?ss on the way here. She must have given up after tiring herself."


    Alucard:" Is that so? You can leave and wait for my instruction."


    When night comes.


    Alucard then opens Seras coffin to see that she''s still asleep. He gets close to her and starts waking her up.


    Alucard:" Hei, Police girl! Wake up! Oi, Wake up!" After a while, she started to wake up.


    Alucard:" Wake up! Something interesting is about to happen!"


    She gets up from her coffin and starts to look around. It was so noisy and there''s a chopper outside their room.


    Seras:" What! What is this? What happen?"


    Alucard:" The War has started. The enemies have been locking on us since we arrived. Go hide in the closet for now. I''ll greet them up. Now, before I forgot. Let''s activate these things that Echo told me to bring."


    From a suitcase, there''s a drone equipped with a HD camera. Though Alucard didn''t know what it is. He starts to activate it by pressing the on bu??on. As it was activated, it starts to hover around and record a video around Alucard.


    Back in Hellsing HQ. Echo was still training with his scythe when suddenly his phone started to ring.


    Echo:" Ohhh, it seems they have started. Good thing that I found the drone inside the GoB, now I can watch Alucard in action in the front seat. Let''s go get Integra and Walter. So, we can watch it together." He left his room to search for them so they can start to watch it.


    Back to Alucard.


    Alucard:" Now, that it is done. Let''s greet our guests."


    SWAT.L:" This is Alpha to Headquarters. We''ve arrived in front of the target room. Please give us an order, over."


    [This is Headquarters, you have permission to engage with the target, over.]


    SWAT.L:" Alpha copy that! We will start to engage, over."


    [We hear that. May the lady fortune be with you.]


    The squad then starts to move. They are in front of Alucard''s rooms and start to break in. When they got in, the room was so dark that they can''t see anything.


    Alucard:" Kukuku. Welcome to my room. What business do you have here?"


    They look in front of them and start to see a man standing in front of them wearing a red hat and coats along with red-tinted glasses. Along with the dark rooms the situation becomes so eerie.


    SWAT.L:" SHOOTS HIM!!"


    BANG BANG BANG


    SWAT1:" Captain, is this really necessary to do this? Isn''t it really excessive?"


    SWAT.L:" We don''t have to care about that. It was an order from the higher up, we only obey."


    Alucard:" kukukuku hehehe HAHAHAHA. It''s useless! You can''t kill me with that toy."


    SWAT2:" It-It''s still alive!!!"


    SWAT1:" M-Monster!"


    Alucard:" Yeah, I''ve been called that for a while."


    After saying that he started to slaughter them. After he was done the room was painted red from blood. Alucard was the only one left standing in the middle of the room.


    Alucard:" You can come out now, Police girl!"


    Seras come out from the closet and looks at the situation inside the room.


    Alucard:" So? They shoot at us. That means they are enemies. Do you understand Seras Victoria?"


    Seras:" Yes, Master!"


    Alucard then takes out his phone and starts to call Integra.


    At Hellsing HQ.


    Inside the room Echo, Integra, and Walter was watching Alucard on the screen until they see him making a call.


    RIIING RIIING RIIING


    Integra answer the phone.


    Integra:" Alucard, is that you?"


    Alucard:" Yes, Master. This is your faithful servant, Integra. I''ve annihilated their first wave. An order, give me an order. My Master!"


    Alucard:" Ahhh. So that what the things do!! So Master my order! The elite force maybe was controlled by them. But, they attacked following the order. The one that I kill and will kill from now on is just normal human. I can kill them without hesitation, without regrets. Because I was a monster! What about you Integra? The one that will put a gun against their head and pull the trigger will be me. But, your killing intent will be what kills them. So, what will you do? Order me Hellsing''s Chief! Integra Fairbrook Wingates Hellsing!"


    Integra was trembling and start to kit her cigars. She takes a deep breath then hit the table while shouting. " DON''T UNDERESTIMATE ME SERVANT. I ALREADY GAVE MY ORDER, NOTHING HAS CHANGE!!! "SEARCH AND DESTROY" CRUSH ANYTHING AND EVERYTHING THAT GETS IN OUR WAY. DON''T RUN OR HIDE, BUT LEAVE FROM THE FRONT DOOR!!! DESTROY ALL OBSTACLES AND GO STRAIGHT THROUGH!!"


    Alucard:" HAHAHAHAHA.. Rogers, very good! Magnificent. The one who is hit will stand up straighter! Integra. I''ll go now. Watch me Lord Hellsing!"


    Alucard then left his room after instructing Seras to go to the rooftop after he was done cleaning up the corridor. He opened the door outside to see a squad already waiting for him. He walk calmly in front of them like he was in the middle of catwalk. Right as he was in the center of the room, he raise his Cassul and Jackals and start to shoot them. After killing all of them he then walks leisurely toward the lift where another squad already there as they are trying to run away. He hypnosis one of them to hold the lift open bu??on. His squad finding his strange behavior tried to snap him out of it. But it was useless, so they shoot him then throw him out. As the lift was about to close Alucard already in front of it. He blocks the lift door and starts another massacre. He arrived on the first floor and start to kill anyone on that floor. He then throws eight corpses through the window for them to be impaled by the flagpole and he get out through the front door in front of many cameras and an army of police. This is a declaration of war for the Millennium.

 Chapter 11

    Somewhere else in South America. Inside an airship with a Nazi Symbol stood a man who is a little chubby wearing square glasses. He was now watching the Alucard declaration of war.


    Major:" What a magnificent declaration of war!! Truly truly magnificent. Now, the war started again! A never-ending war."


    He then sat on his chair, behind him two more people emerge. One of them was wearing a long coat and weird glasses while the other was wearing a military uniform from a hat to his boots.


    Major:" Look at that, it''s so repulsive it makes me shake. That is what we strive for! Those that dance over death and life. Between insanity and sanity."


    Back to Alucard.


    Alucard:" What wrong? Are you going to keep sending these fools as a sacrifice or are you going to come yourself?"


    He said while looking at the Police Garrison. Within them, someone comes out.


    ???:" Well well well. As expected as someone as famed as Alucard. Let me introduce myself, my name is Tubalcaine Alhambra my friend called me *Dandy Man*"


    Dandy Man:" They had a foolish commander, so they end up like that. They want it even if they have to die to pursue it. Eternal life, that is!!"


    Alucard:" There is no saving these fools. There no such thing as Eternal in this world!"


    Dandy Man:" They may seem pitiful to you, but they were of some small use!! How many bullets did you have now, Alucard?"


    Alucard:" You think that you have a chance of winning because I waste my bullets on them? Kukukuku. It appears that you lot in the impression that I can''t fight without a gun? So, what will you do now, Dandy Man?"


    Dandy Man:" We will take your life, and make you one of our samples. For Millennium!!!"


    As he finishes talking, all around Dandy Man come out a lot of playing Card. It floats around him and starts to attack Alucard. The cards shoot towards Alucard and destroy anything in his vicinity creating cloud dust.


    After a while, Alucard comes out from within the could dust with only one cut on his cheek.


    Alucard:" Really!! What a bunch of hopeless lot you people are. Then I''ll be your opponent again this time. I''ll destroy you people for a second time!!"


    Alucard then start to shoot at Dandy Man only for the bullet to hit the police that''s still in the vicinity. They then started to exchange blows between bullets and cards all around the place, creating casualties in the surrounding. Police, Reporter, Cameraman, and all people in the surrounding started to fall one by one because of their fights, creating a situation like a hell on earth with bodies litter around the place.


    Police temporary Headquarters.


    Pip was seen walking around the police. Wearing their uniform, and start to walk inside the commander tent.


    Pip:" Report, commander. Something terrible has happened!!"


    Commander:" What? What happens out there? Tell me!!"


    Pip:" Yes, it''s terrible that you have to die." he said and start to shoot at anyone inside the tent. He then put a time bomb and left.


    After he walked away, the tent blows up creating a chaos at the headquarters.


    Pip:" Well, I have done my job here! Let''s search for the chopper."


    On the roof with Alucard


    Alucard:" Kukukuku. This is magnificent!! They''ve created something to stop me from healing. Aaahhhh, this is so much fun that it is a waste to end it quickly. But, I''ve been playing around too much."


    Alucard:" Kukuku hehehe HAHAHAHA." As Dandy Man talk to him Alucard suddenly started to laugh.


    Dandy Man:" Why are you laughing?" He said irritated.


    Alucard:" No, it''s just that I''m so happy! That there''s still many fool in the world. It is going to be fun! You want War? Why not, I''ll give you war!"


    They started to continue their fight. Not having a bullets Alucard fight b?r?handed now. Dandy Man didn''t let him get close. He attack from afar with his card. Their fight destroyed the building they''re on. As they fight Seras suddenly giving a fire support for Alucard making Dandy Man distracted. Alucard then use his abilities Dark Composition to make several copies of himself that hide inside the cloud of dust revealing only its shadow to confuse him. While Dandy Man was looking around for the real Alucard where about, he suddenly appeared in front of him and kick his right leg, breaking it then grab his neck up. He tried to get out of it by throwing his card which is successful. He then throw a punch toward Alucard while Alucard thrust out his hand in a knives position and tore through his fist then he grab his face.


    Alucard:" Caught you!! Check mate! Now, fulfill your duty, I''ll have your life. Tell me everything you know." Alucard then bites his neck. He then died, burned by a flame that comes from within his bodies.


    Alucard:" Kukuku. It seems that master Echo was right! They only want a war, a never-ending war and their first target were us. For revenge against us who destroyed them half a century ago. Hahaha, did you hear that Master? They want a war with us." Alucard says while looking at the position of the drone which is following him all this time.


    Back at Hellsing Manor.


    Integra:" it seems that war was looming over us. Walter, prepare everything for the war! Updated all weapons for our soldiers. Echo, you increase their training again. Make them battles ready!"


    Walter:" Affirmative Integra-Sama, then I''ll leave to work on it."


    Integra:" Super Soldiers Serum? You''ve been creating something like that? What will it do?"


    Echo:" Well, when I first fight with Father Anderson I got an inspiration. If the Vatican can make a Regenerator and use it for their executioner, why not us? It is not efficient to just rely on Alucard all the time. This Super Soldier Serum after we injected it will enhance the person who was injected with Super Strength, Super Speed, enhanced reaction time, Super endurance and an enhanced healing factor. With this, it was easier for us to hunt a vampire later."


    Integra:" have you test it? Won''t there any side effects from it?"


    Echo:" I already tried it on criminal and its a success! There are no side effects from it. We can start to administer it on our soldiers now if you want it."


    Integra:" Is that so, then begin the process. Give it to all our soldiers, is there enough for all of them?"


    Echo:" Okay, don''t worry I have enough of it that we can also give it to the mercenaries if you want."


    Integra:" don''t give it to them for now. Until their loyalty tested, we can''t give them something like this. We can''t have enhanced human running around in the world if they defected from us."


    Echo:" Okay! And this is your portion. This one is much stronger than the one that I''ll distribute to the soldiers. It is around three times stronger. With the healing factors five times stronger. You should inject it tonight before sleeping. We will be busy in the next few days." he said while giving Integra the Serum.


    Echo:" Well then, I''ll go see our soldiers now."


    Integra:" This is Integra speaking, who is this?"


    ???:" Integra, Call in a meeting for the round tables. I''ll be waiting at the Palace."


    Integra:" Your Majesty Queen Elizabeth!! I''ll immediately call in the meeting. When will it be held?"


    Queen E:" The meeting will be held tomorrow at 07.00 pm. Call Alucard to hurry came back, we will wait for him."


    Integra:" Yes, Your Majesty!"


    Integra closes the phone and just sits there for a while then she picked it up again and start to call Alucard.


    Integra:" Alucard, how is the situation there?"


    Alucard:" Master! Right now we will stay low at our save place. Is there a new order?"


    Integra:" Tomorrow you have to hurry back. Her Majesty wants to hold a meeting."

 Chapter 12

    Echo POV


    I left Integra office to meet up with the Soldiers. Many must have been confused, since when did I create the Super Soldiers Serum? The answer is since Valentine''s brother attack us! Seeing our soldiers died is such a waste, so I created it for them. With Denial of Nothingness, I can create it with just imagination. I created it so you only need to inject it and drink concentrated nutrition to fuel it then sleep it a night. Unlike how the Captain America who have to be shoot by Vita ray.


    I arrived at the monitor room. I got in and search for the Captain.


    Captain:" Sir, do you have an order for us?" the captain salute when he sees me then asks.


    Echo:" Yes, order all soldiers to gather in front of the dorm. The one who is guarding the gate includes. I''ll wait there." I order him then leave.


    After waiting for ten minutes, all the soldiers started to ?ssemble. I raised my hand to tell them to be silent.


    Echo:" Before I told you what is this ?ssembly all about. CAPTAIN! are there anyone absent today?"


    Captain:" No sir, there''s no absent today."


    Echo:" Good, Now then! We got to know that Millennium will attack England in a few days. In light of this information, I want all of you to be stronger so that you''re not going to become just a canon fooder in this fight. But, to practice in this short time is impossible. That why I created something that can make Super Soldiers in a short time." he announced to them and see their reactions. They become worried when they heard that there is going to be a war with a Vampire. But, they brighten up when they heard about the later news. They trust this genius Master of them. Echo then take out the SS Serum and the Concentrate Nutrition.


    After being dispersed, they left after taking their portion of SS Serum then go inside the dormitory. As for Echo, he goes to the rooftops then sit there while spreading his Kenbunshoku Haki. Although he knows that there won''t be an attack today. But, just to be on the safe side.


    The next morning. Echo wakes the Soldiers up at 7.00 am. He orders them to get used to their newfound strength then go back to his room to sleep.


    Five hours later he woke up. He washes himself up then go watch the soldiers that were sparing with each other. He then goes to search for Walter.


    He finds him in the basement.


    Echo:" Walter! Can you make the weapons for the soldiers with one that higher firepower and calibers? As you must hear they are not a normal human anymore with their strength now. They must be able to withstand the recoil from stronger guns now."


    Walter:" Hmmm, although we''re lacking on time. I can achieve it by tomorrow noontime, is that okay Echo-Sama?"


    Echo:" yeah, that''s good enough. So, what do you think of their power now?"


    Walter:" I was surprised. To think that you can create something like that, as expected of Echo-Sama. If any of them survive this war. Our Hellsing will become the strongest organization in the world."


    Echo:" Hahaha, you''re right and this war will become a whetstone for them to get experience. Well, that''s all I want to say. See you later Walter."


    Echo:" Good afternoon Onee-Sama, how do you feel?"


    Integra:" I feel good! But, I still can''t control my strength."


    Echo:" I see, then why don''t we spar to make you get used to it?"


    Integra:" That''s a good idea. Let''s go!"


    Echo and Integra left to spar. To went to the yards, and Integra brought her fencing sword. Echo then brought out the Black Keys and they started to fight. At first Integra fight clumsily because of her control of strength is not good. But, as she was an experience swordwoman she started to get the hang of her strength after they fight for an hour and a half.


    They finished their fight three hours later since her stamina is high now. In those three hours, Integra successfully controls her strength. They then go to take a bath as they have to go to a meeting at the Palace.


    With Alucard at the Outskirt of Rio


    Alucard and the other was thinking about how to get back to London since they''re a Terrorist here now. When suddenly the door of their hotels was broke in by someone.


    From outside comes Father Alexander Anderson and suddenly he hit Alucard. They exchange blow for a while, then stop.


    Hearing that and the order from the Vatican he brought. Alucard then left to the airport with the other.


    That night. Outside London, Royal Villa Crownie House at 9.00 pm.


    Echo POV


    Right now, we are in the presence of Her Majesty Queen Elizabeth, along with the Council of twelve and also Maxwell from the Vatican along with two of his escort.


    Queen E:" Sir Hellsing, Hasn''t he arrived yet?"


    Integra:" No, I believe he will be here shortly."


    After waiting for a while, Alucard comes along with Seras and Pip.


    Alucard:" To have all of you gathered here is simply wonderful. I have come back My Master."


    Integra:" Good work! You''re in the presence of Her Majesty, remove your sunglasses."


    Guard:" Don''t move! You can''t get closer towards Her Majesty."


    Queen E:" It''s Okay!" she said, then she looks towards Alucard.


    Queen E:" How long has it been since we last met, Vampire? Now I''m just an Old Woman, not young anymore."


    Alucard:" It''s been 50 years, you''ve become a Queen. The boyish Princess of the past now has become more beautiful." he said while kneeling in front of her then kiss her hand.


    Queen E:" Hahaha, still a flatterer I see. Make your report, Vampire."


    He got up and start to talk.


    Alucard:" Once upon a time, there was an insane SS Major. " Let''s make an army of Immortals, let''s make a troop of Immortals" that kind of thought become a reality thanks to his insanity, That is the Millennium. About 55 years ago this group was destroyed by me and Walter. But, they never give up! They survived the purge and bid their time. It seems from what Master Echo told us the Vatican saved and fund them." he speaks until here and looks toward Maxwell followed by all that''s in the room.


    Maxwell:" Now now, it was just some of the rebels inside the Vatican. Even we just know about it because of the recent incident."


    Alucard:" Let''s continue! Now after 55 years along with support from the Vatican, they are frighteningly close to perfecting the Vampire. The Army of Immortal ones, the remains of the Third Reich "Last Battalion""


    Echo suddenly speak, to the shock of all that is in the rooms.


    ???:" Wow!!! How did you know that I was here? Even the Major have a hard time perceiving my presence. Anyway, nice to meet you! I am Millennium messenger, Warrant Officer Schr?dinger." he said bowing to all that present.

 Chapter 13

    The room becomes silent with the new guest. All the people in the room except Echo, Alucard, and Walter tense up.


    Schr?dinger:" Well then, as I said! I was just a messenger." he walks over the table then he put a monitor there.


    Walter:" How did you come! The defense of this Mansion is almost perfect and we haven''t heard any breach on it."


    Schr?dinger:" Hahaha, it is impossible to catch me! I am Everywhere, I am Nowhere."


    Echo:" Omnipresent Huh! What an annoying ability."


    Integra:" Omnipresent? You''re right it''s a troublesome ability."


    Schr?dinger:" Ping Pong!!! You''re good Hellsing young master, to guess from just that little information." he said as he takes out a remote control and tried to switch on the monitor.


    It showed a blank for a while, with noise from the other side. Then it was on, showing someone wearing a square glasses from the other side.


    Major:" Ohh, it''s on. Hello there everyone from the Round Table!"


    Alucard:" Hei there, Major."


    Integra:" So, you''re the enemy Leader Huh?"


    Major:" Aaahhh. It''s you, the commanding officer of Hellsing. Integra Hellsing, right? This is the first time meeting you."


    Integra:" What is your objective?"


    Major:" Objective? None, we don''t have an objective, Fraulein."


    Sir Hugh:" Don''t play around with us. There is no way that you don''t have an objective!"


    Major:" SILENCE!! I am not speaking to you, I''m speaking to this fraulein. It''s been a long time I''m speaking with a girl, don''t interfere "BOY"


    Major:" Listen fraulein! If you are in a position to start a war, you should know this. In this world, there are those that choose to have no purpose. To get what they want, to put it simply. There are those who are like us." saying until this the major show us a military man that was tied being devoured by ghoul.


    Maxwell:" You bastard have lost it!"


    Major:" Youre one to talk, Leader of Vatican 13th Chapter!"


    Major:" Fortunately, your God guarantee my madness. But may I ask? Who guarantees the sanity of your God?" he said making Maxwell stunned.


    Maxwell:"..."


    Maxwell:" Just who do you think you''re speaking to?"


    Major:" Perhaps I should have worn the black uniforms of the SS. We are the SS if the third Reich. Just how many people do you think we have killed? This is the group that lived and breath war and violence, you know? Insane? You say this now? It''s a bit too late to say it after half a century."


    Major:" Very well!!! Slendid!! They to stop me! But my enemy is not you 13th chapter of Vatican. No! My enemy is England!! Knight if Religion! No! My enemy is the man who standing happily over there." he says as he pointed at Alucard.


    Alucard:" kukukuheheheheHAHAHAHA! What tenancity! It''s them, hahaha! What a wonderful declaration of war."


    Major:" of course, we are the type who hold tenacity in high regard. We''ll overturn worthless conclusion again and again."


    As the Major finish speaking Echo suddenly launched a chain toward Schr?dinger and wrapped him in it. This is not a normal chain, this is the anti divine chains. The chains of Heaven Enkidu. But this one is special, Echo has used his Denial of Nothingness to make it nullify any supernatural ability.


    Schr?dinger:" Hahaha, this is useless! Haven''t I said I am everywhere, I am nowhere!" he said as he tried to leave the room. " Eh?"


    Major:" How rude of you to catch the envoy! And it seems we''ve underestimated you, Hellsing young master. You''ve foiled our plans again and again."


    Echo:" didn''t that why you send him here? So that he can come and go as he please. Too bad, I can capture him just fine, hehe"


    Major:" You''re right, it''s our miscalculation that you have this kind of ability."


    Echo:" Dealing with a supernatural entity on a daily basis. of course, I have to find a way to seal their powers. Seras, destroy the monitor."


    Seras hearing his order immediately shoot the monitor.


    Echo:" Now then. Alucard, devour him. We can''t leave him alive and it will be annoying to kill him with his ability."


    Alucard:" as you wish! Master Echo." he then walks toward Schr?dinger and starts to devour him. Creating a gore scene and make the one in the room feel disgusted except for the one from Hellsing who has seen this in a daily basis.


    After he finished and kill Schr?dinger, Alucard suddenly convulsing then he disappeared.


    Integra:" This!!! What happened to him, Echo?"


    Integra:" Then, what will happen to him?"


    Echo:" Ahh. He will be indisposed for a while. I don''t know how long."


    Integra:" WHAT!!! He is our Trump card in this war! What will we do without him?"


    Echo:" Now now, calm down Onee-Sama. We are in the presence of Her Majesty."


    Queen E:" It''s okay. Now, Hellsing Boy! What should we do without Alucard, you must know what to do as you seem to be too calm seeing him missing like that. Do you have another trump Card?"


    Echo:" As expected of Her Majesty. You''ve seen through me. But, Before I answer. Can I dispose of this Vatican dogs? They''ve been looking like they are our allies but in reality, they are waiting for us to kill each other with Millennium before they swept the both of us in one sweep."


    Queen E:" I see. What despicable people. You have my permission."


    Echo:" as you command!" Echo said as he stares at the three Vatican''s in the room.


    Maxwell:" Wait, don''t listen to him!!" he said as he look at Echo who are walking to him.


    Echo:" Hehehe, do you believe that I''m afraid of the Vatican? I can destroy it if I want. Just accept your death!" he said then kill them all.


    Echo:" Well then, as the nuisance has been cleaned up. Let''s continue! As her Majesty says, we Hellsing have another trump card beside Alucard. Lately, we Hellsing have created a Super Soldiers Serum that can be injected to normal humans to make them having Superhuman power. As of yesterday, we have injected it to 60 of our soldiers. Sixty-one if we include Onee-Sama. We also have equipped them with anti vampires weaponry to fight them. So, you can rest ?ssure Your Majesty."


    Queen E:" I see, then I will leave them for you Hellsing to deal with."


    Echo& Integra:" As you Command!"


    Echo:" by the way, Your Majesty. Can you evacuate London citizen from today on. I have calculated that the Major will attack London first. With the citizens still there, we will be having many casualties and also we will be giving the Major a way to increase his ghoul army. It''s also making it harder for us to go all out with the citizens there."


    Queen E:" I see. I have heard about your concern. As of tomorrow, we will evacuate London as it will become a battlefield."


    All that in the room:" Yes, Your Majesty!"


    Echo POV


    After that, we left the room. I and the other also go back to the Hellsing HQ. As they are on the way, I can''t help to smile and thought ''all according to plan''. It was not a mistake that Alucard has gone. I knows that Alucard will have gone missing because he devours Schr?dinger. Now, I can have fun with the war.


    When we arrived at the Mansion I ask Walter to follow me to my office.


    Echo:" Walter, this is the SS serum for you. This one is the same as the one I give Integra, it will give you three times more powerful than the one given to the soldiers."


    Walter:" Thank you for the give, Echo-Sama."


    Echo:" It''s alright, you can go now Walter."


    After he left I go back to my room to sleep.

 Chapter 14

    The next day, both Integra and Walter left for a meeting. London was busy this day, as the citizens evacuating the city to Cambridge and Oxford. As for me, I was admiring my new vehicle, Vimana: Throne of the Heaven-soaring King.


    When evening comes both Integra and Walter have returned. They were shocked to see Vimana that was parked in the yard.


    Integra:" From seeing this, it seems that you have already know the topic of the meeting this time."


    Echo:" Hehehe, don''t underestimate my info gatherings. I''ve already known about it even before they found out."


    Integra:" So, you intend to go there yourself?"


    Echo:" That''s what I was going to do at first. But, I think I will bring a few of the soldiers to practice. I''ll take five strongest of them."


    Integra:" I see, are you trying to nurture them?"


    Echo:" Yeah, I''ll split them into five teams of twelve and these five will be their leaders. Walter, please bring five strongest of the soldiers here."


    Walter:" Right away, Echo-Sama."


    Night comes, in front of me now is the five best soldiers that we have. They''re David, Alex, Edward, Keith, and Andrew.


    Echo:" This night, we will attack a Battleship that''s been hijacked by the Millennium. You five was chosen to come with me because you''re the strongest off all our soldiers. After these raids, you will be split into five groups and you''ll be their leaders, Understood?"


    Echo:" Good, now come aboard on my Vimana. You don''t have to be afraid about safety as you''ll be anchored on the ship as long as I wish it, so you won''t fall from it." I board the Vimana then sit on the throne.


    The Vimana start to ascend as soon as they have boarded the ship. We then depart towards the last location of the battleship with fast speed, it seems that we didn''t have to feel the wind even though we are on top of the ship. The five wore a serious face as they are about to fight an army of Ghoul and Vampires.


    Half an hour later we arrived at the place. They started to shoot us, but I just evade it. As we got closer I just launched a missile through the Gate of Babylon toward their weaponry. After disabling their weapons we jump on their ship. On top of the ship, there is a freckles glasses girl with long black hair and wearing black clothes with a Nazi symbol necklace while holding into a rifle in her hand.


    Echo:" You five, go inside and kill everyone aboard. I''ll deal with this girl."


    Rip van Winkle:" You! You''re Echo. The Hellsing young Master. Why are you here? It was supposed to be Alucard."


    Echo:" Hehehe, I''m Sorry tell you that Alucard won''t be dealing with you. You wasted time waiting for him. Hahaha"


    Winkle:" hmph, then we will just kill you here now. So, that he will come."


    She said and started to shoot me. Her bullet is able to turn toward its target. I caught it with my wires then I activated my Mystic Eyes of Death Perception and look at her. She frozen under the Eyes as she feels that Death was looking at her.


    I started to see the lines of death on her body then attack her with my wires. She tried to evade it but two of my wires succeeded in tracing the death lines on her gun and tight. Her left feet were detached and she started to jump back to the wall with her other foot.


    Echo:" Hahaha, this is so funny. You bloodsuckers called me a Monster? The only Monster here is you, Vampire! I''m just a hunter that hunts your kind."


    Echo:" Well, there''s no sense to talk to dead people. Bye bye, little Vampire." I said then impaled her with black keys right on her heart and head.


    After killing her I started to sit on the deck while spreading my Observation Haki and my wires all around the Battleship to observe the five I brought. I see the five of them methodically kills the Ghoul and Vampire on the ship. Once in a while, I have to help them kills that got a jump on them and let them see it. So that they can improve their battle experience.


    An hour later they finished killing all personnel on board and walk back to the deck. They got an injury here and there, but not that fatal. As they arrived on the deck I brought them on Vimana and we started to leave, leaving a bomb on the ship that started to detonate as we are far from it.


    As soon as we arrived at the mansion I order the five to soak themselves in the Healing liquid pool that I put in the training area for them to heal themselves. After that, I take a bath and go to sleep.


    The next day, around noon times. The evacuation of London has completed. I request the Queen to send an anti-aircraft missile as we can to London and have our soldiers manned it.


    We have the satellite on a lookout for their airship on the road. They find them in the way and it was estimated that they will arrive tomorrow night.


    Integra and Walter have been busy going back forth from the Mansion to the Information center.


    Seras has been training hard along with the Wild Geese. She was in charge of the Mansion defense, she''s been depressed with Alucard''s disappearance.


    Third POV


    All soldiers have been tense, they look into the sky. Waiting for the Millennium airship to appear. Echo was seating in his throne on Vimana.


    They didn''t have to wait for long, as they have seen the Millennium airship closing in. Echo watch it with rapt attention, as the airship was over the Thames River he ordered.


    Echo:" Shot it down!"


    Hearing his order, the soldiers that manning the anti-aircraft missiles start to shoot it. Making the airship to fall into the River.


    As the airships start to fall, they tried to retaliate by shooting missiles indiscriminately all around London. Echo shoots down the one that was aimed at his Army as a priority then tries to minimize the destruction of the City.


    With Integra


    Integra and Walter was in the Information HQ along with Sir. Pennwood and his subordinates. As they saw the Army shooting down the airship and minimizing the destruction on the city they''re able to sigh in relief.


    Integra:" as expected, Echo prediction comes true."


    Before they even continue their conversation soldiers come in and put them in a gunpoint.


    Sir. Pennwood:" Wha-what the meaning of this? First Lieutenant You!"


    F. lieutenant:" Shut up! Don''t you realize? It''s just feel good to be a Vampire, General. To think that I''ll be able to capture the Hellsing, Major should be pleased"


    Integra:" Kukuku, a baby Vampire, pretending to be predators. We Hellsing has been hunting Vampire for hundreds of years. Do you think we can''t deal with the likes of you? Walter!"


    Walter:" as you wish, Integra-Sama."


    Hearing her command Walter starts to slaughter all the Vampire in the room. As he slaughters them a little bit of their blood got sprayed towards Sir. Pennwood waking him up from his dazed expression.


    Sir. Pennwood:" T-to thinks we got traitor on our midst."


    Integra:" kukuku, it''s happening all the time. At first, I thought you''re our traitor."


    Sir. Pennwood:" I may be incompetent, but I''m not a Coward Sir. Integra. Anyway, you should go now and do your job, and I''ll do mine here."


    Sir. Pennwood:" yeah, may fortune be with you to Sit. Integra."

 Chapter 15

    Before the War, Inside Millennium airship.


    Major:" Ladies and Gentlemen, Look! That is our destination. The Light of Europe."


    All Soldiers:" whooaaahh, it''s Europe. The Light of Europe. Kill Kill Kill Kill!"


    Major:" Are you all excited about this? After this, we will raze, burn, kill, plunder, and destroy everything they have. IT''S A WAR!"


    All Soldiers:" Millennium Millennium Millennium."


    As they shouting their hearts out. *BOOOM* The ship they are on explode and started to descend. Everyone on the ship panicked.


    Major:" SILENCE!! What happens here?"


    Ship Captain:" Major, we''ve been had! England starting to bombard us with anti-aircraft missiles as soon as we are in their range. We will land on the Thames River."


    Major:" hehehe, Not bad. It seems they were prepared to welcome us. Shoot back before we land. Can''t let them have a lead on us. All of you, prepare to disembark."


    ---


    In another place. There we see Father Alexander Anderson was on the phone.


    Anderson:" So, why haven''t Maxwell give us a report. He was the one to lead this mission."


    Anderson:" That boy again. Next time I meet him, I''ll deliver The Lord Judgement "Amen"


    ???:" Then Go! Lead the Iscariot, this is a Crusade!"


    Anderson:" In the name of The Lord of Ghost and Children Amen" he closed his phone then look toward the soldiers that aim at him with a gun.


    Anderson:" You think you can hurt me with that toy?" he said the start to slaughter them amidst the hail of bullets.


    Anderson:" Very well, you bitches. Know well the taste of Divine Punishment."


    ---


    Now, With Echo. He was watching as the airship of Millennium crashed down and from it Ghouls and Vampire starting to emerge. Seeing this he let Vimana fly down and as he flies past them he started to bombard them with a D rank nameless Phantasm to decrease their numbers.


    After a while, he was suddenly attacked from the side. He jumps down and evades it while storing Vimana back to GoB, making his attacker lost his footing on it surprising him. Echo then attack him mid-air while using Geppou to stabilize his footing. Only for it to miss as his attackers transform into a wolf and go back to the ground, Which he follows.


    Echo:" Well well, it''s a beautiful night isn''t it? Major and every one of Millennium. Does it seem that all the higher up is here?"


    Echo:" Hehehe. Alucard, you say? Well, you see! Since it seems that you people were so fixated on him. I really didn''t want to give you what you want. So, I let him retired for the next 30 years by making him devoured you subordinate. That ability of him that makes him exist everywhere is too strong that he has to go slumber to digest it. Hahahaha"


    Major:" You really have a nasty personality huh, Hellsing!"


    Echo:" Thanks for the compliment. Well, who will come to dance with me? Captain? Zorin? Or you Major? Or you can also come together."


    Major:" you are really arrogant huh. Captain, please deal with him. I have another ?ssignment to meet." he said as he left along with Zorin and Doc. Leaving Captain alone.


    Echo:" Hooo. Can you dance well with me, Captain?"


    Captain:"..."


    Echo:" Silence treatment, huh. Well then, Let''s Dance!!!"


    The fight starts with The Captain shoot Echo with his rifle, Echo blocks it using his strings. He activated his Mystic Eyes and start to strike back at the Captain.


    The Captain evades the strings with agile movement while he didn''t let up his attack, shooting Echo continuously. They exchange blow for a while, studying their opponent''s bit by bits.


    The Captain felt that he was at a disadvantage throw his rifles and start to change into a wolf. He thought with his speed and durability he can take a few hits and start to attack him. But this was his mistakes, Echo sees him charging at him recklessly smile and use his strings to attack his death lines.


    Captain feeling dangers on himself tried to dodge. But, he was too late as around 50 strings attack him at the same time, Killing him making him into minced meat.


    After killing the captain Echo spread his observation Haki around London. He sees his soldiers were holding on the battlefield, killing as many as they can. He can also feel the Iscariot sneaking around, trying to ambush them when they''re exhausted. Seeing it he orders.


    Echo:" All soldiers, fall back!" hearing his orders the soldiers started to fall back.


    Seeing them left Echo spread his strings and started to cut all of the ghouls on the field. After cleaning them up he looks at his Army and asks.


    Echo:" How many survive? Are you ready for round two?" Edward, one off the Squad Leader answer.


    Edward:" We have 8 death and 25 injured, Sir! Only 27 of us battle-ready, Sir."


    Hearing this Echo taking out a healing potion, then give it to them.


    Echo:" here, all of you drink it. When your injuries are healed, be ready for round two. These times we fight the Iscariot." as he finished his sentence, someone speaks to him.


    Echo:" Well well, the rats of Vatican. Sneaking around on our soil, London. You people have no shame Huh!"


    Anderson:" This is a crusade Boy. After this, we will let you taste the Lord Judgement and this land will be free of you heretics."


    Echo:" Hahaha. You make puke with your beliefs. you want to dance? Let''s dance and let me see how well you do!"


    Finished speaking they begin their fight. Having to fight him once, Anderson was cautiously looking out for Echo strings and be able to create a countermeasure for it. But, with Echo using memory partition and thought acceleration he was able to control more than hundreds of strings all at once. Making it hard to find gaps in it. While he busily dealing with it he also has to deal with Echo himself as he also attacks at close quarters.


    ---


    As the fight between Echo and Anderson ongoing. The Iscariot and Hellsing soldiers also clash with each other. Although Iscariot has advantages in experience, technique, and number The Hellsing balance it with their superior firepower and brute force. They are also helped by Echo once in a while with his strings.


    Thirty minutes after the fight starts. Half of Hellsing soldiers already died leaving only 25 people left to fight, while the Iscariot was almost decimated leaving only 10 left. Heinkel Wolfe and Yumiko Takagi felt that they lost this time immediately order for a retreat. As they are retreating they also collected Anderson who is about to lose to Echo.


    ---


    After fighting for thirty minutes it was clear who has won. Compare to Anderson who only uses two hands, Echo who have hundreds of strings to his bidding was superior.

 Chapter 16

    While Echo was fighting a War, Integra was on her way to meet with Echo. On the way, she got phone call from Seras telling her that someone attacks the HQ. She told Walter to go there as reinforcement.


    Ten minutes in the way she was blocked by Major who has been waiting for her. She got off her car taking her sword with her. It was a C Rank Nameless Phantasm that was given to her by Echo.


    Major:" Hehehe, Half a century planning got destroyed by your brother. He really is a thorn on my side."


    Integra:" So, you aim for me?"


    Major:" Yeah, I want him to feel despair knowing you die."


    Integra:" Hmph, if it is a week ago, you may have succeeded easily. Now, you have to put effort on it." She said while unsheathing her sword.


    Major raised an eyebrow seeing her confidence. Suddenly she was in front of him with her sword thrust out. He evades her strike then taking out his gun, he shoots at her making her backing away from him. Seeing her backing away he shoots more bullets and Integra was on the defensive. She cut off the bullets coming to her.


    Seeing that being defensive makes her at a disadvantage, she takes out her gun using her left hand while her right hand still holding the sword and shoot back. This gun was a new gun, custom made by Walter with firepower almost teaching Alucard''s Jackals.


    Surprise by the gun firepower The Major left an opening, giving Integra a chance to get closer. She slashes him with her sword which he parried with his hand, not letting on she shoot him almost point-blank on his face that he dodges leaving a gash on his cheek, but there''s no blood on it.


    Major:" This is a surprise! Never thought that you are this strong. I thought it was only your little brother that''s abnormal."


    Integra:" Heh, I''m normal! That little brother of mine is making a Serum that enhances human strength. To hunt down Monsters like you."


    Major:" Him again, it seems that he really was prepared for us huh. Like he knows all our plans, which should have been impossible. Did Walter betrayed us?"


    Integra:" Walter? What do you mean by betraying you?" Integra asked not liking the conclusion of this conversation.


    Integra:" I ask you what do you mean about Walter betraying you?" she asked again while gnashing her teeth.


    Major:" Well, you''re a smart girl so you should have guessed about the answer. Walter was one of us from the start. Don''t you feel strange, that we always know your whereabouts when we launched our attack? He''s been telling us your information, but it seems he has not been telling us about the latest developments."


    Integra was furious, the person that she trusted most after Echo was a traitor. Wanting to finish the fight faster, Integra starts her ?ssault again. As the fight was going on she was more and more proficient in her strike. Twenty minutes later she succeeded in defeating The Major. Right now the lower half of his bodies were separated from his upper bodies showing that he was a Machine all along. She was wounded a little in this fight but, her body starts to heal now.


    Integra:" you are a robot? What a monster."


    Major:" Monster!! Don''t compare me with those things. I''m a human, even if my body has been changed with machine, I''m a human. even if all that left of me was only my brain that''s working inside a tank I''m a human. even if I was a memory circuit inside a computer, I''m a human. I can only be a human. What makes me a human is my heart, my soul, my will that''s what make me Human."


    Integra:" Hmph, a ramble of an insas me Human. You''re a monster, both outside and inside and Hellsing was an organization that hunts your kind. So, just die already." she said and shoot him on his head, killing him.


    As she was about to leave, her phone was ringing. So, she answers it.


    Echo:" Hello, nee-san. We''re done here, we already cleaning up the Millennium that was left here. The Major and two of his higher-ups left as I fight with their Captain. We also fight the Iscariot and defeat them but, I''m sure that Anderson will come back. So, how is your side?"


    Integra:" Ahh, I just finished off The Major and the other one was in the Mansion fighting Seras. Echo, he said that Walter was their comrades. He''s been betraying us. Did you know this? Your information gathering is excellent, there''s no way that you miss this."


    Integra:" and why didn''t you tell me?"


    Echo:" Well, I was trying to bring him back to us. With the SS Serum, let''s just see if he will continue to betray us or will he be back."


    Integra:" and if he continues?"


    Echo:" Then I''ll be the one to kill him, he''s my mentor after all."


    Integra:" I see, I''ll leave it to you."


    Echo:" Yeah, just leave it to me. Well, it seems that I''ll have a Round two with Anderson, bye Nee-san." he said before cutting the line.


    Integra:" This boy, he really becomes a battle maniac."


    ---


    Seras was in the middle of defending the Mansion, Zorin along with eight of her vampire subordinates attacked the mansion. While the Wild Geese dealt with the eight Vampire, Seras go fight Zorin.


    She orders them to defend the Mansion while she was going to meet with Integra and Echo.


    ---


    With Anderson that was saved by Wolfe and Yumiko.


    Anderson:" Let me go, I have to fight him even if I have to died for it. His existence will be a thorn to the Vatican."


    Wolfe:" *Sigh* We know that. That why we save you. There is something Archbishop entrusted us to give you if we deem you incapable of defeating him." he said while taking out something from within his coat.


    Wolfe:" This is a Nail of Helena, with this you should be able to defeat him. Take it with you!"


    Anderson take the nail and start to leave toward Echo direction. Seeing him left, Wolfe and Yumiko bring the leftovers of Iscariot back to the Vatican.


    ---


    With Echo, after cutting the line with Integra. He ordered his soldiers to go back to the Mansion, as the sees the soldiers left. He starts to look at the Direction where Anderson comes from.


    Anderson:" hmph, be ready for your funeral Hellsing boy. Cause there will be nothing left of you after I''m done with you. This is the God Judgement for you heretical people, Amen"


    Echo:" Hahaha, it must be a strong judgment if it almost annihilated the Iscariot. Your Lord is clearly not in favor of you, his devotees."


    Anderson:" Damn you! Not only the Major now even a little boy insult our Lord. I must wash this shame with your blood."


    After saying his piece he then stabs himself with the Nail of Helena. At first, nothing happens after a while he suddenly changes. As his body becoming to look like a vines gather together.


    Echo:" Heh. well then, Let''s dance!"

 Chapter 17

    In London, Thames River. Right now we can see two men facing each other. This was Echo and Anderson. As soon as they finish their banter, they started to launch their attack simultaneously. Echo with his strings while Anderson with his Vines.


    Echo was now sporting a serious face as he counters each of Anderson''s attacks. Right now his word backfires on him. Before, when he fights Anderson he mocks that he was using hundreds of strings facing his two hands. Now it was him that was at a disadvantage facing almost thousands of vines attacking him. Good thing that he has observation haki helping him if not, he might have died already.


    Anderson:" What''s wrong, Hellsing? You''ve been silent for a while now. How do you feel? Facing countless attacks all around you?" he said as he control over his vines to attack from all around Echo.


    Echo:" Hehehe, don''t be arrogant. These thing, I can easily destroy it." Echo evade the vines that can be evaded while he cut the ones that are more difficult to be evade.


    Anderson:" Don''t pretend to be tough. I can see you sweating over here."


    Echo:" Then your eyes must be bad. Why don''t you change the prescription of your glasses? That''s if you can leave here alive, hahaha"


    Anderson:" it''s you who are going to be dead here boy, I''ll make sure of it."


    Echo:" Less talk, more fighting."


    Echo then uses soru to get close to him only for him to stop as Anderson firing a bunch of vines that were lit on the fire and all the vines turn around attacking him from all around.


    Seeing there is no place to evade on the ground, Echo uses geppou and shoots himself up to the air. He takes out Harpe and slashes at Anderson only for him to evade but, he succeeds in cutting his left hand.


    Anderson thought that it will be regenerate but he''s wrong. As a weapon of anti-immortal, it blocks his regeneration ability.


    When he sees Anderson was distracted in his shocks, Echo didn''t let an opportunity go by. He struck him more times giving Anderson''s a large wound on his body.


    Anderson:" Boy, How did you do this? You block my regeneration ability."


    Echo:" Hehe, this weapon was an Immortals slaying weapon. It was created with the purpose to kill a Monster like you are now."


    Echo:" Haha, everybody underestimated me all the time and their ending is the same. That is death, now accept your death." he said as he activated his mystic eyes and cut him up, killing him so fast that he didn''t feel it.


    Echo:" Well, that''s fun. How long are you going to watch there nee-san and Seras?"


    Integra:" You really have become this strong huh, Echo."


    Seras:" Integra-Sama is right, You''re really strong Echo-Sama. So, is it over now? The war."


    ???:" No, it''s not Seras. You still have to beat me Echo."


    Echo:" Walter, right on time! I''ve been waiting for you. So, you''re going to be my dance partner now?"


    Seras:" W-Walter San? Why? How come you''re so young now?"


    Walter:" Yes, it''s me Seras. How do I look now that I''ve becomes a Vampire?"


    Seras:" Vampire!!!"


    Walter:" Betray? There is no betrayal when I''m not on your side in the first place! Don''t you find it strange that when your uncle attacks you I''m not by your side? I let him attack you that night, but he was so incompetent that he was killed by a kid."


    Echo:" Haha, that the kid that you''ve trained Walter."


    Walter:" Yeah, you''re right. I don''t know if I should have been proud of you or pissed that you always destroy our plan. But, I must also thank you for the SS Serum it makes me more powerful than I thought I would be."


    Echo:" You don''t have to, I''m doing it for myself."


    Walter:" As I thought, you know about my betrayal but you still give me the Serum, Why?"


    Echo:" I just want a fun fight, Walter. The stronger you get the more fun it will be to fight you. You can''t disappoint me. So, let''s start the dance party. Nee-San, Seras leave this area, it''s going to be dangerous here. Also, look for the Millennium doctor and kill him. It will be annoying if he''s left alive."


    Walter:" You don''t have to do anything about that. I''ve already killed him when he finished my transformation."


    Echo:" Whoa, you really ruthless huh, Walter."


    Walter:" it''s his fault trying to plant something to kill me in my body so, he can control me."


    As he finished speaking, Echo brings out his strings to attack Walter. Walter also doing the same as their attack clashes with each other. In terms of skill, Echo won as he was supported by his other skill that complements his skill in using strings. Walter was stronger as he has the SS Serum and Vampire physic blend in his body causing his power to multiply not a plus.


    Walter starting to have an advantage and Echo starts to have many injuries. So, he start to talk.


    Walter:" What wrong Echo? Is it hard to dance now? Where is your arrogance from before? You won''t be able to defeat me with those techniques. That''s something I teach you, it won''t be useful to fight me. I also hold back teaching you back then, like this skill." he said and start to use his strings to control the corpses around them as his puppets.


    The corpses were holding a gun and start to fire at him from all around, not only that Walter strings also didn''t let on its attack making it hard for Echo to retaliate.


    Seeing that he was at a disadvantage Echo summoned black keys and start to throw them at the shadow of the puppets controlled by Walter to lock their movement.


    Walter:" Where are you aiming to throw your weapons? All of the missed their target."


    Echo:" Hehe, they never missed their target. They do their job as intended!" Echo says while smiling.


    Walter:" What do you mean? You clearly miss that throw." he said while trying to attack Echo again, only for him to be surprised as his puppets didn''t move as he ordered.


    As Walter was confused, Echo takes this chance to get close to him and attack him at close quarters. Seeing that Excho was close to him, he abandoned his puppets and start to defend from the attack. He takes distance and talks.


    Echo hearing him talk starts to pump his prana towards Avalon to kick up his healing factor.


    Echo:" Should I tell you my skill? Why don''t you find it out yourself?"


    Walter noticed that Echo was stalling for time so he can heal himself restart his ?ssault.


    Walter:" you don''t have to if you don''t want!"


    He said and attack Echo again. As Echo was defending from his attack that was visible, his observation haki warn him an attack that comes from below. So he jump up and start using geppo and land on two stories tall building.


    Echo:" it seems that there are many techniques that you''re not teaching me, Walter."


    Walter:" of course, it will be bad for me if you know all of my techniques."


    Echo:" You are right, that''s why I created my own techniques from the one you''re teaching."


    Echo moves his fingers, suddenly all black keys that he threw all over the area start to shines. And from its handle was a strings that connect to each other making a runes symbol with Walter in the middle of it.


    As soon as he said this, a Holy Fire started to burn with Walter trapping him inside.


    Echo:" You should have remembered Walter, although I am a battle maniac. I like to entrap my enemies with my strings, like a spider that entrapped its prey. It''s been a fun dance, Farewell."


    And with his death, the war has come to its conclusion.

 Chapter 18 - Epilogue

    30 years later. September, 12th 2029


    Hellsing has become the most powerful organization in the world. It was split into 2 divisions now, one was to become Elites Knight and Shield that protects English Royalty which is lead by Integra the other one work in the shadow as a group that dealt with supernatural ''s richest and strongest country with the help of Hellsing which lead by Echo which he named Burial Agency.


    Right after the war, Echo didn''t let the Vatican that tried to become a praying mantis go shot free. When they send Alucard to Rio he didn''t just give Alucard the drones, he also orders the Mercenary Wild Geese to bring the other 100 drones with them that they activate there before they are back to England.


    With that drones he recorded the Video of Alexander Anderson along with the Iscariot slaughtering American soldiers while reciting the Bible and saying that it was God Judgement, he aired the Video world wide. Making the Vatican''s become the world enemies, they''re labeled as a cult fanatics that slaughter anyone that is not their own. They''re destroyed within a year with their followers leave their religion as they didn''t want to be labeled as fanatics.


    America lost not only it''s people in the slaughter, but also a large sum of money to England as reparations. Because The Millennium takes off from America before they attack England. So, it can be interpreted as America declared war on England. As they just lost many of their militaries they can''t afford to go to a war. So with heavy heart, they pay the reparations to England.


    England become the world richest and strongest country with the help of Hellsing. Echo, besides doing a job as a leader of Burial Agency. He also becomes an inventor and helps England become the most technologically advanced country in the world. With all the books inside his GoB that he reads all of it following Index from to aru series, he becomes the World treasure as the modern world Einstein that helps the world technological advances by a few decades.


    This day Echo and Integra almost didn''t have anything to do besides training the young generations of their respective agencies. Echo and his group almost hunt the Ghouls and Vampires to extinction that it makes him bored to hell.


    ---


    That night Echo did not sleep. He was waiting as from his calculation Alucard will be back this day. As it was 11.30 pm, he felt the presence of someone suddenly appear in his perception.


    He walks toward this presence that was inside his sister''s room. When he was about to open her room doors he heard a gunshot. He walks in to see his sister was shooting Alucard that was pranking her.


    Echo:" Well well, welcome back Alucard. It''s been a long time."


    Alucard:" hehe. Yeah, it''s been a long time. The two of you have aged well."


    Echo:" Haha, you''re right. We''re an old man and woman now."


    Integra:" hey! it''s rude to call a woman old, Echo. I''ve taught you better."


    Alucard:" Now now, Master human is the most beautiful when they''re aging."


    Alucard:" My body is a little sore from sleeping too much."


    As they are talking, the doors suddenly opened up to reveal that Seras walking in.


    Seras:" Master!!! You are back."


    Alucard:" Yeah, I''m back Seras."


    ---


    A week later, inside an uninhabited island. Echo and Alucard were facing each other. Integra and Seras on the side watching them.


    Integra:" Echo, are you really have to do this?"


    Echo:" Yes, nee-san. I don''t want to die from old age, if I have to die it must be on battlefield. So, Alucard! Are you ready to do a dance of death with me?"


    Alucard:" With p???sur?! I''ll accompany you until one of us died."


    Alucard:" You really have become so much stronger than me Echo."


    Echo:" Heh, of course, I have! Now, be serious Alucard, or you won''t know the cause of your death."


    Alucard:" You are right. That''s why, Zero Seal Release!"


    As good as he released his seal, from within Alucard shadow comes out an Army of undead.


    Echo:" Hahahaha, that''s it! This is how it should be. Let''s dance, Alucard!"


    From behind Echo, many golden portals start to appear. He then launched a D rank phantasm to the Army, while he himself holds a Sword of Promised Victory Excalibur.


    Alucard:" That Sword! How can you have the sword of King Arthur? That''s been lost for centuries." he said as he shoots Echo from behind.


    Echo:" Hehe, Beautiful right? With this sword, I might be able to kill you." Echo answers while blocking the bullets and slashed at Alucard.


    Alucard:" You might be right. With that much Holy energies, it makes my skin tingle in its presence."


    Alucard:" By the way, I''ve been meaning to ask. What with that gate that keeps shooting weapons at me?" he asked while dodging the NP, he tried to take it but it burns his hand when he touch it


    Echo:" That is my Treasure Space. Inside it, there are many weapons of legend. The one I''ve been shooting you with is an anti-vampires one. So, don''t hope to touch it."


    Alucard:" I see, that''s why I feel burned when I touch it."


    Echo:" Yeah, careful with it. Now please don''t die from this attack Alucard, EXCALIBUR!!!"


    Alucard feels that this will be bad to receive this attack, uses his army to block it while he himself tried to run from it. The attack hit the wall of undead destroying them and released their souls from Alucard binding.


    Alucard:" That one frightening attack. I''ll die if I receive it head-on." Alucard says from behind Echo as he stabbed him from behind.


    Echo reverses the grip on his sword and stabs to the back. Hitting Alucard on his stomach, he then pours as much prana as he can to it. Burning Alucard from inside.


    Echo:" This is my farewell gift for you, Alucard. You can end your Immortal life from now on and rest your soul." he said as he looks at Alucard burned by Holy fire.


    Alucard:" Yeah, I thought that it''s time to rest too. Thanks, Echo for giving me eternal rest. Good Bye my friend"


    As the last of Alucard''s body was burned, Echo stumbled back without Alucard holding him from behind with a hole on his ?h?st.


    Integra runs toward him and places his head on her ??p. Seras stand behind her with a sad face.


    Integra:" You fool!! Is it worth it to die like this?"


    Echo:" Hehe,(cough cough) d-don''t be sad nee-san. I''m happy with this ending. It was fun fighting Alucard(cough cough cough). Well then, I''ll be leaving first. You should live much longer than me, bye"


    Echo then died from blood loss leaving a mourning Integra and Seras.

 Chapter 19 - Prologue

    Echo POV


    I wake up after my second death, and new memories flood my brain. My name now is Yamagami Echo 3 years old born January 25, 1995, I live with my mother as it seems my father died a year ago. My mother was a Yakuza princess her name is Yamagami Yuuna while my father was an SS Class Ghoul with nickname Onigumo as he was seen wearing an Oni mask and his kagune look like a spider leg he''s a rinkaku type, his name is Juugo. So, I''m a half Ghoul it seems.( I didn''t found what years Kaneki is born so I make it up. Echo is the same age as Kaneki)


    From the story, my mother always told me. They meet when she was in her rebellious stages. Always sneaking out at night to enjoy the thrill. One of the night she was attacked by a ghoul, but she was saved by his father that was in the conquest of power by hunting another ghoul to create a Kakuja.


    When they see each other it was like they''re struck by an arrow as they fell in love with each other. His father was a tsundere that always tried to drive away his mother from his presence. But, his mother can be persistent as she always looks for him every night. Until one day she found him hurting in one of an alleyway, so she brought him home and nurse him. This act melts his heart out that he acknowledges that he falls for her.


    From there on they start to dates. After a month of their dates, his father starts to voice his concern as he didn''t want her to suffer from being with him, and he didn''t know if they can have a child and it was there that they met with Yoshimura an owner of a Coffee Shop. He encouraged them as he himself married a human and even have a child. But, he also warns them to be careful as to not let others know about it. He also told them about his experience with his wife.


    After getting the encouragement from Yoshimura they get married the next three months. My mother was 19 years and my father was 25 at that time, my grandpa blessed them as he found out that my father is strong and it will be good if the next Yakuza leader is strong from his perspective he knows that my father was a ghoul but, he didn''t care as long as the one he eats was their enemies.


    A year later my mother bears me. They anticipated that she has to eat human meat like Yoshimura''s wife''s, but there are no urges and I grow healthy in her w?mb even if she eats normal food. What they didn''t know is that my second wish helped out in this. The abilities perceived that ghoul diet of only eating human meats as a flaw, so his ability corrected it, making him the only ghoul that can eat normal food.


    ---


    Now I inspect my body it seems that my magic circuit still active even if it is a new body as the magic circuit was in my soul. And it seems that my magic circuit increased before it was 100 and now it was 250. I also found that I have two Kagune types Rinkaku and Ukaku and my Rc Cells are around 1500.


    I then inspects my GoB to see what new thing I get in this world. There I found many Quinque and Kakuhou, it will be useful for my experiment later to make a Quinque.


    Now, I should increase my Rc Cells so that I''m not so weak and be able to manifest my Kagune. The easy way is to make a Serum that increases Rc Cells without a side effect with the Denial of Nothingness.


    So I make one that increases 2000 Rc Cells for now. I was about to drink it but stop to erect a bounded field to isolate sound from my room in case it will hurt since this was nighttime.


    After finished with the Bounded Field I drink the Serum at first, I feel tingly all over my body when suddenly it starts to hurt. Especially in the back area where my Kagune will be out. After a while, I feel like I make a breakthrough and my Kagune comes out. The Rinkaku ones look like Kyuubi nine tail while the Ukaku ones look like a Crystal wing that looks like a fallen angel. Finishing the transformation I faint as it seems this young body can''t handle the burden.


    ---


    The next morning I woke up due to someone waking me up.


    ???:" Echo wake up, it''s already eight in the morning. Time for breakfast."


    Echo:" Okay Mom, I''m awake now."


    Yuuna:" Good, now wash up. I''ll wait you downstairs with the other."


    Echo:" Kaay"


    I get off my bed and go to the bathroom. I brush my teeth and wash my face then go downstairs.


    Everyone:" Happy Birthday Echo." as I get to the dining room, there is my mother, grandfather and his subordinate congratulating me on my birthday.


    Yuuna:" Hehehe, did we surprise you, darling? Congratulations on your third Birthday."


    Echo:" Yeah, thank you Mom everyone."


    Yuuna:" Now, go sit and eat with everyone."


    Grandpa:" Come here Echo. Sit with Jii-Chan."


    Grandpa:" Of course, you can open it later. Now we eat first."


    Then my mother comes out from the kitchen, with my grandma along with the dish.


    Grandma:" Ohh, E-Chan come here. Let Baa-Chan feed you."


    Echo:" No, I''ll eat by myself! I''m an ?du?t now. Hmph." I answer her while acting like a child.


    Grandma:" Right right, E-Chan is an ?du?t now. Hehehe"


    Yuuna:" Don''t tease him anymore Kaa-san."


    Grandma:" what can I do? My grandson is so cute."


    We then start to eat breakfast, after we finish my mother bring me to the yard to play. As we play she ask me.


    Yuuna:" So, what gift do you want from me?"


    Yuuna:" Ohh, my baby. Mom will always be healthy then." she said while hugging and kissing my cheek.


    Echo:" Stop that mom. It''s embarrassing."


    Yuuna:" No, it''s not embarrassing just let your mom pamper you." sigh, she''s dotted on me too much. Maybe to feel the gaps that go missing because of my father''s death. Well, whatever. Let''s just enjoy this.


    ---


    When I''m alone, I thought that nobody shouldn''t know that I am a ghoul. So I create a ring that will camouflage my Rc Cells count to that a normal human. This way no one will know that I am a ghoul except my family.


    ---


    The next few weeks all I do is playing around while thinking about my plan for this life. The first thing I have to think about is a catchphrase for when I fight, Hahaha. Let''s change it to, * Let''s the Banquet start * since I am a ghoul now. Haiz, this is boring to be a kid again it starts to affect me.

 Chapter 20 - V 2 Ch 1

    10 years later.


    These last ten years I lived normally. I go to school, training my body right now I already have the strength of my prime in my last life. Ghoul body Constitution is good, making it easier to train. Right now, my Rc Cells Level is around 7000.


    We lived in the periphery of the first wards between the first and fourth wards. So, it''s low on the ghoul''s population here as it was close to CCG HQ.


    I have also succeeded in making a Quinque. By using the Quinque Steel combines with Adamantium and Orichalcum then I use an SSS rated Rinkaku Kakuhou that I take from GoB. I make it look like the Gloves of Jenos Hazard from Black Cat. I also make a katana type by using a Bikaku Kakuhou, I make it be able to lengthen the length of its blade-like Ichimaru Gin Shinso.


    I also mass-produced a Katana and Gun type Quinque for our Yakuza subordinates only for the one on the upper echelon and bodyguard since many of their business was done at night, so they have a higher chance of meeting ghouls. Our families only doing business in Brothels, Hotel and Restaurant, Weapons dealers and also private Security. The did not sell drugs as my grandpa hates it and with me be able to make a Quinque our business is booming right now since the only one who can manufacture it besides me is the CCG.


    At first, the CCG asked us so stop manufacture it. But, as many of our business partners were from a rich family that wants to have protection from ghouls and also we have a legal paper to sell and manufacture a weapon, they stop bothering us. They even buy from us, as our weapons are better than the one they make as I use one of the strongest metal in the multiverse. They tried to search for it, but they did not find the metal anywhere since I was the one who created it.


    Right now, our mansion is a One big traps for any Ghouls who infiltrated it. There''s many anti-Ghoul weapon and chemical ready to be deployed. Of course, I make myself immune to it. Since it would be stupid if I died from the weapons I created myself.


    My family at first were shocked to know that I can make a Quinque. But, then they thought that I''m simply a Genius and leave it at that.


    ---


    In this life at first, I''m a loner again because the kid and their parents are afraid of me as I am a Yakuza Heir. But that change when my grandpa takes me to visit his friend and business partners. There I meet Nashiro and Kurona Yasuhisa we become friends from there on, I visit them every weekend to play with them or it was them who visit me.


    Today''s the day I visit them. When I arrived, I ring the doorbell. I wait for a while until the door open.


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" Ohh, Echo-kun good morning. Nashiro and Kurona already wait for you upstairs."


    Echo:" Good morning oba-san. I''ll be bothering you today."


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" Fufufu, you''re not bothering anybody. You can come and play anytime, Echo-kun. Now, go upstairs! They''re waiting."


    Echo:" Yes, well then. Excuse me."


    I walk in and go upstairs. Nashiro and Kurona were on the balcony having a tea party.


    Echo:" Well well, how are you today ladies? Are we going to have a tea party."


    Kurona:" Morning Echo." Kurona says nodding at me.


    Echo:" Haha, sorry sorry. I''ve been thinking something on the way. So, I walk slowly."


    Nashiro:" thinking? What are you thinking?" she asks while taking my hand? Kurona only looks at me clearly interest too.


    Echo:" It''s a secret. Now, what are we going to play?"


    Kurona:" We play game! Papa bought us a new console. We''ve been waiting to play with you."


    Echo:" Ohh, what game?"


    Nashiro:" the game is called Worms. Let''s make a tournament. Hehehe" ( If there any of you who doesn''t know this game. The gameplay is like Gunbound. I always play it with my friend when in Junior High School)


    Echo:" Tournament? Just the three of us? Well, why not."


    After that, we play the game until it was afternoon. At lunchtime, I eat with them along with oba-san. Then we continue to play again in the middle of it oba-san also plays with us. At 4.00 pm the twin father comes back from work.


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" We''re upstairs! come here, darling. Echo has come to play."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Okay, wait for me." he then comes up to us.


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Hello There, Echo. How have you been?"


    Echo:" I''m fine Ojii-san. Thanks for having me."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Haha, you''re always welcome Echo. You two, papa is home." he said while looking at Nashiro and Kurona.


    N & K:" Welcome home, Papa. Come let''s play with us."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Oohhh, what are we playing here?"


    Nashiro:" We are playing game called Worms. Papa, you have to defeat Echo. He''s been winning all this time. Please take revenge for us."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Oh, you''re good at this Echo-kun? Now, why don''t you play with ojii-san? Girls, let papa take revenge for you. Hahaha"


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Hahaha come, Echo-kun I''ll beat you."


    N & K:" Papa, you can do it!"


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" leave it to me!"


    I then play with ojii-san and defeat him mercilessly. An hour later it''s time for me to go back.


    Echo:" Now, I have to go home. Please let me come again." I said while bowing toward everyone.


    Nashiro:" Eeehhh, already? We still haven''t beat you. Papa, you suck. You said you will beat him."


    Kurona:" you can''t run away when you''re ahead."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Sorry, Nashiro-chan. Echo-kun is too strong. Echo-kun, do you need me to take you home?"


    Echo:" No, you don''t have to. Well then, goodbye everyone."


    N & K:" Byebye! Come again."


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" Be careful on the way!"


    I left their homes, I walk home slowly. Because I''m thinking of how to save the Yasuhisa couple. I don''t know when the CCG will try to dispose of them. I only watch season one back in my first life. Even then I don''t think they mention when is the couple''s death. But, I think it''s around the time when the twin was in middle school.


    As I was lost in thought, my observations Haki picked up a Ghoul in the vicinity while he''s cornering a human.


    I hide from view, then change my clothes a black long coat with a hoodie. Using nanotechnology that I created in the Hellsing world I can change clothes in a second. I then take out a mask from GoB that I make long ago. The mask looks like Hiyori Sarugaki Hollow Mask from Bleach. This mask will change the voice of the wearer''s to sound like Hollow and also change my hair white.


    After changing clothes I go to the place where the ghouls are. There I see him about to kill his prey. Hmph, Not on my watch. Even though I am a ghoul now. I''m still a former human, and I also a Vampire and Ghoul hunter in my last life. Like what Alucard says, I still have a human reason to not allow that. I activated my Quinque and wrap him in my strings.


    Echo:" Girl, you should left now. Later you shouldn''t have roaming around in the night."


    Girl:" Th-Thank you very much." she said and left.


    Ghoul:" Kuh, what is this. You bastard interrupting my mealtime." he said, struggling to get out from the strings.


    Echo:" Heh, You don''t have to think about meal again. Since you won''t ever need it ever after this day." I said to him then pull the strings, cutting him into a chunk of meat.

 Chapter 21 - V 2 Ch 2

    The next day.


    In the morning I woke up and do my daily exercise. After two hours of exercising I go take a bath. When I come down to the kitchen my mother was waiting for me.


    Echo:" Mom, what''s for breakfast?"


    Yuuna:" We will eat a light breakfast today Honey. Cause I want to bring you somewhere today. We will eat at that place."


    Echo:" Okay, So where are we going?"


    Yuuna:" That''s a secret. You will see when we get there."


    Echo:" what is this? So mysterious. Hahaha"


    After we eat breakfast we left the house. We left using a car and there are about four bodyguards escorting us. I already have an inkling of where we are going today as our car heading toward the 20th wards, so we must be going to Anteiku.


    An hour later, my prediction proved right as right now we''re now in front of a Coffee Shop.


    Yuuna:" Let''s go, honey. Right now it must be pretty quiet as now is not rush time."


    Echo:" Coming, So this is Anteiku that you''ve always tell me about? Pretty nice Cafe there. We should often come here, mom."


    Yuuna:" Yeah, you''re right. Now let''s go."


    She opens the door and goes in, I follow behind her with two of our bodyguard following us.


    Waitress:" Welcome in, please choose your seat." said the waitress welcoming us.


    Yuuna:" Thank you. I''ll take the counter." my mother answer and she goes to the bar seat.


    Yoshimura:" Well well, what an old customer. How have you been, Yuuna-san? It''s been a decade since you are visiting. Where is Juugo?" Yoshimura greets mother amicably.


    Yuuna:" It''s been a while Yoshimura-san. It''s been hard to come here since there are many memories here. Juugo is already dead, about three years after our marriage." she answered with a little bit of sadness in her tone.


    Yoshimura:" I see, I am sorry to hear that. So, who is this boy?"


    Yuuna:" Ah yes, Yoshimura-san please meet Echo. Mine and Juugo''s son, Echo this is Yoshimura-san that I''ve been talking about."


    Echo:" Good afternoon, Yoshimura-san. Please take care of me." I said to him while bowing my head.


    Yoshimura:" Hohoho, what a polite kid. Nice to meet you too, Echo-kun. So, what''s your order Yuuna-san?"


    Yuuna:" Coffee latte for me. what do you want, Echo?" mom said her order while asking mine.


    Echo:" I want a Hamburg set with a cola." I answer to the surprise of Yoshimura if his raise eyebrows tell me.


    He looks at my mother inquiring her which she tells him that she will answer later in private.


    Yoshimura:" Is he okay? Eating normal food?" he asks mom after we seated in.


    Yuuna:" Well you see, he''s different from others ghouls. He can eat normal human food from the start. But, he still has Ghoul traits."


    Yoshimura:" I see, you can''t let anyone know about this. Many people will hunt him for this."


    Yuuna:" Yeah, I know. Since this is also the reason of Juugo''s death. His subordinates know about Echo being half-ghoul and when they found out he can eat normal food he tried to sell the information to the Washuu clan. Juugo found out about this and go kill them along with three of Washuu Agen but he was also killed for it."


    Yoshimura:" I see. So, there is no one who knows it now right?"


    Yuuna:" No, except for my parents. They also told me to not tell anybody about it."


    Echo:" Mom, you didn''t tell me about it. So, that''s why father died?"


    Yuuna:" You are still young at that time, so I didn''t tell you about it."


    Echo:" Hmmm, if you say so."


    Yoshimura:" So, you say he''s still retaining the ghoul''s traits, Yuuna-san?" Yoshimura says, bringing us back to the topic.


    Yuuna:" Yes, he has a Kakugan in his left eyes and he also has two Kagune. It was Rinkaku and Ukaku."


    Yoshimura:" hmm, Echo-kun can you let me see it?" He said while looking at me.


    Echo:" Okay!" I then let out my Kagune and Kakugan.


    Yoshimura:" Hoooh, what a strong Kagune. From what I see it''s as strong as SS Class ghoul. How is hi fighting prowess?"


    Yuuna:" He is strong. My father keeps talking about strong heirs and hired so many martial arts tutor to teach him and Echo seem to enjoy it and absorb their teaching like a sponge." she answers him while I thought. '' it''s more like I''m refreshing my memories than learning from them. Since I already master all martial arts that I can get on in my last life.''


    Yoshimura:" Then that''s good. He can''t be too defenseless since I think sooner or later his existence will bring much trouble for him. I know so much about Washuu Clan and their information gathering is top-notch. You should be careful Echo-kun."


    Echo:" Yes, Yoshimura-san thank you for the reminder. You should wait for me since I''ve been experimenting with my blood to see if I can make something that can make other ghouls be able to eat normal food."


    Yoshimura:" Experiment? That''s dangerous Echo-kun you have to learn first before doing something like that."


    Echo:" it''s okay. I''ve been doing it, ask mom."


    Yuuna:" Yes, he is a genius kid. Our family business flourishing with his help. You can count on him since he''s been learning about ghoul anatomy for a while now."


    Yoshimura:" I see, then I hope you succeed in creating it since there are many ghouls that want to live normally and blending in with human."


    Echo:" Yes, leave it to me." I can make it anytime I want with Denial of Nothingness but it will be weird if I didn''t look like I''m researching it.


    After talking for a while, we left. Then mom brought me to go shopping. She is been buying me so many clothes. We then go play around for a day.


    By the time we arrived home, it''s already nighttime. When we go through the Mansion gate, we see that everyone looks gloomy and I smell of blood in the air.


    We go inside the house and we see many of our subordinates injured and Grandpa sitting in his seat with an angry face.


    Yuuna:" Father, what happens? Why is everyone injured?"


    Grandpa:" Our subordinate has been attacked by a group of ghouls. Fortunately, they bring a Quinque with them that the casualties aren''t that much. They should have won their battle but, they''ve been surprised by them also bringing out a Quinque."


    Echo:" They have a Quinque? Is it our merchandise? How did they look?"


    Grandpa:" No, it''s not one of ours. They are all wearing black fedora."


    Echo:" I see, I think I know who they are. The bastard starts playing in the shadow."


    Grandpa:" You know? What do you mean by that?"


    Echo:" You see Gramp, the CCG is created by Washuu clan. They are a clan of ghouls since we are rejecting CCG demands. They start to attack us from the shadow. The one who attacks us is Vasuki. They''re a group under Washuu clan that deal with their shady dealing and now they''re targeting us."


    Grandpa:" I see, then we should increase our security and the underlings to always be in a group."


    Echo:" that will do for now. I''ll make something to help them so they can easily defeat them."


    Grandpa:" I will leave it to you then."


    While I am talking with grandpa, mom has been busy to help everyone who has injuries. After finish treating their wound, we go to sleep.

 Chapter 22 - V 2 Ch 3

    It''s been two months since Vasuki start to obstruct us. A week after that incident I distribute the SS Serum to our subordinates and I give my family the one I have to Integra in my last life.


    A month later I make a new type of Quinque. This one is a Shield type, I use Q Steel, Adamantium, and Vibranium. I make it be able to reflect attacks like Captain America Shield and also be able to stores kinetic energy and release it. I also make an Armor Quinque using a Kakuja Kakuhou I make it have the ability like a Black Panther habit but its design looks like Arkham Knight. This one I give it to my Mom and grandparents to protect them.


    Two weeks after that, Vasuki stopped harassing us as they''ve been defeated by our subordinates every time they attack and we always kill every attacker. So, they must be short on people now.


    Right now the Yakuza worship me a little since they know that I am the one who makes the SS Serum and Quinque. They thought, that with me as their young master they will prosper in the future.


    ---


    Afternoon time inside Yamagami compound.


    Right now I looking for a gift inside my GoB, next week was the twin birthday. After a while, I decided to give them a matching Yin Yang pendant for Nashiro the black part and Kurona the White part. I also enchanted it to protect them and give a signal to me when they are in danger. After wrapping it in a gift box. When I look outside it was already nighttime. I store the gift and go to the living room.


    Echo:" Good evening Gramp. How is today? No attack from Vasuki?" I ask him as I seat in the chair.


    Grandpa:" Oh, Echo. Good evening, there''s no problem this week. But, we can''t let our guard down. This type of person won''t stop with just these little setbacks, so what have you been doing since this evening? Not researching again right?" He asks me while raising eyebrows.


    Echo:" I see, you are right. They won''t stop with this and no, I''m not researching anything. I just make a gift for Nashiro and Kurona Birthday." I said and smile at him


    Grandpa:" Hoho, you''ve been close with them all this time. Do you want grandpa to engage you with one of them? Or do you want both of them? Hahaha" he asks me while rising his pinky.


    Echo:" Don''t tease me!! Well, I like them. But, I''ll be the one who courts them. Don''t meddle in it Gramp!" I shout and pointing at him.


    Grandpa:" hohoho, that''s my grandson. So, Manly. Hahaha"


    Echo:" Jezz, making fun of me again." I said to him while smiling.


    Yuuna:" what is this. You''ve been having fun here?" mom asked walking in with grandma while bringing the food.


    Grandpa:" No, I just asked Echo if he wants to get engaged with the twin and he said he will court them himself. Hahaha"


    Grandma:" Dear, don''t tease E-chan to much."


    Yuuna:" Ohh, really? Then you must work hard since mom likes them so much. You must bring them as my in-law okay Echo." mom said with a grin.


    Grandma:" Not you too!! But, grandma also like them Echo so you must work hard."


    Echo:" Jezz, why is everyone like to tease me? Now, let''s just eat. I''m hungry"


    After we eat, we chat up for a while and as we are about to sleep. The mansion alarm sounds out, this means that we are attacked by Ghouls.


    I go to the monitor room with mom and grandma. Grandpa left to instruct our subordinates. When we arrived at the monitor room, I see there are 30 people wearing Vasuki agent clothes. I start to deploy our trap one of which is the Rc Suppressant. This thing the CCG still hasn''t develop now. They newly develop it before the Cochlea raid in the canon. So they must be surprised to find out that their strength left them especially when this one is the stronger version that can affect SS rated ghouls. We see that Gramp and the Mansion Guard defeated them easily.


    The night pass without much happening after that. When morning comes I start my daily exercise like always, nothing will stop me from doing this as this has become a habit for me to exercise in the morning. I see our people are re-deploying our traps and clean the garden.


    After finishing exercise I go take a bath then eat breakfast. When we finish eating I ask my mother.


    Echo:" Mom, can we go to Anteiku today?"


    Yuuna:" Ohh, why do you want to go there? We just get attack last night, it might be dangerous to go out for now."


    Echo:" I just finish the Serum that can make ghoul eat normal food. I want Yoshimura-san to test it and we don''t have to be afraid of being an attack, it''s daytime and they won''t make a move at this time and even if they attack I am sure we can handle it with our Bodyguard." I said, reasoning with her.


    Yuuna:" I see, you are right. We can''t show weakness especially in time like this. Okay, let''s go." she bought my reason agreeing to it and pump her fist up. She can be childish for a time, this mother of mine.


    On the way to Anteiku pass without much drama. We arrived at the Cafe an hour later. We go in and sit in the bar seat with five of our bodyguards sitting at the table together. We brought ten bodyguards this time around the other five waits in the car.


    Yoshimura:" Welcome Yuuna-san, Echo-kun you''ve brought many company''s this time around. What your order this time around."


    Yuuna:" Yeah, our mansion was attacked last night. So, we tightened up our security. I''ll have espresso this time. What about you, Echo?"


    Echo:" I want to try Cappuccino, Yoshimura-san. Can we talk after we drink it?"


    Yoshimura:" Yes, please wait for a while."


    After we finish our drink we go to Yoshimura-san office. Before we go in I ask the waitress to bring us food to the office.


    Yoshimura:" So, what is so important that you come here right after your mansion being attacked last night?" he asks straight to the point after we sit.


    Yuuna:" This time its Echo who want to go here. So, ask him. Hehe" mom said and Yoshimura-san looks at me.


    Echo:" I already finished the Serum. I want you to try it. That why I order for food before we come in, Here drink it." I said giving Yoshimura the Serum.


    Yoshimura looks at it for a while, before chugging it. We wait for fifteen minutes before the food comes in. He looks at the food for a while and starts to dig in. As he bit his first bite, he started to cry.


    Yoshimura:" Ahhh, So this is how human food tastes like. It is regret full that I can''t taste it up to now. Thank you very much Echo-kun. For you have given me this wonderful opportunity." he said to me with gratitude.


    Echo:" You are welcome. You can tell me how many of your people who want it and we will send our servant to deliver it And please only tell it to the one that closes to you as I still don''t want the trouble that comes with it."


    Yoshimura:" Then I''ll do just that. Once again, thank you very much."


    Yuuna:" Well, since your business has finished. Let''s go shopping for your new clothes."


    Echo:" Again?? We just bought many of it two months ago."


    Yuuna:" you are still growing. So we have to buy a new one."


    Echo:" Jezz, you just like to treat me like a doll right, Mom."


    Yuuna:" Don''t know what you''re talking about." she said not meeting my eyes. Sigh, this mother of mine is dotting me too much. Well, let''s just enjoy it.

 Chapter 23 - V 2 Ch 4

    Two days after I go to Anteiku Yoshimura-san send me a message. He said he needs around 150 Serum for now. Around a hundred of it is for Black Dober and Apes group. The rest of it for others that need help. I immediately send someone to deliver the serum.


    ---


    Today is the twin birthday date. As soon as I left school, I immediately run toward home. When I arrived I go to my room take a bath then get ready to leave.


    Echo:" Mom, Grampa, and Grandma hurry up. Let''s go to Yasuhisa''s place."


    Grandpa:" Hohoho, already can''t stand to meet the twin?"


    Echo:" Gramp!!! I just don''t want to be late."


    Grandpa:" Okay, I''ll leave it at that. Hahaha"


    Yuuna:" We are ready! Now, let''s go."


    Grandma:" Wow, E-chan looks at you so handsome." grandma look at me than praise my looks. Right now I wear a white suit with a red shirt and black tie. This is the one we bought after we left Anteiku last time.


    Yuuna:" of course, I choose his clothes. Fufufu"


    Echo:" Now, Let''s go."


    We then left our home, we get into our car then go to their house. The distance between our house is around ten minutes in the car or thirty minutes'' walk.


    We arrived at their home. But, as we stop on their Gates I smell blood. I immediately spread my observations haki to see a ghoul was impaling the Yasuhisa couple.


    Echo:" Fuck!!" I curse and jump out of the car.


    Yuuna:" Echo, don''t curse! Eh, where are you going?" mom said as she look at me running.


    Echo:" Not now mom!" I shout at her and continue to run.


    Grandpa:" Something must happen for him to be flustered. Let''s follow him!"


    I run to their Mansion, instead of using the door. I jump to the second floor and broke through the window of the room they are in.


    There I see the ghoul about to kill them, though they are already dying.


    Echo:" STOOOOPPP" I shout as I activated my Kagune. What I didn''t know at that time is that I broke through and awaken my Haoshoku Haki and the ghoul is already faint as I shout at him to stop.


    Echo:" Aunt, Uncle please hold on! I''ll help you up."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" E-Echo kun, you''ve come. I''m sorry, it seems that we won''t make it. Please take care of Nashiro and Kurona for me."


    Echo:" No, you can''t die! I won''t let their birthday become your death anniversary!" as we are talking Nashiro and Kurona comes our of their rising place as they heard my shout before.


    N & K:" Mom, Dad!! Please don''t leave us!!" the said while crying.


    Echo:" Aunt, Uncle you have to survive for them and I can help you with that. But, you are not going to be human anymore!"


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" Then do it Echo-kun, I don''t care as long as I can be with Nashiro and Kurona." aunt then told me with a weak voice. As we talk this my family arrived at our place. My mother was shocked and in tears with grandma hugging her. While Grandpa''s face hardens from seeing this.


    Hearing her consent I look toward uncle who only nods at me giving his consent. Then I look at grandpa and shout.


    Echo:" Gramp, please clear the middle of the room and place two long table beside each other with a gap for one person between it." he immediately moves, as he has confidence in me.


    I then take out two Rinkaku Kakuhou that have a strong regeneration factor. Seeing the middle of the room already cleared off, I brought Aunty there while Gramp brings uncle and place them on the tables.


    My family and the twin that stay at the side were mesmerized when they look at me work on operating. Both hands and strings work in tandem to reach the same goal. Seeing strings floating around helping in operation must have shocked them.


    When operating them I administered the healing solution that I used to use to train the Hellsing soldiers on them to help them heal faster. Two hours later I finished the operation and their condition stabilizes. I then look at Gramp.


    Echo:" Gramp, please call someone to bring a van. We have to bring them to our house, that ghoul is from Vasuki. They will target them again if they know that they are survived."


    Grandpa:" I already call for it when you''re operating on them. How are they?" he asks as the twin look at me with hope? I look at them and smile.


    Echo:" They are okay now. They have stabilized and only need to rest. Let''s go and bring them home, so they can properly rest."


    Gramp:" Let''s do that."


    Third POV


    After seeing the subordinate load them to the van. Nashiro and Kurona jump at Echi while crying and saying thank you over and over.


    Echo:" You don''t have to thank me. Just be happy for me as I don''t like seeing both of you sad." he say while smiling at them. Both Nashiro and Kurona hearing him saying that to them making them fall for him. They then kiss him on both of his cheeks.


    Nashiro:" Then that''s your reward, hehe." she said mischievously.


    Kurona:" You have to take responsibility for making us fall for you." kurona told him while having a pink tint on her face.


    Yuuna:" Ara ara, my son is such a player. I''m not complaining though about having two cute daughters in law. Fufufu" Yuuna said trying to lighten the mood. But, hearing her both Kurona and Nashiro go red in embarrassment.


    Echo:" Don''t embarrassed them, Mom."


    Yuuna:" Ara! Already taking the in-law side! Mom is sad. Kusu"


    Echo:" Geez, let''s go to the car." he said then walk to the car, to hide his embarrassment.


    On the way home, both Kurona and Nashiro slept on his shoulders, while Yuuna giggling at seeing them like this.


    After they arrived home and let the twin sleep in one of their rooms then preparing the equipment to take care of Mr. and Mrs. Yasuhisa. They go to the living room to talk.


    Echo POV


    Grandpa:" Echo, I won''t ask how you can do an operation since we already know that you are genius and you can do anything you take your mind on. But, is the thing that you implant them a Kakuhou? How will it affect them?"


    Echo:" Yeah, you are right. That''s a Kakuhou, by implanting it I make the Half-Ghoul like me. That why I ask the first if they are okay with not being human anymore and they agreed."


    Grandpa:" I see, how can you come up with it on the place?"


    Echo:" I don''t come up with it. The CCG already experimenting with it. But, they still haven''t succeeded. I hacked into their terminals when searching for information on them, that why I know about it. After that, I perfect the technique in case I need it."


    Grandpa:" I see. Now, did you know why the Vasuki want them to die? Is it because they has connection to us?"


    Echo:" Nope, let''s wait for them to regain consciousness and asks them."


    After that we go retired to the bed. I was so exhausted because of the operation and immediately go to sleep on my bed. At midnight both Kurona and Nashiro come to my room and slept beside me.

 Chapter 24 - V 2 Ch 5

    The next morning, I wake up without feeling my hands. I look down to see Kurona and Nashiro sleeping on my hands stopping the blood circulation making it numb. It seems that they move into my bed in the middle of nights.


    I stay for a while, thinking about what happened yesterday since I feel that I awaken something. I was replaying the scene of myself and see that before I killed that ghoul, he''s already lost consciousness.


    Echo:" That must be Haoshoku no Haki! I tried many times to activate it in my last life but, to my disappointment, I never awaken it. But I awake it here in the midst of confusion. With it, I have all three types of Haki though I never use the Armament Haki."


    I then tried to get off the bed without waking the twin, but end up in failure as they wake up from feeling my movement. So, I''ll just great them now.


    Echo:" Good Morning, since when did you two come to my bed?" I said while ??r?ssing at their face.


    Nashiro:" In the middle of nights, we were still afraid about what happened yesterday so we come to you. Did we bother you?" Nashiro told me while tearing up and Kurona only hugging my hand tighter.


    Echo:" Nah, there is no way that you two are a bother. You can come to me anytime if you feel uneasy." I said while patting their head.


    Kurona:" Really!! Then we will do that."


    Echo:" Now, please get up. I must do my daily exercise now." I told them and they get up at my request.


    Kurona:" Un, then we will follow you!" she said after they get up.


    Nashiro:" Yes Yes, we want to exercise too!" Nashiro agreeing to her.


    Echo:" You don''t have to follow me. Don''t you want to see your parents first?" hearing this Nashiro and Kurona look at each other then nodded as if agreeing at something.


    Nashiro:" We will do that later. We want to become strong, Echo-kun. Please let us train with you." she said pleading at me.


    Yuuna:" fufufu, already sleep in the same bed I see. Good thing I come to wake you up. I got to see something interesting. Why don''t you just train with them? It will help them protect themselves from danger." Hearing her both the twin goes red in embarrassment.


    Echo:" Mom! Since when are you here? Well, I already going to accept them anyway. I just want them to rest do the day as they have a rough day yesterday." I said as I left the bed.


    Echo:" Anyway, you girls should just rest for today and go to see your parents! We can talk about training later. Oh yeah, I forgot to give you this yesterday since it''s so hectic. Here your gift, tough late. Happy Birthday!" I said to them while giving their gift.


    N & K:" Thank you Echo!!"


    Kurona:" Then we will listen to your advice and go look at mom and dad."


    Nashiro:" Yes, you have to hold your promise and train us later, Pinky promise!" she said while raising her pinky finger and I follow her with Kurona after.


    Yuuna:" Now, you two. Come follow me, I will take you to your parents. By the way, you can call me Mom you know? I''m happy to have two cute daughters in law. Fufufu" mom told them to come and teased them at the end making them go bright red.


    Echo:" Mom, don''t tease them too much. They are not as immune as me at your teasing."


    Yuuna:" Ara ara, you are right. I stop it at that then. Let''s go, you two!" she said, and they left my room.


    After seeing them left, I started my morning routine. Finishing my exercise, I ate breakfast then go to school.


    When school over and I am now back at home, I heard that Aunt and Uncle have woken up. So, I go to see them.


    Echo:" Hello, Aunt and Uncle Yasuhisa. How do you feel?" I ask them as I go inside their room? There are my family and the twins there, checking on them.


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Echo, we are fine. I heard that you operate on us. Thank you." he said while bowing at me.


    Echo:" You don''t have to thank me and I am sorry for making you not human anymore."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" what do you mean?"


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" I think that the operation changing us. I remember agreeing to it so you don''t have to be sorry for it. So, what change did the operation do to us?"


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" I see, she''s right Echo. You don''t have to be sorry. We choose it."


    Echo:" In order to have you who has lost your organ from the ghoul piercing your stomach. I implant a Ghoul Kakuhou inside you to make your healing factors go up. That way you are recovering faster than normal. In doing so I change you into a Half Ghoul."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" So, that how it is. I''ve been confused about how we are recovering so fast. So, this is why. Did we also have to eat human meat from now on?"


    Echo:" You don''t have to be afraid of that. I already make a Serum that makes a Ghoul be able to eat normal food. Here, please drink this." I answer them and gave them the Serum which they drink immediately.


    Nashiro:" Echo, did Mom and Dad become a Ghoul? Then, please you have to change me too! I want to be the same as them."


    Kurona:" Me too, please change us."


    Echo:" The two of you, please don''t be impulsive! Being a ghoul is not easy."


    Nashiro:" I don''t care! You''re also a ghoul, right? We see it when you kill that ghoul who attacked us in our hiding place. I don''t want to be left out!" she says and Kurona adds.


    Kurona:" Also from what we heard from your conversation. You have solved the issues that ghoul required to eat human meat. So, we will do it. You can''t change our minds."


    I then look at the Yasuhisa couple for help only to see that they look at him with a helpless face.


    Echo:" Sigh, You talk to your parents first. If they allow it then I''ll help you." I said to them and left the room with my Mom and Grandparents to give them privacy.


    ---


    As we left the room, I ask my Grandpa.


    Echo:" So, before I came. Did you ask them about why they are attacked by the Vasuki, Gramp?"


    Grandpa:" Yeah, Nanao told me that he found about the CCG dirty dealing. So, they tried to silence him."


    Echo:" I see if that the case. They must stay low for a while. Let them think that they successfully eliminated them."


    Grandpa:" You are right, we can send them overseas for now. We can also make them help us expand overseas."


    Echo:" We must ask them first before deciding it. Let''s talk to them after they are healthy."


    Grandpa:" You are right. Let''s leave it at that for now."


    ---


    After half an hour, the twin comes to me. They stand in front of me with a resolute face.


    Nasahiro:" Echo, we already talked with our parents and we still want to become a ghoul."


    Kurona:" Yes, they already gave us their consent."


    Echo:" I see, then we will start after they are healthy again. So, they can watch the procedure."


    N & K:" Okay!!"


    Nashiro:" So, what are you doing just now?"


    Echo:" Nothing, just waiting for the two of you. Come here, sit with me!"


    Kurona:" it''s been hectic since yesterday! You must be tired."


    Nashiro:" Yeah, do you want a ??p pillow?"


    Echo:" You don''t have to Shiro and yeah you are right Kuro. I think I will take a test to skip grades at school, up to High School graduate level. That way, I can have time to train and experiment more. I will take the online courses for the University."


    Nashiro:" Really? That cheating! I also want to skip grades."


    Kurona:" You have to be smart like Echo to do that Shiro."


    Nashiro:" Then we have to study hard, Kuro! Echo, please help us." Shiro said while making puppy eyes on me.


    Echo:" I will just help you study. The rest is up to your efforts."


    Nashiro:" Then I will work hard!"

 Chapter 25 - V 2 Ch 6

    Two days later, the Yasuhisa couple is already at their full health. Seeing their parents recovery, the twin immediately pesters me for changing them into a ghoul.


    Agreeing at their request, I started their operation which is done in about three hours. I implant them with Rinkaku Kakuhou of a SSS Rated ghouls that I found in the GoB.


    The next morning, they''re already up and running around. Like they didn''t do an operation the day before. After checking that there no abnormalities, I let them go.


    Nashiro:" Hei Echo, can you start to train us?"


    Echo:" Let''s do that the day after tomorrow. I don''t want you to have any complications." I told her.


    Kurona:" He is right Shiro. We don''t have to rush on it." Kuro takes my side and also told her.


    Nashiro:" Okaay!" she answered and pouting.


    Echo:" Oh Right! Here, drink this." I said while giving them a vial containing the Serum for a ghoul.


    They drink it without asking since they trust me. After they drink it, we go to have breakfast.


    When we got into the room, I see that Grandpa was talking seriously with the Yasuhisa Couple.


    Echo:" What are you talking about? Making a serious face."


    Grandpa:" We were talking about how they have to stay low for now and they agreed that they will go to America to stay low and help us expand our business."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" We decided to leave next week, we will also leave Kurona and Nashiro here. Since in the report, it will be that we died in the ghoul attack and you will take Kurona and Nashiro as they are Echo Fiance."


    Echo:" Eehhh, since when?" I ask shocked. While Kuro and Shiro look at them with a star in their eyes. It seems that they are happy with the news.


    Grandpa:" Since just now. We already see that the three of you like each other, so we make it official." Gramp said, hearing him not Kuro and Shiro goes red from shyness.


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" Echo, we won''t be able to be with them for a while. So, please protect them for us."


    Echo:" You don''t have to worry about that Oba-san. Please leave it to me!"


    Nashiro:" Mom, can we visit you later?"


    Mrs. Yasuhisa:" Of course you can. Come anytime you have a Holliday."


    Nashiro:" Okay"


    Kurona:" We will study hard, so we can skip grades like Echo. That way we can go to visit you anytime."


    Mr. Yasuhisa:" Then work hard for it."


    Yuuna:" Now, stop the talk and eat before it''s cold." mom said, walking out from kitchen with grandma.


    ---


    Two days later we have a fake funeral for the Yasuhisa couple while the person themselves has left for America via smuggling. We send ten on our best agent to go with them to help them there.


    After the funeral, CCG offers the twin to study and live at school and place affiliated with them. But, my mother told them that as my fiance, we will take care of them.


    The day after the fake funeral. I was in my home yard along with Kuro and Shiro. I am going to train them the Rokushiki, in my last life I was able to completely recreating all of the techniques.


    Echo:" Kuro, Shiro right now I am going to teach you a set of martial arts that I created. The name of the arts is Rokushiki. This martial arts only have six moves. First is Soru this is a movement technique, by kicking the ground ten times in a second we can accelerate our movement to a superhuman degree, like this." up to here I stop talking and showed them the move. One second I was in front of them, the next second I appear ten meters away from my spot before.


    Nashiro:" Wow, you move so fast that it looks like you''re teleporting."


    Kurona:" Yes, it was amazing and we can learn it after this. I''m so excited!"


    Echo:" Hehe, good. Now to the second move, the name of this move is Geppo. This one has almost the same principle as Soru but, instead of using it to move faster we use it to hop around in the air. By kicking the air faster than when we do Soru we can walk in the air." I then demonstrate the move again by walking around in the air. By this time both Kuro and Shiro have a star in their eyes. Even my mother and grandparents who come to look at us was shocked seeing me walk-in the air.


    Grandpa:" Hey Echo! This technique can we learn it?"


    Echo:" These techniques require a superhuman body strength to be utilized. But, with your body that has been strengthened by the SS Serum, you should be able to learn it."


    Kurona:" Then can we use it if it has high requirements like that."


    Echo:" Of course, as now you are a ghoul. Your body will be fast to adapt to the training menu that I made for you. You should be able to reach the body requirements in a few months. Now the third move is Rankyaku, Rankyaku is a powerful projectile technique, in which the users start by kicking at very high speeds and strength, sending out a sharp compressed air blade or "Sickle Wind" that can slice objects and greatly damage a human body." like before I demonstrate the technique to them.


    Echo:" that''s all for now. From now on the two of you will wear a weight around ten kilos on your feet and hand then you will run around the mansion while trying to kick the ground as many as you can in a second until you exhausted. After that, you will do pushups, situps, and squats as many as you can with weight clothes." after telling them that I gave them the weight and told them to start running.


    ---


    Three months after they start training Kuro and Shiro already be able to kick the ground around six times in a second. Grandpa already is able to use the three-techniques at a basic level. Mom and grandma only be able to use Soru at a basic level.


    I already do the test for skipping grades and I pass with flying color and already register an online course for college study, taking Biological Sciences.


    In the past three months, I always go out at night to go around beating any group of ghoul or Dove that I found with only martial arts and haki. It was to train my haki, especially the Armament since I rarely use it before.


    I never kill any of the opponents that I beat. They are a precious sandbag, I mean a training partner. So, I can''t have them died on me. I also go around all the wards in Tokyo and plant runes I make that have a function like Hiraishin no Jutsu. I do this so I can go anywhere without being detected.


    Right now I was looking at a group of ghoul that meets up to have a Tomogui or cannibalism. here is around fifteen people there. I jump down and greet them.


    Echo:" Hello there, Hollow-san is here. I hope I can interrupt your fun!!"


    G1:" they heck are you? You want me to eat you."


    G2:" Let''s kill this guy first, don''t like his attitude."


    G3:" Hollow? I know this guy. He''s the one that''s been wreak havoc and beat a ghoul in group all around."


    G4:" He is strong, be careful."


    Echo:" So, some of you have known me. Now, let''s the Banquet begin." I said and start to attack them.


    I use Soru and appear in the middle of them and kick the closest person to me. This wakes up the other from their stunned expression and started to attack back. All of them then activate their Kagune, the one that has Koukaku as the vanguard Bikaku and Rinkaku as mid attackers while the one that uses the Ukaku attack at long range.


    I dodge the Ukaku bullets and punch the vanguard while activating my Armament Haki. Then I parry the tail attack from Bikaku and Rinkaku user. Then get close to them and beat them up. After that, I kick out a low power Rankyaku toward the Ukaku user.


    Echo:" Sigh, beating nameless goons is too easy now. Must search for bigger fish if I want a fun fight."


    CLAP CLAP CLAP


    ???:" You are really as good as they said, Hollow-san? Want to join our group, Aogiri?"

 Chapter 26 - V 2 Ch 7

    CLAP CLAP CLAP


    ???:" You are really as good as they said, Hollow-san? Want to join our group, Aogiri?"


    ---


    Echo:" Well well, just as I want a stronger opponent and one comes at me. What more it''s a lady, what is the Aogiri want from me, Eto-san?" I asked her while thinking That she look weirder in reality with that bandages.


    Eto:" I want you to join us. You are strong so I am sure you will be a help to our cause."


    Echo:" and what if I don''t want to?"


    Eto:" Then it''s a shame that I have to use force." she said and change into her Kakuja form.


    Echo:" Hoooh, now you are talking." I said and summon my own kagune.


    We launch at each other and start to exchange blow. She attacks me with the spike in her hand while shooting me with her Kagune.


    She appears behind me and tries to stab me with her hand. I dodge her attack easily since I already know it from my observations haki. While dodging my Ukaku Kagune shoot at her at point-blank. She was taken by surprise and was shot by it.


    Eto:" Wow, it seems that you are a Chimera. I want you more and more."


    Echo:" Sorry but I am not interested in your group. It seems that your friend is coming. So, I''ll take my leave." I said to her and shot Rankyaku toward her with all my ninetail kagune then use a combination of Soru and Geppo to leave the place, Leaving the stunned Eto.


    ???:" Eto, what are you doing there in your Kakuja form?" Someone shout at Eto, He was a white haired man wearing a white long coat and a red mask.


    Eto:" Tatara-san, I was trying to recruit Hollow. But, he ran away when he feels that you are coming."


    Tatara:" Hollow? How is he?" He asked intrigued.


    Eto:" He is strong. He was able to match me in this form."


    Tatara:" I see, then do what you want."


    Eto:" That what I am going to do."


    A year past since the first time I met with Eto, I am fourteen now. After that meeting, she always appears at the place where I was going to do my activities. This girl''s intuition is already at a scary level since she always accurately guess where I will appear. Fortunately, she has not to guess where I live or my identity.


    Every time she meets me, she always makes small talk and tried to pry for my information which I always deflected her question. In the end, It always ends with us fighting each other in the end.


    In this year both Kuro and Shiro already master the three Rokushiki techniques to intermediate level. Gramps goes beyond and masters all six Rokushiki techniques to advance level. Well, he already has a foundation in martial arts that make it easier for him to learn it. Mom and grandma only focus on the Three I teach them up to advance level.


    Now I was going to teach the twins how to use a weapon and start to take them to fight ghoul.


    Echo:" Okay, please pay attention the both of you. Now, that you have a solid foundation on your body and martial arts. I will teach both of you how to use a weapon. Please try each of this weapon and tell me which one that you like and fell the most comfortable with." I said to them and put many weapons in front of them.


    They both look at and try to feel which weapon they like the most. After 45 minutes they have chosen their preferred weapon. Kurona chooses a scythe as big as her while Nashiro chooses a halberd the one that looks like Rory Mercury weapon.


    Echo:" Okay, is that the weapon that you want to learn? Can you tell me why you choose it?"


    Kurona:" Don''t know, just feel that this is the one for me." Kuro answer trusting her instinct when choosing her weapon.


    Nashiro:" Cause it''s cool and I can pummel our enemies with this. Ehehe" she answers based on her feeling.


    Echo:" I see, then that''s good. From now on, besides our usual routine. I will teach you how to use your weapon and we will also go out at night for both of you to get a combat experience by fighting Ghouls and CCG investigators."


    Kurona:" Will it be alright?" she asked while making an uneasy face.


    Echo:" it''s okay, there is me if a problem arises. I also already make a mask and attire for both of you." I said to her while taking out clothes and masks. The same one that they used in anime.


    Nashiro:" are we bringing our weapon?" Shiro asks with stars in her eyes.


    Echo:" No, you are going to only use your martial arts and Kagune. You will only be able to use your chosen weapon if I deem you to be ready for it. I will also make one specially made for both of you."


    After finishing their training we eat lunch and play around for the day. When night comes, we change our clothes and wear the mask then I bring them to fight ghoul.


    As soon as we find some ghoul I told them to go fight them. Kuro and Shiro summoned their Kagune then start to attack the ghoul. They were surprised at first, but they still react to the attack and dodge it. But, they clearly have no experience in martial arts as they only move on instinct. So, they''re easily beaten by the twin.


    Seeing this, I brought the twin all around the wards via teleportation to fight a stronger opponent. They fight for three more times until they are exhausted. So, I have to bring them home.


    Echo:" So, how do you feel about your first real fight?"


    Nashiro:" It was anticlimactic, was all ghoul that weak?"


    Kurona:" Yeah, it was too easy."


    Echo:" Of course not, the one you fight today''s just a weakling minion. You got it easy because of your martial arts foundation while they fight on instinct. The stronger one will also have experience in martial arts. So, be prepared for it."


    Kurona:" I see, we will work hard then."


    Nashiro:" Unn, we won''t be defeated by them." I smiled at them and says.


    Echo:" Good, now let''s go to sleep."


    N & K:" Okay." they say, and we went to sleep.


    I bring the twin to fight every two days time and we did this for the next few months. As this going on, their fighting experience got richer. Once in a while, I have to help them as their opponents proved to be stronger than them.


    They also have met with Eto and they show so much hostility toward her at first. Now, they have become friends with her. I don''t know how this happened. Though i warned them not to tell her anything about us.


    Right now, the twin just finished defeating their opponent. As we were searching for a new one, we find a girl with a rabbit mask fighting a group of Doves.


    Nashiro:" Hollow-kun, she''s in a pinch. It seems that she was the same age as us. We must help her."


    Kurona:" Unn, I also want to try fighting Ghoul Investigators."


    ''Hmmm, is that Touka? From her Kagune it''s likely to be her, and it''s more obvious with her mask.''


    Echo:" Then go for it, I will help if you need it."


    N & K:" Yes!!"


    They then jump down the building into their midst. The Doves were surprised by their entrance but as trained Investigators, they are fast to respond to surprise. The captain immediately recognized them and gives an order.


    Captain:" They are the twin''s menace!! They are Hollow deciple. So, he must be close by. Call for back up and be careful as they are strong." he shouts to them and activate his Quinque to face them. From the look of his movement, he is about Rank 1 investigator not quite a first-class yet. But, he''s a suitable opponent for the twin.


    Doves:" Yes, captain." His subordinates answer and one-off them was trying to contact their HQ. Well, I can''t let them do that can I? So, I summoned my Ukaku and shot his phone off.


    Echo:" Now now, you can''t do that. I need you to be the twin training partner. So, please fight them seriously." as this is happening, the twin is already exchanged a few blows with the Captain. Touka was recuperating at the side. I came to her and ask.


    Echo:" So, what happens here that you got cornered by the Doves?"


    Touka:" None of your business! More importantly, will it be alright to let them fight alone?" Whoa, her mouth sharps.


    Echo:" it''s okay, I have trained them to be able to handle these types of situations and if they are in danger I will go help them up."


    As we talking about, Kuro and Shiro were able to defeat the Captain and then his subordinate help him to retreat.


    Echo:" Look there, they''re able to easily solved it." I told her as they walk toward us.


    Echo:" So, how is your fight? It''s harder than fighting ghoul, right?"


    Kurona:" Yeah, I am not sure that we will be able to fight them if there is another fighter of his level there."


    Echo:" I see, then we will target them from now on. So, you can adapt to fight them."


    Nashiro:" By the way, is she okay? What is her name?" Nashiro asked and we look at Touka.

 Chapter 27 - V 2 Ch 8

    Third POV


    Touka was silence at first hearing her question. But, seeing all three of them looking at her without speaking making her want to talk. As she was about to talk Echo cut her off.


    Echo:" I think we should change the place first in case the Dove comes back with reinforcement."


    Kurona:" Yeah, let''s leave first."


    Nasahiro:" Okay, let''s go."


    Took a hearing them, only nod and follow them. She thought about running from them but discard it as she knows Echo was much stronger than her and he can force her to stay if he wants to.


    Not long they arrived at an abandoned construction building.


    Echo:" So, what is your name?"


    Touka:" My name is Kirishima Touka."


    Echo:" Why did you fight the Dove alone? Don''t you have a group? Good thing that we are in the area, if not you might be dead."


    Touka:" Hmph, I will be able to take them on and I don''t belong to any group."


    Nashiro:" Hei, Touka-chan how old are you? We are 14 close to 15."


    Touka was taken aback by her enthusiasm then answer her.


    Touka:" I am 13 years old."


    Kurona:" You are one year younger than us. You shouldn''t be reckless, especially when you are without training like that. Even us, we have to be trained first before we go around fighting."


    Nashiro:" Then, do you want to come with us? Or you have a family to be with?"


    Hearing Shiro''s question she was tempted to follow them. But, she is still wary of them so she hesitates.


    Seeing her hesitation, Echo told her.


    Echo:" You don''t have to be afraid. If we want to harm you, we don''t have to use a roundabout way as we can kill you easily if we want." hearing him, she thought that he was right so she nods at him.


    Touka:" Okay, I will come with the three of you."


    Nashiro:" So, where do you live? We will take you there?"


    Touka:" I don''t have a place like that, ever since my father is dead."


    Echo:" Then come with us. I will give you a job, so you can rent a place to live or you can stay at my place if you want to." she looks at me and nodded her head.


    ---Echo POV


    In the morning, we woke up and introduced Touka to the family. Mom immediately takes a liking on her and fussing about how she lives in the streets. Gramp only raised his thumb and wink at me.


    Echo:" Okay, that''s enough. Don''t you see that you are making her flustered mom? Let''s eat first."


    Yuuna:" Oh my, I''m sorry Touka-chan making you uncomfortable."


    Touka:" No, it''s alright. It''s just the first time I am experiencing this." she said with a blush as she likes these feelings.


    Yuuna:" Okay, let''s eat first." we start to eat only to see that Touka was not eating.


    Kurona:" Echo, you forgot that she won''t be able to eat normal food."


    Echo:" Ahh, right!! Because all of us can eat normal food, I forgot that normally ghoul was not be able to eat them. Wait a minute, Touka." I said and left for my room then make the serum with Denial of Nothingness. When I come back I give it to Touka.


    Echo:" That is a Serum I made so Ghoul was been able to eat human food normally. Drink it."


    She looks at me and then the Serum and drinks it.


    Echo:" Now, that''s resolved. Let''s eat."


    As we eat, Touka starts to cry because it was the first time she eats human food. Mom and Shiro go and console her.


    After we finish eating.


    Echo:" Now, let''s go and train. Mom, can you please make a procedure for Touka to sign for the school."


    Yuuna:" Okay, I''ll sign her in the same school as Shiro and Kuro."


    Echo:" Yeah, that will do."


    Nashiro:" Hear that Touka-chan, we will go to school together from now on." Shiro was excited and Touka only nods at her with a smile.


    Echo:" The two of you, go do your training. I will be supervising Touka training for now."


    ---


    It''s been five months since Touka was joining us. Now, she is already fit in with us. She always stuck with mother every time. It seems that the feeling of mother warm was addicting to her.


    Echo:" Hello, Yoshimura-san. Good afternoon! Oh, Yomo-san you are here?" I greet them as soon as we got in.


    Yoshimura:" Echo-kun, long time to see. How have you been?" he asks while his hand was still wiping a glass?


    Echo:" I''m fine. Thanks for asking. Ah, please an espresso for me. You three what do you want?"


    Nashiro:" I want a Mochaccino and a Neapolitan."


    Kurona:" Cappuccino for me."


    Touka:" I... I''ll take coffee and french fries."


    Echo:" That what they said."


    Yoshimura:" Koma, please take their food order." the one he asks is Enji Koma, a quite dandy man with a pompadour. He was the leader of Devil Apes.


    Koma:" Okay, manager."


    Yomo:" I''ve been hearing about your feat, Echo. You''re SSS threats now By CCG." he said as he knows about my identity along with Yoshimura.


    Echo:" Hahaha, that''s just for the sake of training Don''t mind it."


    Yomo:" That one hell of training then. I even heard that the twin already been labeled S Rank now."


    Echo:" Really? I don''t know about it."I ask surprised.


    Yoshimura:" By the way Echo-kun, won''t you introduced us of your new companion?"


    Echo:" Oh, this here is Touka-chan. She said she wants to try working. So, I hope you can hire her?"


    Yoshimura:" Okay, since it was you that recommending her."


    Echo:" Thanks Yoshimura-san! Touka, this is Yoshimura-san work hard with him okay."


    Touka:" Unn, thank you Yoshimura-san. For accepting me."


    Yoshimura:" Hohoho, it''s okay. You can come to work from tomorrow onwards."


    Yomo:" So, where did you pick her?"


    Echo:" Well, I met her five months ago when I was going around hunting with the twins. She''s been corner by the Doves at that time."


    Yomo:" I see. So, want a spar after this? It''s been a while since we spar." he asked me, as we''ve been going to spar ever since I know him a year ago.


    Echo:" let''s do that. By the way, I heard you are making your own Coffee shop?"


    Irimi:" you are right, Echo. He even stole a few of our workers for his shop." as I asked him, the one who answers me was Irimi-san. Leaders of Black dobbers.


    Yomo:" Irimi, I was just borrowing them until I train my own worker."


    Irimi:" Whatever you say, Yomi-san. So, you got yourself a new girlfriend Echo-kun? You player."


    Echo:" She is not my girlfriend. But, I don''t mind if she wants it. Hehehe" I say, and Touka goes red hearing it.


    Irimi:" Wow, how bold of you saying that in front of your own fiancee. What do you think of it, both of you?" she said and ask the twin.


    Nashiro:" I am okay with Touko-chan since she was cute, Ehehe. You are okay with joining us right Touka-chan?" Shiro answers her with a lecherous face. She is showing that she was a bisexual and ask Touka. Touka being asked by her got flustered and look at me than hide her face.


    Kurona:" I''m okay as long as Echo and Shiro happy."


    Irimi:" Eehhh, you three were a weird couple."


    Echo:" That is not nice, to call people weird on their face."


    Irimi:" Ahaha, well I''ll go see a customer. Bye," and she left like that.


    After that banter, we finish our coffee and left the shop.


    ---


    That night, inside Kurona and Nashiro room. There are three girls were talking to each other Kurona, Nashiro, and Touka.


    Nashiro:" Touka-chan, how is it? About what we talk this afternoon, Will you join us to become Echo wives?"


    Touka:" Eh, I thought you were kidding? Are you okay with that?"


    Kurona:" Like I said this afternoon, I don''t care as long as Shiro and Echo happy."


    Nashiro:" Of course I am okay with it! You know that I like you Touka-chan." Nashiro said while hugging Touka. Touka blushes at her closeness and asks.


    Touka:" Umm, did you swing that way? Didn''t you like Echo?" she asked puzzled.


    Nashiro:" Hehehe, I swing both way! And I think Echo will like it as well. I already saw many times he ogle at us when I hid at Kuro or you. I think he has a fetish for yuri."


    Touka:" Really? But, will he like me?"


    Nashiro:" Of course he like you. I guarantee it!" she said with pride.


    Touka:" Eh, how did you know?" touka asked.


    Kurona:" Yeah, how did you know, Shiro?"


    Nashiro:" cause he has the same preference for a girl like me. So, I can feel it." hearing her both Kuro and Touka look at her with a weird gaze.


    Nashiro:" Anyway, his birthday was three weeks from now. How about we offer ourselves, to him as a birthday gift?" hearing this Kuro was interested.


    Kurona:" oh, how will we offer ourselves then? We must plan to make it memorable for him." Touka hearing them both at the side having a red face from embarrassment.

 Chapter 28 - V 2 Ch 9

    Three weeks later, Echo POV.


    Today is my birthday, we celebrate it by going to the beach. Me, mom, grandpa, grandma, Shiro, Kuro, Touka, and 10 of our bodyguards are now inside one of our villas in Okinawa.


    We play so much in the day until we were satisfied. Now, it was already night. The girls told me that they will give me my gift in my room and told me to come at nine as it was a surprise. Mom has left to go enjoy a spa and massage, while Grandpa and Grandma disappear somewhere.


    *Lemons Alert!!!!*


    Now, it was nine o''clock, I was in front of my room and get inside it. I look at the bed and was shocked to see that they are wearing s?xy lingerie while making out with each other.


    Shiro was kissing Touka while playing with her puss? and Kuro was behind Shiro playing with her n?pp??s while kissing her neck.


    Echo:" Now, that was hot." I said unconsciously.


    The girls hearing this look at me, they smile and make an inviting gesture. I walk toward them and said.


    Echo:" So, my gift was the three of you?" to my question Kuro smile then kiss me.


    We kiss for a while until we were satisfied. As we finish our kiss Shiro then takes over and she also kisses me. After her, I look at Touka who was watching us with a red face. When I was looking at her, she looks at me with a shy and hopefully expression. I get close and give her a kiss.


    Kuro:" Echo, take me first!" she asked, her expression filled with ?ust.


    Echo:" Okay! Shiro, Touka you two can make out with each other first."


    I say at them and start to kiss Kuro again while playing with her br??sts. I undressed her then explore her body while playing with her puss?, I kiss and start to lick her n?pp??. She m??n?d when I give a bite to her n?pp?? and have tiny ?r??sms.


    Kuro gulps her saliva and starts ???k?n? it while I play with her puss? and lick her back. She groans as I push my tongue inside her and play with her ???t. Her fellatio was awkward at first, but now it starts to feel good. It seems that she''s talented at it.


    Echo:" That''s good, Kuro. You''re talented at giving fellatio. Let me pay it back." I said and start to p???sur? her.


    Kuro:" You too, I think I''m about to come." she said and start to come at my face. I greedily devour her nectar and suck he prissy out, making her quiver in p???sur?.


    Seeing that I still haven''t come, she put up more effort in pleasuring me. After a while i come in her mouth, she show it to me then drink it.


    Echo:" Let''s end the foreplay and start the main event."


    Kurona:" Unn" is all her answer.


    I told her and make her sit on my ??p while facing me then positioned my p?n?s on her puss?. She lowers herself and starts inserting my ???k inside her.


    She grunts in pain and starts to bleed. We stop for a minute while I kiss her and play with her br??sts. After her body adapted to my size, we start to move. Not long after Kuro started to m??ns loudly.


    Touka and Shiro come at us and play with her b??bs. Touka then comes to me and kiss me while Shiro was kissing Kuro and play with her br??st. We come at the same time and I came inside her, Kuro lay in the bed exhausted afterwards.


    Nashiro:" You still have the stamina to do it with us right?" Shiro asks while looking at me ??wdly.


    Echo:" Of course, you don''t have to be afraid. I''ll make all of you faint from p???sur?."


    Nashiro:" Heeh, then make us. Let''s do a threesome." she said then push me into the bed.


    She then mounts me and inserted my ???k inside her. Touka then positions herself on my face and made me lick her puss?. Shiro then went to kiss Touka while still riding my ???k at a fast pace, She seems to like it rough. I was playing with Touka puss? and she comes after a while. Shiro still moves at fast pace and I start to match her movements. She came when Touka pinches her n?pp?? and I came inside her after a while.


    After Shiro, I move at Touka and positioned her in a d???? position. I inserted my p?n?s and wait for a while so she doesn''t feel pain anymore. She starts to lick Shiro puss? while waiting for herself to adapt to my size.


    Touka:" You can start to move slowly, Echo."


    Hearing her, I start to pound at her puss?. At first, it starts slow. But, as we going on I start to pound her faster and she started to shout.


    Touka:" Yess, pound me faster. Make me feel good. Come inside me!!!"


    Echo:" Whoa, you are a screamer huh. Then I''ll rough you up now." I said and pound her faster.


    Shiro who is up from her afterglow kiss her with Kuro follow after her playing with her br??st. She came after a while, but I still pound her until I come inside her.


    After that, we do it again for three more rounds until all of them admit defeated and go to sleep with a smile on their faces. As for me, I just lay in the middle of them feeling the connection of our soul. With this connection, I will be able to bring them with me through my reincarnation. I can easily cut the connection if they didn''t want to follow me. We also are also able to talk telepathically through the connection and feel each other locations with it.


    The next morning I woke up feeling something between my leg. I look down to see the sight of the three girls giving me fellatio. They see me awake then greet.


    Shiro:" Mornin, how is it? Having a blowjob in the morning with three beauty?"


    Echo:" Satisfying, We should do this more often."


    Kurona:" This thing still energetic even though it has already played with us many times last night."


    Echo:" Hehe, what can I say. My stamina is monstrous." I answer her.


    Touka didn''t say anything and start to kiss me.


    Echo:" You''ve become bolder now, Touka."


    Touka:" Well, I''ve already become yours so I''m not embarrassed anymore."


    Echo:" I see, then that''s good."


    We go to the dining room to eat breakfast after we finish taking a bath and wear our clothes. As we step into the dining room, I see mom look at me with a knowing smile and gramp gives me a thumb ups.


    Yuuna:" Ara ara, my son has become an ?du?t now. Mom is happy! Especially with three beautiful daughters in law." she said, making the three girls goes red.


    Grandpa:" Hahaha, that''s my grandson! Bringing back three in law for his gramp." grandpa laughs in happiness.


    Nashiro:" Gramps, I think he will bring more girls later. I don''t think we will be able to contain his libido by ourselves." hearing her Kuro and Touka pulling her in embarrassment.


    Grandpa:" Is that so. He must be a beast in bed then. Hahaha"


    Yuuna:" Echo, you must treat them nicely. If not, then prepare for my wrath."


    Echo:" Okay mom. You don''t have to tell me that."


    Grandma:" Ahh, my E-chan has climbed into ?du?thood." grandma said as she put our food into the table.


    We spend a few more days there, I and the girls go around doing a culinary tour which makes Touka happy to taste many types of food. I think she has become a foodie.

 Chapter 29 - V 2 Ch 10

    It''s been three years since I lost my V card, Virgin for three lifetimes. I should have already become a Sage. Now, I am 18 years old and just graduated from College at Teihou University the one that Kanou Akihiro graduated from.


    Kuro and Shiro because of my guidance succeeded in skipping grade for a year. Now, they are a second-year at Kamii University taking business management since they didn''t want to repeat their father''s failure in managing a company.


    Touka wants to enjoy her school life so she goes to school normally. Though she only has one friend at school, she is content with it. Her work at Anteiku proceeds without a problem. Like my prediction, she has become a foodie now and always drags us to a culinary tour. She also starts to learn cooking.


    It''s been an uneventful year except for Yomo introducing his friend Uta and Itori to me. He told them that I have an RC solution that can increase RC cells to them and they want to buy it. Good thing that he didn''t tell them about the Serum or I has to kill them since I know that Itori was an information broker.


    Another thing that happens is that I got acquaintance with Tsukiyama Shuu. He tried to get me to go to his Banquet like what he did to Kaneki. But, one look at him with my Mystic Eyes and he immediately abandoned the thought of messing with me. Because, anyone that was looking at mystic eyes of death perception will feel absolute fear of death from the depths of his soul. From then on he always stays away from me.


    He also meets with Eto on many occasion, she is close with the twins now. She also brought Tatara to meet him once and he also becomes Echo sparring partner like Eto. He also told them his identity since it was tiring to hide it all the time. At first, they were angry with him selling and manufacturing quinque which is an anti ghoul weapon. But, thinking about it does humans hate a weapon maker for making a weapon? The answer is no, all that is just business and since Echo didn''t especially target them, they let it pass.


    Right now, I was at Anteiku. Looking at this world protagonist joking around with his friend. Kaneki Ken, the miserable victim of Kanou. Half-human half-ghoul that his life was full of misfortunes from his mother died because of overwork, his girlfriend tried to eat him, becoming a ghoul, friend being killed, tortured, etc.


    His life was so full of up and down and I will not prevent him from becoming a ghoul but I can help a little bit after that. It makes me think, who will Kanou turn into a ghoul with Nashiro and Kurona with me.


    Right now Kaneki friend, Hideyoshi Nagachika was trying to flirt with Touka which she answers by pointing at me saying that I was her boyfriend. He looks at me then deflates himself into the table.


    Not long after, Kamishiro Rize comes and makes eye contact with Kaneki. Seeing this, I know that it was about Time that the canon start. I look at them for a while until his friend left him alone.


    Echo:" Touka, I am going home now. I''ll be here when your shift is over."


    Touka:" Okay, then come at 7.30 pm." She said while taking an order."


    Echo:" Yeah, well then. See you later Yoshimura-san, Koma-san, and Irimi-san." I got up and left the cafe. As I walk out, I look at Kaneki and Rize for the last time and left.


    Kaneki POV


    I was now at Anteiku with Hide, this cafe was now one of my favorites to hang out. Right now we are waiting for my crush to show Hide her looks.


    Hide:" Hey, Kaneki Is she not here yet? Is it her or that girl in the window? Or that cute waitress over there?" he looks around while pointing every girl here asking me which one is her.


    Kaneki:" It''s not her! Don''t point around at people, This is embarrassing! Although you are right that the waitress is cute. But, the one I like still hasn''t come yet." I answer him while trying to calm him down. When we are talking, the waitress comes to us.


    Touka:" Hello sir, can I take your order?" she asked us with a smile.


    Kaneki:" Ah, I will order a coffee and a Hamburg steak, please. What about you, Hide?"


    Hide:" I want to know what your name. Cute waitress-chan, do you have a boyfriend?"


    Kaneki:" Hide, what are you doing? I don''t want to be banned from here because of you."


    Touka:" fufufu, it''s alright. My name is Kirishima Touka and I have a boyfriend. Look, there he is at the bar seat." hearing her, we look at the bar seat and see a man with a wavy black hair looking at us or precisely at Touka-san.


    Hide:" Aaahhh, my love leave just like that. Then Black Coffee for me with a little bit sugar for this bittersweet feeling of mine." he said and deflated on his seat. Touka-san chuckles at his antics and left with our order.


    Kaneki:" Hide, can you not do that? I don''t want to be banned from here. This is one of my favorite places and where I can meet her."


    Hide:" Calm down Kaneki, they won''t do that for something so trivial." he said and look at the TV showing news about Ghoul and it''s danger.


    Hide:" It''s scary isn''t it? Out there, in a place we don''t know. there''s a species that look like us human that eats human."


    Kaneki:" You are right, but I think we don''t have to be afraid since there is CCG that will protect us from them."


    Hide:" I don''t know about that. They can''t be everywhere to save us from them. You have to be careful Kaneki, you are the types that easily fooled."


    Kaneki:" Oi, what do you mean by that?"


    Hide:" Ahaha, I just want to warn you as a friend." he said and as we laugh, she comes in and walk past us she crossed eyes with me and go to her seat.


    Hide:" Is that her? It''s impossible, give up! She''s not on your league."


    Kaneki:" and why is that? We don''t know if I don''t try."


    Hide:" Well, if you go out with her it will be like the Beauty and the whatever!"


    Kaneki:" It''s the beast!"


    Hide:" Hahaha, Now that I have seen her. I''ll leave now. Bye Kaneki"


    He said then left me alone. Then I heard the boyfriend of Touka-san talk to her that he was going to leave. He walks past m, I feel that he looks at me and Rize-san before he left the cafe.


    Seeing him leave, I then take out my book to read and look at Rize-san to see that she also read the same book as me. We look at each other for a while then she giggles at me. She gets up from her seat then walks towards me and sits in front of me.


    Rize:" It seems that we have a same hobby. My name is Kamishiro Rize, nice to meet you. You are?" I look at her, stunned. Then I woke up the she asked my name.


    Kaneki:" Ahh, nice to meet you. My name is Kaneki Ken and I know about you, Rize-san."


    Rize:" fufufu, Really? What do you know about? I hope it''s nothing bad right?"


    Kaneki:" No! I mean, I just know your name and you always come here at this time."


    Rize:" Heeeh, then we must know about each other more from now on. How about a date this weekend?" I was entranced by her and then when I hear her word I was shocked but I immediately answer here.


    Kaneki:" D-date? With me? It''s my p???sur?!"


    Rize:" Then, let''s meet this weekend in front of this cafe. I''ll let you choose the place of our date. Well then, see you later." she said then left the cafe after paying her bills. Leaving me in my seat with a grin on my face.


    Kaneki:" I should tell Hide about this." I get up and pay my bill then left to search for Hide.


    ---


    In another place, there is a meeting called by the Washuu clan.


    ???:" Kanou, How is it the project of artificial ghoul?"


    Kanou:" It''s already at its final stage. All that I need is a guinea pig to test it but I already got that covered, Tsuneyoshi-sama."


    Tsuneyoshi:" Good, with this we can start to mass-produced them. Proceed with it at haste."


    Kanou:" As you wish"


    W. Yoshitoki:" Chairman, we also already have many Ghoul investigators now, our weapon development also improved from studying the weapon created by the Yamagami-Gumi."


    W. Daikichi:" Tch, we should destroy them or ?ssimilate them at that time, before they get stronger. Look now, they''ve been ?ssimilating many smaller Yakuza gang around them. If it continues like this, they will become a threat to us."


    Tsuneyoshi:" Calm down, Daikichi. At that time we don''t have the resources and manpower to do it. Now, we can start to deal with them after the project finish."


    W. Daikichi:" Okay, doesn''t mean I have to like it."


    Tsuneyoshi:" Well, that''s all about this meeting. You all can disperse, Kanou hurry up with the project. If you need materials, tell me about it."


    Kanou:" Yes, Tsuneypshi-sama."


    After that they left the room to their own business, leaving Tsuneyoshi alone in the room.

 Chapter 30 - V 2 Ch 11

    Echo POV


    It''s night Times, I was on the way to pick up Touka from Anteiku. Actually, I don''t have to pick her up since we live close by since I bought an apartment in 20th Ward. Right now the twins were in America to visit their parents. They will be back in a week''s time.


    This Apartment was bought by me to house Ghoul that closely ?ssociated with Anteiku and the one that I recruit. Right now it houses 300 Ghouls range from C class to SS class. Majority of the C and B class is Children. A class to SS class range from teenager up to ?du?ts. They all trained by me and the girls, I also give them the RC Solution to raised their RC level up faster and give them the Serum so they can eat normal food.


    With all that done, they are loyal to me and will do anything that I told them. I give them a job, a place to live, strength to protect themselves, and a new lifestyle that they dream of.


    I arrived at Anteiku then go inside through the employee''s door.


    Echo:" Touka-chan, I am here! Let''s go home." I shout at her as soon as I opened the door.


    Irimi:" Hyuhyu, Touka-chan your boyfriend has arrived. It makes me jealous." I heard Irimi voice there.


    Touka:" Geez, don''t make fun of me Irimi-san. Echo, wait a minute. I''ll be there." Touka shout back at me.


    Echo:" Okay, take your time!" I answer her as I seat myself in the sofa.


    Yoshimura:" It''s rare for you to pick her up ever since you moved to your new Apartments." he said, as he sit in front of me.


    Echo:" Well, I will do it often from now on because the town will be quite dangerous from now on."


    Yoshimura:" Hmmm, Did something happened that makes you this cautious?" he asked me, making a serious face.


    Echo:" The Washuu Long await plans is about to be done. I''m sure that they will start their move about now. Not only that, Aogiri Tree also started their plans and will go to war with the CCG. You should tell your employees to be careful from now on or they will become a collateral damage from them."


    Koma:" Is that true, Echo? Then I should tell my subordinate to be careful." koma heard our conversation and pitch in.


    Echo:" or you can let them live in my place Koma-san. As they say, There is safety in numbers."


    Koma:" Hmmm, I think this time I will take your over on that. Don''t want my friend died because of my stubborn pride after all." he said after thinking for a while.


    Echo:" Hahaha, that should do it. I''ll welcome them anytime."


    Koma:" geez, you and your recruiting habit. You win this time."


    Yoshimura:" Then can I send my other acquaintance there. I am worried if I let them alone to fend themselves."


    Echo:" It''s okay, you don''t have to be worried about numbers. I already bought the Apartments building next to mine, in case there''s too many of them that will come."


    Yoshimura:" You are prepared for it long ago it seems." Yoshimura inquire me.


    Echo:" Of course, I am already inside the Washuu clan list to be eliminated. I have to be prepared for their impending attack anytime."


    Yoshimura:" So, how is your family on that account?" he asked, concern about my family.


    Echo:" Haha, you don''t have to be worried about them. Our mansion is more impenetrable now and our subordinate is strong enough to go to war with CCG and Washuu clan combined. We just wait for them to start their plans." I told him with a laugh.


    Yoshimura:" You should be careful! Tsuneyoshi is not an opponent to be underestimated, he is as cunning as a fox if he wants to."


    Echo:" Yeah, I know about that. That why I continue to strengthen our people and recruiting here and there." I said seriously.


    Yoshimura:" It''s fine if you understand." he nods at me.


    Touka:" What are you talking about? You all make a serious face."


    Echo:" It''s about the Washuu, Irimi-san you can also send your friend to my place for a while too, okay."


    Irimi:" What are you talking about?"


    Echo:" Haha, I will let Koma and Yoshimura-san tell you about it. Let''s go, Touka-chan!"


    ---


    On the way home.


    Echo:" So, anything interesting happened after I left this afternoon?" I asked Touka as we walk home.


    Touka:" Yeah, remember the men that flirt with me?" she thought for a while before she answers me.


    Echo:" of course, so what about it? Did he come back and try to flirt with you again? Want me to tidy him up?" I said while cracking my fist.


    Touka:" No, it''s not like that. Just after you left, he makes contact with Rize. I think he''s her next prey." She denied it then told me her reason.


    Echo:" I see, poor boy. Did you hear anything more from their conversation?" i ask as I look at her.


    Touka:" I just heard that they will go on a date this weekend."


    Echo:" Hmmm, want to watch them? We will help him if he needs our help. We can also go on our own date." I said to her after thinking about it.


    Touka:" Really? I want to go on a Ramen your!" she asked enthusiasly.


    Echo:" Okay, it''s easy to do." I answer her.


    As we talk, we have arrived at our Apartments. We go in and were greeted by Ghouls that live here. We take the lift and go to the top floor where our Condo is.


    After taking a shower, Touka makes us our dinner. She was becoming good at cooking, maybe because she loves it that she easily takes on learning it.


    After that, we watch some movies then go to sleep.


    ---


    The weekend comes, Touka and I were going on a date. I already put a tracker on Kaneki so we will know his position anytime.


    Since I know that Rize will make her move at night when they were about to split up. I will just enjoy the day with Touka and not thinking about it for now.


    Touka:" Echo, let''s go there. They said that the Ramen here is good." I look at where she pointed out and read the sign board. It says ''Ichiran Ramen''.


    Echo:" Well then, let''s go in."


    We get inside and was greeted with a vending machine. We choose our ramen and then go to our seat.


    We did not wait long before they served our food. We eat our food and I listen to Touka rambling about the food ingredients as she tasted it. Did she develop a god tongue?


    After that, we go to five more Ramen restaurant. At the end, Touka promises me that she will make more delicious ramen then this.


    When night comes, we go to the place where Kaneki position is. When we arrived we change our clothes then go to the top of the building to watch them.


    We see Kaneki and Rize walk to a quiet street where Rize suddenly hugs Kaneki. She then proceeds to take a bite of him, making him terrified. Kaneki finding out that she''s a ghoul run away from her only for him to be impaled by her Kagune. He falls down and backs away into a wall. He looks up to see Rize was about to finish him but, before she was able to do that. She was struck down by a Steel beam that falls on her.


    Looking down again I see that there is already an Ambulance there. It seems that they already prepared for it.


    ???:" Now, why should Hollow and Rabbit here, looking at our operation?"


    Echo:" Hmmm, You people seem so invested in this project of yours? Having this many people just to make sure it goes smoothly."


    ???:" You know too much. We have to silence you now."


    Echo:" Hooh, can you do that? Rabbit, can you deal with them?"


    Touka:" Leave it to me. I''ll deal with them fast."


    Echo:" Good, Don''t let anyone alive." I told her.

 Chapter 31 - V 2 Ch 12

    Touka, hearing my word uses Soru to get in the middle of them. Using Observations Haki I count their number seem to be around 18.


    They are surprised seeing Touka suddenly in the middle of them. Touka looks at them and attacks the one that she feels the weakest. She uses Shigan right through his heart which kills him.


    The other woke up from their shocks summoned their Kagune out. The closest one to Touka has a Bikaku Kagune that looks like a scorpion tail lashes out his Kagune. Touka seeing this block it with her own Kagune which now looks like a Butterfly wing, it was beautiful yet deadly.


    She didn''t have time after defending as the other also start to attack. Around 8 of them were attacking her while the other along with their leader look at me with Vigilance.


    Seeing how strong they are and 8 was already enough to make Touka serious I decided to dispatch the other that look at me.


    Activating my Quinque I spread my strings and trapped them in my net. Only for the three of them succeed in escaping. Seeing this I killed the rest and decide to fight them the old fashioned way, through CQC.


    Echo:" Ohhh, it seems that the three of you are not a weakling."


    Leader:" Damn you, Hollow I will make sure you are dead for what you did!"


    Echo:" Really? Then show me what you got. I''ll bite you to death." I said and suddenly a tonfa materialized in my hand. (many like this catchphrase, so I will use it ????)


    I use Soru to get close to them and swing my tonfa to one the closest to me, He was an Ukaku user. He blocks my attack with his Kagune on the left while shots me on the right. I broke his Kagune while dodging his attack easily. My attack not only breaks his Kagune but also broke his arm.


    After the hit, I jump back since his friend takes this chance to attack me. This one uses Rinkaku that looks like a two-tail of iron sand. As I got into a distance the last one attack me in the back, this one is another Ukaku. He seems to be faster than the last one.


    Seeing that this one was far from his other two colleagues. I thought to finish him first. Using Soru to charge at him then uses Armament Haki on my tonfa, I hit him on the head causing it to explode like a watermelon.


    Seeing this I think it''s time to stop playing around and kill these two. So I up my speed and kill them before they even feel it, then wait for Touka to finish her fight.


    After she kills all of them, we left the place. But before that, I destroy all of the corpses. Using Denial of Nothingness I make a corpse dissolver and dissolved their corpses leaving no trace of it.


    ---


    We arrived home, after taking a bath. We stay in the living room and watch a TV.


    Touka:" Just now, why didn''t you help him? I thought that we are following him so we can help him." Touka asked as we got comfortable.


    Echo:" Nope, I just want to watch him as someone who is about to change."


    Touka:" What do you mean?" she asked confused.


    Echo:" He will become a half-ghoul through the operation like Kuro and Shiro. I think they just completed the project."


    Touka:" Just completed? I thought that it was already completed since you told us that you stole the idea from them."


    Echo:" Nah, at that time it''s still a rough draft that they composed. But, I completed it for my use and even upgrade it." I explain to her adopting a teacher pose, giving a lecture.


    Touka:" I see, but why let them have him then. He can become our enemies if we let them have him."


    Echo:" Because I don''t think they will recruit him. At best, they will do an operation on him then left him in the dark."


    Touka:" Hmmm, are you planning to recruit him?"


    Echo:" Nope, let him join Yoshimura-san. Now, let''s get to sleep. We should see him around in about a week."


    ---


    Two days later, the Twins got back from America. It seems the has a nice Holiday.


    Shiro:" Echo, You should have come with us. It was fun staying there since it was a new environment. Hihihi"


    Kuro:" Unn, Mom and Dad also want to meet you. Especially Mom, she said that she misses you. They also say hi to you Touka-chan."


    Echo:" Haha, I will go meet them later. It''s just starting to get interesting here, so I can''t leave just yet."


    Touka:" Thank you, I also want to go there. But I got to go to school."


    Shiro:" Yeah, it was a shame. So, anything interesting happens?"


    Echo:" Yeah, it seems that the Washuu clan has just completed their project. Now, they can make an artificial ghoul, like the two of you."


    Kuro:" Then they will also start to make a move?"


    Echo:" You are right, but for now it will be like water testing for a while. Before they go all out with their power. It''s good that we already finish our own preparation long ago, in case of war broke out."


    Shiro:" Then, can we start to uses our Quinque? I was itching to play with it. But you still not let us use it."


    Echo:" Yeah, you can use them. You too can use them, Touka. Let see how good you are with it in a real battle." ( Touka Quinque take the shape of a Katana, and the style she uses is Hiten Mitsurugi that Echo found in his GoB)


    ---


    A week later, Touka told us that she meet with Kaneki who was already turned into a ghoul. She then brought him to Anteiku to meet with Yoshimura.


    From there Yoshimura gives him the Serum that he has been saving in a case like this. Unlike in canon, Touka didn''t go antagonizing him since she herself able to eat normal food now.


    Kaneki then starts to work at Anteiku. Then a few days since he joined he already got himself in trouble. His friend Hide was targeted by Nishio as his next prey. Kaneki found out then fought with him. But, with him not cornered enough, he didn''t get to activate his Kagune like in canon. Fortunately, the Twins who just got back from their class sees this and drove Nishio out with a warning so he didn''t feed around here since it was our turf. We Don''t want the Dove to get their sight here for now.


    After that incident, Kaneki begs the Twins to train him. So that he can protect people that close to him. They refused and told him to ask Yomo to do it. While all this happened, I was out of town to take care of business.


    ---


    A week later, Anteiku.


    Echo:" Yo, it''s been a while since I am here!"


    Koma:" Oh, Echo! Where have you been? There are many things happen here while you are not here."


    Echo:" Haha, I am taking care of family business. So, this here Kaneki huh. I hear you''ve already meet with our family twins?"


    Kaneki:" Twins? Is it Nashiro and Kurona-san?"


    Echo:" Yeah, it''s them. Just to let you know,e don''t have any idea about them. They are mine."


    Shiro:" fufu, Echo is so possessive of us. Don''t mind him Kaneki-Kun! If you need anything, just tell us okay. We are your senpai after all."


    Kaneki:" Ahh umm, wasn''t Echo-san going out with Touka-san?"


    Irimi:" They share him, Kaneki. You should be careful if you got a girlfriend, don''t let them close to him. Hahaha"


    Echo:" Hei, don''t make it like I''m a bad guy here. I''m already content with the three of them."


    As we were talking about, a mother and daughter come in and go to the Yoshimura office. They are the Fueguchi family, the father just got killed by Investigators and they can''t hunt by themselves. They are not one of family that join Anteiku. So, they didn''t get the Serum.

 Chapter 32 - V 2 Ch 13

    Not long after they enter, Yoshimura asked me to go inside.


    Echo:" So, did something happened? You exclusively calling me in, you must need something from me."


    Yoshimura:" Please come in, I need your help with something." We walk in and I see the Fueguchi inside, waiting for us.


    Echo:" It must be about them if they are here."


    Yoshimura:" Yeah, this is the Fueguchi Ryoko and her daughter Hinami. Up till now, they have lived independently. Until a few days ago, her husband died being killed by the Doves. They are searching for shelter, I hope you can take them in your place and also gives them the Serum. Mine already used up with the one I give to Kaneki the last."


    Echo:" Hmmm, the reason there are many Doves lately must be them, right? I don''t mind taking then as long as they behave and didn''t bring trouble."


    Ryouko:" Ummm, Yoshimura-san. Who is this boy? Why do we need to go with him?"


    Yoshimura:" Let me introduced him. This is Yamagami Echo, he is the heir of the Yamagami-Gumi. A Yakuza Clan and he is a Ghoul like us. Right now he has two apartments that housing many Ghoul that now work under him. You will be safer staying with him."


    Echo:" Nice to meet you Ryouko-san. I hope we can get along with each other, and I am very sorry about your husband. You too Hinami-chan, nice to meet you."


    Ryouko:" Nice to meet you Echo-kun, thank you for having us. We will be troubling you."


    Hinami:" H-hello Onii-chan."


    Echo:" Hmm, Hinami-chan is a shy girl huh. As the first meeting gift here, please drink this Serum." I said to them while taking out two Serum for them.


    Yoshimura:" Did you always bringing them with you?"


    Echo:" Hehe, you don''t know when you will need for them. Like now!"


    Ryouko:" Before we drink it, can you tell us? What is this Serum you are talking about?"


    Echo:" Sorry sorry, this Serum is something I created for a ghoul. So they can eat human food normally. Now, drink it! I will give you candy after you drink it Hinami-chan." Now, I look like an old man enticing a young girl with candy.


    Ryouko looks at Yoshimura to confirm it. He nodded at her and she drinks the Serum. We wait for a while and Yoshimura go out to get a meal for us. While waiting for him, I give Hinami-chan the candy. She hesitates to eat it but seeing my encouraging look, she eats it.


    Hinami:" Mnnnnn, It''s tasty!! Onii-chan does this mean I can eat this as many as I can?"


    Echo:" Hahaha, You can''t since you will get a cavity because of it. Eat it in moderation, but you can try other human food from now on. So, look forward to it." I tell her with a smile.


    Ryouko:" So, it really works! Thank you Echo-san, for giving us this. I just hope we should know this earlier, that way my husband won''t die when he searches for food."


    She said making the atmosphere awkward. Good thing that Yoshimura come in and dispelled the awkwardness.


    Yoshimura:" Hmm, what happens?"


    Echo:" Nothing, So what did you bring for us?"


    Yoshimura:" Hoho, Just a Hamburg set with French fries and for the drink orange juice." he said as he put the plate on the table.


    Echo:" Okay, let''s eat then!" We start to eat with Hanami start to cling to me discarding her shyness towards strangers. Ryouko eats while tears start to flow from her eyes.


    ---


    After we finish eating I bring Ryouko and Hinami to our apartment. I brought them to their new room then left them to go to my own place.


    A few days go on peacefully with Ryouko leave occasionally to her husband graves. Yomo found out about it and scold her for it will bring harm to herself and others. He sends her to our apartment and told us to watch over her.


    She was well behaved after that scolding. Hinami will always come to our place when she''s bored. The Twins will play with her every time they are home.


    Two weeks later Ryouko and Hinami go to Anteiku to play. I send a few drones with my teleportation marker to monitor them in case of an emergency. That way, if they got into trouble I can just teleport to their place.


    Nothing happens on the way to Anteiku but when they got home. Hinami was distracted on the way, resulting in them get separated from each other.


    Ryouko was looking around for Hinami when suddenly, she got surrounded by Doves. I was cooking at that time and got a notification from my phone. When I look at it, Ryouko was surrounded by Dove and Hinami was with Kaneki who is holding her and covered her eyes.


    I immediately take my mask and wear it. As soon as I was it my clothes and hair start to change. It was like when Ironman uses his nanomachine iron suit.


    I teleport to a drone that over their heads, I free-fall while looking down one of the Dove with white hair was about to kill her so I spread my Ukaku Kagune and shoot at them. They stopped their attack and jump back.


    Echo:" Now now, that is not nice, ganging up on ladies. Why don''t I take you on in her place?"


    Mado Kureo:" You are Hollow! Why did you interfere with our business?" kureo got shocked by Hollow appearance and asked him.


    Echo:" Well, she''s under my protection. So, I can''t let her die since it will tarnish my name."


    Kureo:" Hmph, whatever! I will just kill you along with her." he said and readying his Quinque.


    Amon Koutaro:" Mado-san is that Triple S Rated Ghoul, Hollow?" he asked while walking by Kureo side.


    Kureo:" Aahh Amon-kun, this fight you will not be able to get involved since you will be died. That why go contact headquarters."


    Amon:" But, what about you?"


    Kureo:" Just leave Amon, you will be just a burden here." He shouts at Amon never leave his sight on Echo.


    Echo:" Are you finished with your strategy meeting? Not that it will be effective when you are already incident net."


    when they heard Hollow voice, they look around and suddenly be able to see that they are surrounded by strings all over them. They look over toward hollow that moved one of his fingers then their bodies got cut all over.


    They fall down and Kureo looks up seeing Hollow walking toward them.


    Echo:" You can be ?ssured that I won''t be the one that will kill you. Ah but, I will take this Quinque back to its family." Echo picks up the Quinque made from Fueguchi Asaki Kakuhou, Husband of Ryouko and Father of Hinami.


    He reverts it into a suitcase form then walks toward Ryouko. He looks at Kaneki signaling him to bring back Hinami toward Anteiku which fortunately he understood and left.


    He picks Ryouko up and starts to leave the place by jumping over the building. After he feels that it was saved, he brought her back to the apartment. He put her down, waking her up from her dazed.


    Ryouko:" Why? Why didn''t you kill them? They are the one that kills my husband!!" Ryouko shout at me while crying, making the ghouls that are around to look at us.


    Echo:" Because that was not my revenge. If you want your revenge, get stronger Ryouko then kill them with your own hand!" I told her while looking at her eyes.


    Ryouko:" Then make me strong! You are telling me this, then you must have a way to make me strong."


    Echo:" That what I will do, you can also learn to use this! That''s the last remains of your husband, use it for your revenge!" I give her the suitcase and walk away from there to my room.


    Echo:" Your training will start from tomorrow onwards." I shout while hating on the lift. Ryouko sobs in her place for a while hugging the suitcase that is her husband, she then nods with determination in her eyes and walks back to her room.


    I, who arrived at my room take out my phone and call on Touka who is at Anteiku.


    Echo:" Hello, Touka-chan! How is Hinami-chan? Did she arrive there with Kaneki?"


    Touka:" Echo, how is Ryouko-san? Hinami-chan safely arrived here with Kaneki. We already heard about it from Kaneki."


    Echo:" She is fine. So, please bring Hinami-chan with you when you are going back."


    Touka:" Okay, I will tell them the news then." she said and cut the connection.

 Chapter 33 - V 2 Ch 14

    The next day, after eating breakfast. I called Ryouko to the training ground in the Apartments basement. Not long after I call her, she comes with Hinami accompanying her.


    Hinami:" Onii-chan, I also want to be strong so I can protect Mom and Onii-chan. So, please train me!" when I heard her I look at Ryouko for her consent and she nodded at me.


    Echo:" Okay, Hinami-chan. I''ll train you but, you can''t complain later since I won''t hold back on training the two of you. So, prepare yourself! And also Onii-chan didn''t need protection so use your strength just to protect yourself from harm." I said to her seriously.


    Ryouko:" Echo-kun, what will you train us on?"


    Echo:" For now, please drink this. This will raise your RC level by 2000 to make your body stronger. After that, I will start to teach you martial arts. Beware that after drinking it, your body will start hurting since it will force the body to grow in strength faster." the two of them hearing this did not falter and immediately drink the serum.


    After they drink it, they start to cry out from their body hurting. Five minutes after that they stop screaming and get up while looking at their body in wonder since it was not hurting anymore and they can feel their strength going up.


    Seeing they are up, I start to tell them to start bodybuilding exercises with me following them exercising myself. After we finished with the exercise I start to teach them martial arts with Ryouko-san learning whip mastery since her husband Quinque in the form of a whip.


    Every time they got exhausted I let them to soaked themselves in a pool of healing solutions that will heal their bodies to peak conditions.


    Third POV


    There are many other ghouls in the room that we''re trying to practice. But, when they see how Echo trained the Mother and Daughter they shudder in fear and say thanks to whatever deities that he was not their trainer and remember how they also experienced His training method when they first arrived that will continue until Echo was satisfied with their strength and based on their own learning abilities it can be long or shorter.


    The fastest to graduate from Echo Hell Training is done in two months while the longest one goes on up to six months. They are now betting how long the mother and daughter duo will finish it.


    Echo who starts the mother and daughter training again feels their stare. He looks at them and shouts.


    Echo:" What are you looking at? Go do your own training! Or do you want to train with me again?" hearing his question they shudder in fear and start their own training not looking at them again.


    Echo seeing that they are not looking anymore then watch Ryouko and Hinami. He was satisfied with them since from the start of the training the both of them didn''t cry out a single complaint. After they exhausted again Echo order them to soak themselves again and when they are in the pool Hinami asked a question.


    Hinami:" Hey, Onii-chan. Why are they look like they are scared of you just now?" she asked while looking at the ghouls that were in the training room. When they heard Hinami question they start to smile wryly.


    Echo:" Ohh, them! When they just come here, they are experiencing my training regime like you are now. They said that my training menu was training from hell, that why they are scared. How about you Hinami-chan, what do you think of my training?" he asked Hinami who was blissfully feeling her body healing from exhaustion and fatigue.


    Hinami:" It was hard but, I like it when I feel my body get stronger after I soaked in here. How can this pool heal our bodies?" The other who hear her answer cough blood to hear that this girl takes a liking to his training method. Echo, hearing her smile and answer her.


    Echo:" You are a strong kid, Hinami-chan. This pool is my creation to help me train the ghoul that come to work for me. How about you Ryouko-san? What do you think about my training menu?"


    Ryouko:" It is good, I hope I can get strong faster and this will work." she said and nodded at me. The ghouls that eavesdropping in them thought that maybe this mother and daughter duo is an M and Echo who can guess what they are thinking about glared at them.


    Echo:" Hmm, phone call? Let''s see who it is." I take out my phone and answer it.


    ---


    While Echo was training Ryouko and Hinami, Kaneki who got a big wake up call yesterday was now in front of Yomo asking him to train himself.


    Yomo:" You want me to train you? For what do you d?s?r? strength? And why come to me." Yomo asks him seriously.


    Kaneki:" After seeing how Ryouko-san almost got killed yesterday, I want to become stronger! I don''t want to be helpless again when someone close to me was in danger. Just a few weeks ago my friend was almost died, now it was Ryouko-san. Please train me so that I have a power to protect everyone close to me. As for why I asked you, the twins told me to ask you when I ask them to train me."


    Yomo:" I see, then be prepared. I won''t hold back on training you. I won''t stop even if you beg me to stop later. Is that understood?"


    Kaneki:" Yes, I won''t complain a single bit!" Kaneki answer straightening his back.


    Yomo:" Good, wait for a while." he said and take out his phone.


    Yomo:" Oi, Echo! Can I use your training ground?"


    Echo:" the training ground? You can come anytime you want. We can also get a little spar here. I am also in the training ground now, training both Ryouko-san and Hinami-chan. By the way, what do you need the training ground for?"


    Yomo:" It''s Kaneki, he wants me to train him since he wants to be strong. Why don''t you take him along to train with the other two?"


    Echo:" Hey, don''t dump your responsibility to me. I want to focus on training them since they didn''t complain a single bit while undergoing my training menu."


    Yomo:" Really? Then they got potential. I want to see how strong they are after you finish training them."


    Echo:" That a sight to behold. Well, just come of you want. I''ll be waiting, bye!" after that Echo cut the line.


    Yomo:" Let''s go Kaneki! We are going to Echo''s place. His training facility is top-notch, you can also get acquaintance with the ghouls that live there. Since his apartment was exclusive for a ghoul."


    Kaneko:" Yes!! by the way, where are Echo-san Apartments? I''ve been hearing it for a while in Anteiku."


    Yomo:" It was close. You can just walk four blocks from Anteiku to reach there. Now, let''s go."


    ---


    Back with Echo POV.


    Hinami:" Onii-chan, did Kaneki Onii-chan will come here?"


    Echo:" Yeah, I think they will be here in minutes."


    Hinami:" Really? Why did he come here for?"


    Echo:" He wanted to be strong and ask Yomo to train him. That why Yomo brings him here to be trained. Now, enough resting. Let''s continue the training."


    We continue the training. About ten minutes later, Yomo comes along with Kaneki. Kaneki looks at me training Ryouko and Hinami was shocked by the amount of their exercise.


    Yomo:" Don''t be surprised, that amount of exercise is normal for him. Everyone trained by him all become strong because that type of exercise."


    Kaneki:" Will they be alright? That amount of exercise will destroy human body."


    Yomo:" Then it''s good that they are not human and even if they are human it didn''t matter if the one who trained them is Echo, he can even bring a person on the verge of death back to healthy."


    Kaneki:" Wow, how can he do that?"


    Yomo:" I Don''t know and don''t care. Now, let''s start practice. You will be doing the same thing as them."


    I look at Kaneki that starts to do his training then looks back at Ryouko and Hinami.


    Echo:" You two, please continue to do this exercise up to 5 o''clock, I trust that you will be able to do it even without my supervision. Tomorrow, we will do the same as today but you will also have to spar with anyone that was training in this room. I will see your progress in a week, so work hard for it. And make sure to not use your Kagune this week." I look at them to see if they understand and see they nod at me.


    Hinami:" Onii-chan, why did you not continue to watch us train?"


    Echo:" I have many things to do so I can''t always be here."when she heard me, she then nodded at me.


    Echo:" Well then, I will leave first. All of you, starting tomorrow please help them as a sparring partner." I shout at everyone that is in the training ground and they answer with a yes.

 Chapter 34 - V 2 Ch 15

    A week has passed, in this week Echo was busy fooling the Doves making them stay away from 20th ward. He makes them believe that He and Ryouko left the ward to 11th wards.


    Mado Kureo was going crazy hunting them down. Echo will always misdirect him and lead him to another ghouls group making them fight each other.


    Ryouko and Hinami were very diligent in their training. Echo never bothers to look at them this week but he will always hear the report of their training from Yomo who comes every day to train Kaneki this week.


    Right now, I was sparring with both Ryouko and Hinami to see their progress this week and I have to say that they exceed my expectations. Maybe because of their drives that were different, it makes them work three times harder in order to achieve their strengths.


    Echo:" Okay stop! Now, I know how strong you are. If you work together I am sure that the two of you will be able to deal with that Mado Kureo. We will go after them this night and I already prepare your mask and clothes for this occasion. Kaneki, you will come with us since you will go and fight his partner."


    Ryouko:" How will we find them?"


    Echo:" Rest ?ssured, I''ve been leading them around this week. So, I know their exact position all the time."


    Kaneki:" Umm, why did you bring me?" Kaneko asked, confused as to why Echo told him to follow them.


    Echo:" So that you have experience fighting for real! With someone that will kill you if you let your guard down."


    Kaneki:" I think, I have experienced it once with Nishio-senpai."


    Echo:" That is not a fight! It was just Nishio beating you around! Now, no other complaint. You will come with us no matter what. Do you already have your mask, Kaneki?"


    Kaneki:" Sigh, Okay I''ll go with you and yes, I already have a mask. Touka-chan takes me to Uta-san two weeks ago to order it."


    Echo:" Good, all that left is your clothes that I''ll provide. Now, go rest since you will need your energy for this night!"


    ---


    Night comes, now we are in 11th wards on the top of a building looking at Mado Kureo and Amon Koutaro who is patrolling the area.


    We can see that Kureo was looking around the area while sniffing around like a dog. He must have felt our presence, I don''t know how he does it since he has a supernatural sense that can sense a Ghouls close to him.


    I look at Ryouko, Hinami, and Kaneki who look back at me. Ryouko and Hinami nodded at me with a determined glint in their eyes while Kaneki looks very nervous. I nodded at them, signaling them to go down which they do immediately and jump down.


    As they touch down to the ground, Ryouko and Hinami immediately go after Mado Kureo and separated him from Amon while Kaneki block Amon who want to go help Kureo out.


    Ryouko and Hinami work together fighting Kureo with Ryouko who attack him from the front with her Kagune and her husband Quinque while Hinami attack from behind with her own Kagune which she inherited from both of her parents with Ukaku from her mother and Rinkaku from her father.


    They work so well together that Kureo was cornered by them even with his experience and supernatural combat sense. In the end, he can''t take on both of them and die from Ryouko impaling him with her Quinque.


    On Kaneki side, his fight was harder since he didn''t want to kill his own opponent because his sense of morals was holding him back. After struggling for a while, he succeeded in defeating Amon by making him faint. Well, for his first fight it was okay.


    After the fight, they come back to my side on the top of building. We stay for a while looking at Amon who wakes up from his unconsciousness, he looks around for a while before struggling to look for Kureo.


    Echo:" You have done a good job there, Ryouko and Hinami! Good teamwork there, as for you Kaneki, next time you fight someone with the intention to kill you, go for a kill. That way you won''t struggle too much like just now."


    Ryouko:" Thanks for providing us a chance to get our revenge, Echo-kun. Please take care of us from now on."


    Echo:" It''s okay, and please take care of me as well."


    Kaneki:" I-I think I still can''t let myself to kill people. Be it Human or Ghouls. But, I will work hard so I can finish the fight faster."


    Echo:" Hmm, okay. That''s good enough for now. Just work hard for it. Now, you can all go back." after that, they left the room to go back to their home.


    ---


    A month has passed since Ryouko and Hinami kill Mado Kureo. It was quiet this past month, CCG concentrated their force in the 11th ward. They thought that we were there since it was there the last time we''ve been spotted.


    I''ve been teaching Ryouko and Hinami this past month in three of Rokushiki technique, which is Soru Geppou and Kami-e. Their growth was slowing down since their revenge target is already died. But, it still faster than normal, just not as fast as before.


    Kaneki will come to train from time to time since he still has to go to college and work at Anteiku. But, unlike us who have a quiet month. He''s been in quite an adventure this month.


    The day after that when he was at the college he was meet with Nishio who was very miserable now after the beating he got from Kuro and Shiro. He was with his lover who was a human who over herself to him to be eaten but, Nishio refused her over.


    Two days after that, on the night when his shift at Anteiku was about to end. Nishio comes over asking for help in order to save his lover from Tsukiyama clutches.


    Kaneki hearing this immediately rushed over to save her from Tsukiyama. Touka who heard about this, go after him to help out.


    When Touka arrived at the scene, Kaneki was about to be eaten by Tsukiyama, Nishio was beaten at the side with his lover in his embrace and Tsukiyama was over Kaneki with a worn-out appearance from his fight with Kaneki.


    Touka seeing this kicked him out of the way and beat him to a pulp since he was quite weak in the eyes of Echo girls since they are trained by Echo from a young age.


    ---


    That was a week ago, now I just finished sparring with Ryouko and Hinami.


    Echo:" Hinami-chan, starting next week you will go to school. I have already finished the procedures for you to start to school."


    Hinami:" Really? But, is it okay? Won''t I be found out?"


    Echo:" It''s okay, even Touka-chan has gone to school. So, go learn everything you want."


    Hinami:" Yes, I won''t let you disappointed."


    Echo:" Good!"


    Ryouko:" Thank you Echo-kun, you don''t know how much Hinami wants to go to school."


    Echo:" You are welcome. So, Ryouko-san! I''ll let you work in one of my restaurants for now. You can start from tomorrow onwards."


    Ryouko:" Yes, I will work hard."


    Echo:" Good, but you will have to use a disguise since the CCG know your face."


    Ryouko:" How can I do that?"


    Echo:" You don''t have to think about it. I''ll make a device to disguise your face. I''ll give it to you this night."


    After that, I left both of them and start to make the device for Ryouko.

 Chapter 35 - V 2 Ch 16

    Echo POV


    Two months have passed since Hinami start to go to school and Ryouko start to work at his restaurant. I was just lounging around in my home watching the news while Hinami was doing her homework here since Ryouko was still out working.


    Seeing her struggling with a math problem, I decided to help her out. While helping her with her homework, my phone starts to ring. I look at it to see that it was Touka calling in.


    Echo:" Hello, Touka-chan. What the occasion? It''s rare for you to call before you work!" I asked her since around this time she just got out of school and arrived at Anteiku.


    Touka:" There is a problem here. When I just arrived here, Anteiku was already smashed by someone and when I asked, someone named Banjo comes to searching for Rize and ask Kaneki to tell her to run, but then my brother Ayato comes with Yamori and Nico. In the end they kidnaped him."


    Echo:" Huh? How did he do that? I''m sure Yoshimura, Irimi or Koma will be able to deal with him easily and why did he take Kaneki with him?"


    Touka:" Well, he comes with bad timing when everyone was out with only Kaneki and some of our newer members. Kaneki was fighting them to protect the other, only for himself to be a target of them."


    Echo:" I see, so I ?ssume that you are all going for a rescue mission now?"


    Touka:" Yeah, will you come with us?"


    Echo:" Of course, I''ll call Kuro and Shiro if they want to come with us."


    Touka:" Okay, we will wait for you." she said and I close the phone.


    I call the Twins and told them to go to Anteiku immediately.


    Hinami:" Onii-chan, what happened to Kaneki Onii-chan?"


    Echo:" Hinami, Kaneki got himself kidnapped and we are going to save him."


    Hinami:" Then, I''m going too. I also want to help!"


    Echo:" You can''t! Just stay at home for now and wait for your mother." I told her and she looked down.


    Hinami:" Okay, please be careful!"


    Echo:" Good girl! I''ll take you out for sukiyaki later after this end."


    Hinami:" Really? That''s a promise!"


    Echo:" Yeah, just wait for it."


    Echo:" Hello there! It''s been a while since I last visit here. There are many new faces now." I said as I look at Nishio and a new waitress of Anteiku.


    Yoshimura:" Echo-kun! Thanks for coming and helping us."


    Echo:" don''t mind it. So, have you found out about Kaneki whereabouts? And who will go to rescue him? You''re not telling me that all of you will go, right?"


    Yomo:" Yeah, he was taken by a group called Aogiri tree and right now they are at 11th ward. As for the rescue mission I, Yoshimura-san, Touka, Nishio, you and the twins will go."


    Echo:" I see, then why are you here Tsukiyama? I heard that you are trying to eat Kaneki huh? Do you want to be destroyed that badly?"


    Touka:" He suddenly barges in when we are talking about the rescue."


    Tsukiyama:" C-come on, Echo-san. I just recovered from Touka''s beating and want to meet with Kaneki-kun and when I heard he was kidnapped. I just offer to help."


    Echo:" Well, whatever. Then, how come Kaneki was easily defeated? He can be said my half apprentice. The hell he got defeated for?" I asked annoyed.


    ???:" Umm, Kaneki-san was able to defeat Ayato-san but he was defeated when someone named Yamori and Nico come." the new waitress says as she was the one with Kaneki at that time.


    Echo:" Hooo, so it was three on one. Well I can''t blame him for that. He was facing an S class ghoul Jason after all. So, how did he fight?" I asked intrigue of the change from canon since Kaneki was also trained by me a little.


    Yoshimura:" Echo-kun, you can ask that later. Right now we must focus on the rescue mission."


    Echo:" Sigh, if it was Aogiri that kidnapped him. I know of their founder even the twins were close to one of them. I always go sparring with them long ago. At that time they are just started their group and just recruiting people and u was one that they tried to recruit at that time."


    Touka:" Ehh, how come I don''t know about that?"


    Echo:" Well, we never let you meet them because it will expose our identity and I don''t want them to know about it at that time. One of their leaders is your daughter Yoshimura-san."


    Touka:" So, did you know that Ayato was there?"


    Echo:" Nope, the one that I and the twin always meet was Tatara and Eto who is Yoshimura-san daughter. I don''t know about their other members."


    Yoshimura:" How did you know that she is my daughter?"


    Echo:" Cause her Kakuja form looks like yours and she was one-eyed like me. It''s easy to reach the conclusion with that clue, you know about her right? Since you are always covering for her every time she does something stupid."


    Yoshimura:" Yeah, but I don''t know that she was with Aogiri."


    Echo:" Well, let''s leave it at that. Now, about Kaneki! We will rescue him tomorrow. because CCG will go to war with them tomorrow, it will be easier for us with them as a distraction."


    Nishio:" How did you know about that?"


    Echo:" I hacked CCG on a daily basis, of course I know. By the way, why did Koma and Irimi wasn''t include in the rescue mission?"


    Yoshimura:" We can''t go rescue Kaneki with large numbers. So I didn''t include them."


    Echo:" I see. But, I don''t see why did you let these two guys in when they are obviously weaker than them." I said while pointing at Nishio and Tsukiyama.


    Yomo:" They insist that they will come even without our permission, instead of letting them do what they want and disturb our mission it''s better when they are with us."


    Echo:" Tch, we can always cut their limbs so that they can not go anywhere. Well, whatever." I say, making Nishio angry while Tsukiyama shivers at the thought.


    I glared at Nishio and he shut up since his instinct told him that it was dangerous to provoke me.


    After we decided the time to go and the route to take tomorrow, I left along with the twins and Touka since Anteiku will be closing for a while.


    ---


    Nishio:" Who the hell is he? His presence is so scary when he glared at me."


    Yomo:" He is the twin and Touka Boyfriend''s, you must also hear his nickname, He is Hollow!"


    Nishio:" Damn, it makes sense. So, the twins were trained by him? But, he says he also trained Kaneki? Why is he weak when I fight him then?"


    Yomo:" Kaneki start to train after the beating he got from you. If the two of you fight now he would easily beat you. He''s a demon trainer and his training is effective. I also trained according to his training menu now."


    Nishio:" Really?"


    Tsukiyama:" Yes is as scary as ever. If not for Kaneki-kun, I don''t want to be at the same place as him" he said with a shiver.


    Yoshimura:" Everyone, Please go back for now. We have to prepare for tomorrow."


    After they heard him, all of them dispersed.


    ---


    When they arrived there the wards were already evacuated. With CCG agent surrounding the building where the Aogiri is. It was formerly the CCG base but now was occupied by the Aogiri.

 Chapter 36 - V 2 CH 17

    Third POV


    Echo and the others watch as the CCG starts their operation and with that as a signal, they also go to infiltrated the building.


    Their group was divided into three. Yomo with Nishio and Tsukiyama, Yoshimura with Echo, Touka with Kuro and Shiro.


    Yomo group and Touka group go in together. They got separated in the middle with Yomo go to the basement where the jail is, while Touka group go to the other building to search for Kaneki.


    Yoshimura and Echo stay and watch on the situation for a while before they go to intercept the first-class investigator that got in. Which is Yukinori Shinohara and Iwao Kuroiwa along with five rank 1 investigator with Amon Koutarou include.


    When they arrived in front of the investigator Yoshimura already in his Owl form while Echo brings out both of his Quinque the gloves strings which he called Arachnid and the Katana one which he called Shinso according to the name of the sword he got inspired on when he created it.


    Amon seeing Hollow in front of him getting mad and shout.


    Amon:" HOLLOW!!! You must be the one that sends those three and kills Mado-san! Answer me!!"


    Echo:" Hooo, the investigator of that time! You are right, I was the one who sends them. What''s wrong with that? He kills one of us, we kill him. It was as simple as that."


    Amon:" Shut up!!! Your very existence is evil. Your race kill people here and there and we are cleaning the earth from the likes of you!!"


    Echo:" Evil? Hahaha, don''t be arrogant human! You people kill Pig, cows, chicken and many other life forms for you to eat and you never call yourself evil for it. Now when there is a predator that is above you in food chain, you call us evil?" Echo at this time thought '' Hohoho, it was fun playing the evil villain.''


    Hearing Echo words, everyone at that place was shocked. Yoshimura includes since he knows that Echo was never eaten human meat and his personality change. When he looks at him, he found out that Echo was just acting and got into character of evil villain so he sighs.


    Yoshimura:" Acts of taking are equally evil. We, from the moment of birth, continue to take: food, people that got involved with us, even our own flesh and blood. For as long as we live, we continue to slaughter, kill, take. Life is to constantly sin. Life is evil itself. I am aware of it, I am evil... and so are you all" after saying it Yoshimura got his Kakuja form at stage two which is bigger than before.


    At this time Echo who was beside Yoshimura thought again '' Damn, that line was cool. Even when looking at the Anime I got a shiver when I hear it. Now, I hear it in front of the person itself it goes me a goosebump.''


    After seeing Owl got bigger and ready to fight. Shinohara and Kuroiwa immediately activated their prototype Quinque ''Arata'' and they are now covered in black armor with a red line here and there then readying their weapon.


    Amon and the other four Rank one investigator was facing at Echo combat-ready.


    Echo:" Well, it seems they underestimate me so much if they think that five ranks 1 investigator was able to fight me."


    Yoshimura:" Hohoho, even though you are stronger than me. They must think that I was stronger because of my history with them was longer."


    Echo:" Well, it was their misfortune then."


    Hearing that Owl was weaker than Hollow the investigator was shocked and before they rearrange that formation, Echo was already attacked them.


    From the start when they bicker around Echo already spread his strings around without letting them see it. By the time he attacks, it was already too late. Except for Amon who already got acquaintance with Hollow weapon choice and Shinohara with Kuroiwa who has many combat experiences the other was already down but he didn''t kill them since Yoshimura didn''t want to kill any of them.


    Amon seeing his comrades got defeated and thought that they died from it, got angry and rushed over at Echo recklessly only for him to be thrown back by Echo who attacks him with his Shinso which able to lengthen and shorten at his will at a fast pace. The thing that saved him was his instinct which told him to place his Quinque in front as a shield. But, the impact was strong, so he was incapacitated from the fight. That left Shinohara and Kuroiwa.


    Echo:" Now, it was a surprise! Didn''t think that you would be her, the Undefeated Investigator, the White Reaper, Arima Kisho."


    Shinohara:" Arima! It''s good that you are here. We will leave Hollow to you, we heard that he was stronger than Owl." Shinohara sigh in relief when he sees Arima as back up.


    Arima:" Shinohara-san, Kuroiwa-san leave him to me then." he said taking out his two Quinque.


    ???:" Arere, why are this people sleep here? Shinohara-san, are you in a pinch? Should I help?"


    Shinohara:" Suzuya! How come you are here? What happens to the other ghouls?"


    Suzuya:" The other? I kill them, then I thought I will find something interesting here. So I come."


    Echo:" Now, this is quite a pinch. But, it will be fun too!" Echo said as he looks forward to fighting both Arima and Juuzo.


    Arima who was observing Echo ever since he arrives, change his Quinque mode to look like a gun then shoot him a blast of electricity from it.


    Echo sees this dodge his attack, only for Juuzo to suddenly appear behind him and attack him with knives. Echo stops his attack by wrapping his hand with his Strings. When he was about to pull it to cut his hand, Arima was already in front of him with one of his Quinque in shield mode while the other lance mode then bashes him with the shield, it gives Juuzo times to get out of his Strings.


    Seeing there is no place to dodge, Echo jumps up only for Arima to shoot him with his Quinque gun mode which he switches a fast pace. Echo uses Geppo to dodge then he takes Shinso out and attack at Arima who parries it with his shield. Echo then take distance as he was aware of Juuzo lurking around ready to strike.


    Echo:" Well, did the two of you train for this? Your combo is too good, it makes me sweat a little." Echo tried to joke around only to be answered with silence from Arima.


    Echo:" Well, it''s not fun fighting someone who is not reacting to my taunt. Then, let''s start round two. One-eyed King!" Echo said the last sentence with a technique so that only Arima heard it.


    Only after hearing this there is a reaction from Arima if you look at his widening eyes as he looks around to see if the other heard it, only to see that the others did not pay attention to them. He looks back at Echo and starts to get serious.


    ---


    With Yoshimura, he also struggles a little when fighting with Shinohara and Kuroiwa. His age was catching up to him as he can''t fight as used to. He also taking care as not to accidentally kill the both of them.


    Shinohara and Kuroiwa were now taking a breather when Owl did not attack them as they found out that owl only attacks them in retaliation of their attack and did not initiate the attack himself.


    They look at Arima and Juuzo fight with Hollow and was shocked by how fast the pace of their exchange blow. They also shocked to see that Hollow who was fighting both of them didn''t seem to be at a disadvantage. They even feel that he was having fun fighting them.

 Chapter 37 - V 2 Ch 18

    Touka POV


    After we separated from Yomo-san, me along with Kuro and Shiro go search for Kaneki. On the way Shiro suddenly go and attack a group of ghouls from Aogiri tree then interograte them.


    From them, we know that Kaneki was in captivity of Yamori inside a dome-like structure behind this building. The twins know about Yamori cruelty and likes of torture, hurry me up to go save Kaneki.


    On the way there we got an attack from an Ukaku kagune, I know this attack too well since I also have the same kagune as this. My brother, Kirishima Ayato.


    Ayato:" Yo, Baka aneki! Still playing friend with human I see." I heard Ayato voice and he jumps from atop building and land in front of us.


    Touka:" Ayato, you stupid brother! Where the hell have you been up till now?" I asked him, a little angry because he left.


    Ayato:" I''ve been around. Unlike you, I was searching for power so that I am not as weak as our father and to show to humans that we ghouls were stronger than them."


    Touka:" You!! Don''t bring dad in this. He was doing it to feed us."


    Ayato:" and he died for it! Because he was weak and I for one, don''t want to die like him."


    Touka:" Kuro, Shiro, you two go ahead and save Kaneki. I got unfinished business with this brat."


    Kurona:" Okay, just give him a beating he deserves."


    Shirona:" Well then, we will go first Touka-chan." After that, they left for the dome-like building to save Kaneki.


    Third POV


    Touka and Ayato loot at each other, suddenly Touka disappears from her place and then she appears again in front of Ayato. With her sword at ready.


    Touka:" Hiten Mitsurugi-Ryu, Soryusen!"


    After using Soru, Touka attack Ayato with her sword. Using a quick draw technique from Hiten Mitsurugi-Ryu, Soryusen. Ayato was caught off guard, resulting in him being cut right on his ?h?st. But, Touka going easy on him so that he didn''t get a permanent injury.


    Ayato regains his bearing and jumps back to distance himself from Touka, only for her to shot him with her Kagune. Ayato who was in the middle of jumping back got propelled further by the force of Touka attack and hit the wall on his back.


    Touka follows after him as he falls down from the wall. She hit him with more force at the back of his head, making him faint from it.


    Touka gets Ayato on her shoulder and was about to go after the twins. But, they are already back. Along with Kaneki whose hair now white from the torture got from Yamori on Shiro''s shoulder fainting.


    ---


    After they left Touka to beat her brother up, Kuro and Shiro go to the dome building as fast as they can.


    When they arrived at the building, the first thing they got to see was Kaneki who was chained to a chair with Yamori in front of him with his back facing Kaneki.


    Kaneki hair which is black suddenly turned white. He then breaks free from his chain and attacks Yamori with it, trying to suffocate him. Yamori in retaliation uses his Kagune to attack Kaneki which he dodged by jumping up using Yamori shoulder as a springboard. He even gets to bite his ear when he jumps.


    Kaneki:" Ptui, You really taste disgusting. What did you eat, to make such a disgusting taste?" he asks, then he cracks his finger.


    Yamori who got himself eaten was angry and shout at Kaneki. Saying that he will devour him. Kaneki then move so fast and hit Yamori on his stomach with his knees shouting him up. He then kick Yamori on his head, only for him to caught his feet. Kaneki rotated his body, breaking his leg then kick Yamori again with his other leg.


    Yamori who lost control in anger attack him with his Kagune like a wild beast. Kaneki dodges all his attack then use his own Kagune to strike back. Kaneki who was at an advantage, easily beat Yamori to the ground. Then, his instinct takes over and Kaneki was about to eat Yamori Kakuhou.


    Kuro and Shiro seeing this know that Kaneki was about to do something that he will regret later. So, they moved fast and hold him back. Stopping him from doing the taboo.


    Kaneki:" Nashiro-senpai, Kurona-senpai, H-he, He killed them. Haru-san, Shuu-san, it''s my fault! Because I am weak. They are killed because of me. Because I am weak! Everything is my fault. Hiks" Kaneki seeing a familiar face who has saved him before, start to cry. Repeating his word again and again like a broken machine.


    They then left the place to meet with Touka. But, before that. Kuro summoned her scythe then kills Yamori who was still alive.


    Kuro:" hmph, That what you get for doing this to our Kouhai." she said then left his corpse which later will be found by Juuzo who will make a Quinque from his Kakuhou.


    ---


    Touka:" What happens to him? His hair is all white."


    Shiro:" He was tortured by Yamori and was forced to watch someone that helps him here get killed in front of him. As for his hair, I don''t know how it change color as we watch it change from black to white."


    Kuro:" I know why is that. That is Marie Antoinette syndrome, it a condition of a hair turned white from to much stress. I thought it was a myth but it happens to Kaneki. His torture must have been unimaginable if it makes his hair turned white instantly."


    Touka:" I see. Let''s leave this place. I don''t want to stay here any longer. I got a bad feeling here."


    Kuro:" Yeah, let''s go. I''ll take lead since both of you have them on your shoulder."


    After that, they left too the rendezvous place that already been decided before they got here.


    Yomo and the other got the easiest place to go. Even though they met with Noro from Aogiri on the way. He never bothers with them so they can leave without a fight.


    At the jail they met with Banjou group and got them out then left the place.


    They arrived at the rendezvous place. Banjou find Kaneki asked if he was alright. Kurona then explains to him about what happened to Kaneki also what is the fate of Haru and Shuu who was with Kaneki at that time.


    They lamented the death of their comrades. They also pity Kaneki who has to go through that.


    They thought that it was good that Yamori already dies now. This way, there won''t be another victim of his torture.


    Five minutes later Ayato wakes up and tried to run away. Only to be subdued by Touka, she then tied him up since he can''t be reason. She will let Echo talk to him later, he can be convincing at talking at others. How else he can get many followers if not because of this.


    Another three minutes it was Kaneki times that got up. He looks at the other than sit himself up and watches the building where he stayed overnight with a blank look. Yomo then sits next to him. They stay silent for a while until Kaneki starts to talk.


    Kaneki:" Yomo-san, how can I become stronger than now? I don''t want to lose someone again."


    Yomo:" Sigh, if you want to get stronger faster. Then go to Echo, he can make even the most untalented to become a strong fighter. Look at the ghouls that live at his place. They are all strong at A to SSS class level, when in reality it was impossible to have all of them to reach that level. Look at Aogiri, they have many members. But, if you count they only have about ten members at A rank upward while the others are only at B or C rank many of them even can''t summon their own Kagune."


    Kaneki:" So, Echo-san organization was that strong? How did he do that?"


    Yomo:" All I can say is he is a genius in creating something that can help with training someone. What more his family is a Yakuza and their force is even stronger than his ghoul''s division since he cultivates them longer. He only starts to recruit ghouls two years ago and in those two years, he makes them this strong. So, if you want to be strong the best bet was going to him."


    While they are talking to each other Ayato has also heard their conversation. He also wants to meet with this Echo person to get strength. All that talk he was saying at Touka, in the end, he wants to get stronger in order to protect her, his only family left. He was just an awkward person that can''t be honest with his feeling. What he didn''t know is that Echo was his own sister boyfriend and his brother in law to be.


    They wait for Echo and Yoshimura to arrive. But, suddenly the building where they just been in exploded. Destroying it and killing all the CCG members that were inside it while the ghouls except for canon fooder the other was already evacuated. A few minutes later the see two shadows of Echo and Yoshimura.


    When they look at Echo, he seems to be happy as he greets them.

 Chapter 38 - V 2 Ch 19

    Echo POV


    I look at Arima then suddenly appear in front of Juuzo hit him with more force than usual, making him faint.


    Right after Juuzo fall down, Arima arrived in front of me and attack me again.


    Echo:" Now, it was just the two of us. We can talk without a hindrance, One-eyed King." I said as I block his attack.


    Arima:" How did you know? I know that you are quite close with Eto and Tatara but, I don''t think they will tell you anything about me." he asks while dodging my string that tried to ensnare him.


    Echo:" Haha, you can''t hide anything from me if I want to know about it. By the way, I know that you need a new successor. Why not take Kaneki with you and train him?" I answer him and dodge a spike that appear from the ground.


    Arima:" Why don''t you take it? I know you''re also a half like me." we take a distance from each other.


    Echo:" Nah, it''s not my style. Besides I already to busy with my own organizations." I said and attack him with Shinso which he blocks with his shield.


    Arima:" I see, but I can''t take him as disciple since they will found out that he was a ghoul." he said as he shot me with his gun-type Quinque.


    Echo:" You don''t have to worry about that. I have a device that can hide the RC level. So, he can blend in." I answer him.


    While this exchange was done, I never let down my Observations Haki to watch the progress of the other and seeing that they already finish their objectives. I think it was time for us to left and while we are at it, lets get the father-daughter duo met.


    Echo:" Its been a p???sur? to fight with you but, I think I have to end this dance here. Good bye!"


    I told Arima then throw one of my knife that been engraved with my teleportation circle a la Hiraishin toward the location of Eto who watch this fight. I then move to Yoshimura side, holding him.


    Echo:" We have been over stayed too long. Let''s leave." I told him and activate the teleport, disappearing from our place.


    The next time we appear, we are in the air right behind Eto who was watching the building.


    Echo:" Now, it was time for overdue reunion and family talk. Please talk out all the opinion between you father-daughter duo. Hello, Tatara. Long-time no see!"


    Tatara:" Hollow, why did you bring him here? You know Eto hated her father."


    Echo:" They say Hate and Love is the side of the same coin. She can hate him because she longs for his love. Let them talk their differences out this time so they can reach an understanding."


    Tatara:" Sigh, you can be so willful. So, how is your impression fighting our King?" he asks while looking at Eto and Yoshimura who is talking with each other with Eto asking for answers heatedly from Yoshimura.


    Echo:" Hmmm, he is good. But not good enough to play on equal footing with me." I said nonchalantly.


    Tatara:" Who the hell can play on equal footing with you? You damn Monster." Tatara said adding a curse in the end.


    Echo:" Ahaha, you don''t have to compliment me." I answer him with a laugh.


    Tatara thought ''who the hell is compliment you'' while his eyes twitching.


    Tatara:" it seems they finish talking and this charade was about to end. That building will explode along with the CCG agent inside it. Did your comrades already out?" he ask.


    Echo:" Yeah, that''s why we can be here. By the way, it seems that one of your officers got beat by his older sister and was forced to go with her." I said while looking at the building that exploded taking the CCG agent with it.


    Tatara:" Ayato? Is his sister one of your girls? Then I can understand his defeat." Tatara guesses and nods at his own conjecture.


    Echo:" Yeah, as expected of my girls they are badass. Well, let''s talk again later. We have to leave." I told him and left with Yoshimura after I greet Eto on the way.


    ---


    Echo:" So, his is the talk?"


    Yoshimura:" It''s better than I expected. She forgives me and will come to Anteiku once in a while." he said with a hint of a smile.


    Echo:" I see, that''s good then." I say to him and see the others waving at us at the meeting place.


    As soon as we arrived, Kaneki suddenly does a dogeza in front of me. Asking me to trained him to become strong, Ayato also follows his example surprising me.


    Echo:" Sorry, Kaneki but I can''t. Someone already stating his interest in making you his successor so I will just send you to him. As for you Ayato why not ask you nee-san? She was trained by me, it also can be used as your bonding time as a family."


    Kaneki:" Someone wants me to be his successor? Who is he? Is he strong?" hearing his question the others look at us wanting to know who I was talking about.


    Echo:" Of course he is strong, if not i am not going to meet you go with him even if he begs for it. He is CCG number 1 the White Reaper. But, his other identity is the One-eyed King, the true Leaders of Aogiri tree." I said shocking all who heard it.


    All:" WHAT!!"


    Nashiro:" Now, this is a twist. CCG''s strongest investigator is their own strongest enemy. Hahaha"


    Kaneki:" Why is he taking an interest in me? I don''t think I have anything special that makes him take an interest in me."


    Echo:" Because he is the same as you, a half-ghoul. At first, he wants me to take his mantle. But I refused him since I''m not interested." I said and he nods at me.


    Touka:" But, is it okay? Won''t he be found out by the CCG that he is a ghouls?"


    Echo:" Don''t worry about it. I have something that can hide that you are a ghoul if you wear it. By the way, you people. Don''t ever spread what you heard here. Is that understood?" I said this while looking at Shuu and Banjou group and they nod at me. After that, we left for home.


    ---


    A few days after the 11th wards incident, the CCG start their propaganda about the danger of Ghouls they also start to recruit a massive number of people to be trained as an Investigators.


    I send around 40 ghouls under me to the CCG as a spy and 20 humans under grandpa who we trained in secret were also send to infiltrate the CCG.


    Kaneki was sent to meet with Arima. He then brought him to CCG headquarters and told the higher-ups that he was his disciples.


    Now, three months after that incident. I along with Kuro, Shiro and Touka were in a meeting with Aogiri at our training ground. Touka only comes because Ayato insisted to come and she didn''t want to leave him alone.


    Tatara:" Echo, the reason we came here is that we want to ask you for help. We know you have many strong ghouls under you and I want you to lend them to us for our raid to Cochlea to free the ghouls that were there. It will be better if you also come with us."


    Echo:" Okay, I will lend you some of my men. Around 15 should be enough since I also decided to participate in this to watch over them." I thought ''Well, it''s more that I fill the holes left by Kaneki. Now that he is a CCG agent earlier and it will be fun to fight with Kamishiro Matasaka.''

 Chapter 39 - V 2 Ch 20

    Echo POV


    We are now at Cochlea Prison about to start our invasion to free the prisoners. Ayato was the first to jump down, followed by Touka who was worried about him than many of the Aogiri start to follow their lead.


    The one that left was me, the twins, Eto, Tatara, and my subordinate. I gave them signals to go and follow them in.


    As soon as we got in we started a massacre. Every CCG agent inside that was stationed here was killed without remorse. While the others were fighting CCG agent I just walk down to Level 3, where the SS class prisoners were in the twins follow me.


    When we are at level 2, someone suddenly attacks me with a scythe which was blocked by Kuro who also uses the scythes Quinque. I look at my attacker to see an acquaintance, the white-haired boy, Suzuya Juuzo.


    Echo:" Hoo, we met again. It seems that you got a new Quinque."


    Juuzo:" Hyahaha, Konichiwa! I just got this new toy. I''m going to cut you up with this. I''m sure it will be pretty."


    Kuro:" Tch, what a disgusting hobby. Is he really human and not ghoul?"


    Juuzo:" Arere, who are you? Ohh, look here there is a twin! I always got a question, if one of a twin was killed what will happen to the other one? Let''s find it out." he said, already forgetting about Echo.


    Shiro:" Hollow, leave him to us. You do what you want!"


    Echo:" Be careful, this kid is a genius in combat. Don''t let your guard down."


    K & A:" Okay"


    I continue to walk down to level 3, did not forget to watch over the twin with my observation haki in case they got careless and got done in by Juuzo. Though with me training them since we are a child, there''s no way that they will lose. They are already stronger than their canon counterparts.


    When I reach level 3, the prison is already open and the prisoner already starts to kill the Jailor. Only one jail left that still closed, it was the jail where Kamishiro Matasaka.


    I got in front of it and open it, to see that it seemed to be empty. But in reality, is that Matasaka was standing upside down on the ceiling.


    He jumps down and suddenly attacks me with a knee. I didn''t bother to dodge and catch it with my palm.


    Matasaka:" Hooo, you are good! To not budge from my attack even though it''s not my full power." he said while he breathes out through his nose.


    Echo:" Come with your full power then. Don''t make bored!" I said to him cooly.


    Matasaka:" Interesting! Let see if you can back your word."


    Matasaka then got his Kagune out and start to attack me. I match him and bring my own Kagune out the Rinkaku one and we start to fight.


    Matasaka propelled himself with his Kagune toward me the send out a right punch which I parry it. He then kicks with his left foot that was blocked by me. Seeing me not budging from his attack he jump and rotate to kick me again with his right foot this time. I caught and then start to swing him around Hulk style then throw him.


    Matasaka:" Khuk, Where did all that strength come from with that thin frame of yours?"


    Echo:" Haha, You see! I don''t like a useless muscle. So, I change all my muscles into a pink muscle." I was about to attack him again when I feel that Eto was just jumping down.


    Echo:" It seemed that we have to stop our fun. Someone wants to talk with you." I said to him just in time for Eto to land beside me.


    Looking that they were about to talk. I left them alone since it''s not my problem. Walking back to level 2, I see that Kuro and Shiro were waiting for me with Juuzo already beaten to the ground.


    Echo:" I thought that from the tone you are speaking before you would killed him by now."


    Kuro:" Nope, it was too easy for him to just die like that." she said while looking coldly at Juuzo.


    Shiro:" Yeah, we just cripple him so he won''t do any harm anymore."


    Echo:" is that so? Well, whatever. Let''s leave! Our job is done here." I said and start to leave.


    When we were about to go to level 1, we met with Mado Akira and Amon Koutaro.


    Echo:" Now, this was a surprise. Meeting two acquaintances at the same place in an hour. How have you been Amon-kun? You partner up with a girl now? It''s an improvement from before, where you follow around an old man. Who is his name again? That white-haired old man." Now, this is going to be fun. I like antagonizing Amon since I never liked his character much.


    Akira:" Is he talking about my father? Who is he, Amon?" she asks, raising her eyebrows.


    Amon:" Hollow, he is the one who sends the ghoul that kills your father." Amon frowns and answers her.


    Echo:" You are calm now! Is it because you are in front of a girl and trying to show her your cool side? Kyaaa, Amon-kun so cool! Hahahaha" damn it''s been a while that I trash talk my enemy, it feels alive.


    Amon:" HOLLOW!! How much do you want to mock me until you are satisfied?"


    Echo:" Wohoo, that''s the Amon I know, so much anger in your blood. So, want to fight with me now?"


    Amon:" Of course, I will bring you down now."


    Echo:" Hehehe, let''s see if you can."


    While I was bantering around with Amon, I never lose my sight on Akira since she''s been waiting for a chance to attack me for a while now. Though I know that if she attacks, the twin will deal with her.


    ''Seeing them only observing me looking for a weakness on me, it makes me bored. I want him to lose control. Hmmm, let''s do this the old fashioned way.'' I thought and then start to move. My target is now Mado Akira.


    Echo:" So, you are the daughter of that old man Kureo? I can''t see it, with how weak you are." I said, as I suddenly appear behind her then kick her with a roundhouse kick. She was thrown far away from us and faint immediately.


    Amon:" Akira! Hollow, you bastard."


    Amon shouts and starts to attack me with his Quinque Niitoryu style. I block lazily with my Kagune without moving from the spot.


    Echo:" You know, Amon. I read the information about you. You were raised by a ghoul right? How do you feel when you found out about it?"


    Amon:" Shut up, never mentioned anything about him in front of me!"


    Echo:" I see, you hate him. You are here now. Did you just meet him? That explains why your expression was so ugly when we meet. Or is it because you see me? Hehe" I continue making a conversation with him to make him angry, maybe he will get a power boost from it. But, it''s not happening huh.


    He keeps swinging that big ?ss Quinque around like a kid playing sword, no style and no grace at all. Let''s just end it now.


    I catch his Quinque with my tails and stab him on his stomach. He falls down and faints because of blood loss.


    I left with the twins, but as we are about to leave, gas starts to pour all around the building. It must be an RC suppressant, it might be a hinder to other. But, it won''t work on my subordinate since their mask was built with a filter in case of something like this.


    ---


    At the place where Echo left Amon fainted body. Someone comes and stands beside Amon''s body. He was wearing a lab coat and have graying hair, he was Dr. Kanou. On his shoulders there is Juuzo who has faint from his fight with the twins.


    Kanou:" Now now, what a fine specimen that Hollow has left me to play with. I was just here with the intention of picking a Kakuhou for our next project. I didn''t think that this prison was going to get raid by Aogiri, good thing that the place I was in just now was well hidden. Now let''s bring these two back to the lab."

 Chapter 40 - V 2 Ch 21

    Echo POV


    Right now, we are at Aogiri base. It was more of an abandoned building than a base. As soon as we start to seat Matasaka start to ask for Rize whereabouts to Eto.


    As for me, I was questioning myself about why did I attend their meeting while the twin and Touka were already back to our apartment along with 15 of my subordinates with them.


    It seems Eto was serious in roping me into Aogiri.


    Eto:" Matasaka-san, Rize already dies a few months ago in an accident. She was struck down by a construction beam."


    Matasaka:" Impossible, there is no way that she died that way!"


    Eto:" But, that''s what is on the news."


    Echo:" He is right you know. There is no way a ghouls as strong as Rize who has Rinkaku Kagune which boast for their vitality and healing factors to died that easily." I said with a smirk.


    Eto:" Echo! From your expression, you know something." she asks intrigue.


    Echo:" Yeah, she is still alive. But, her condition is miserable now. I was about to go rescue her this month."


    Matasaka:" What!!! Where is she? What happened to her?" he asks as he bangs the table.


    Echo:" She was in captive of Dr. Kanou who is now work for the Washuu clan. His work is to make artificial ghoul like Kaneki Ken for them. The way to do it was by implanting a ghoul Kakuhou inside a human changing them into a ghoul. Rize was their supply for unlimited Kakuhou as she regenerates her Kakuhou every time they cut it."


    Matasaka:" What!! Damn Washuu clan! You have to take me with you when you are going to save her."


    Eto:" if you know about this. Why did you not save her earlier?"


    Echo:" You think it was easy to search for his lab when he was protected by the Washuu? It was just lucky that when we are raiding Cochlea he was there and I was able to put a tracker on him." I said in a nonchalant expression.


    The meeting continued for a while after it was finished, I immediately leave the place to go back home.


    ---


    A week and a half later, I already pinpoint all Washuu clan hidden base also all of Kanou lab from the magical tracker that I put on Kanou.


    I call Matasaka if he wants to come with me to raid the lab and he agrees. I also will send the twins and Touka to raid the other base along with fifty ghouls under them. There are around five hidden bases and three labs. We takedown two-places each.


    When night comes we start our operations I and Matasaka go to the hidden base first before we go to the lab that contains Rize, Juuzo, and Amon that just finish their operations to become ghoul three days ago.


    ---


    We are inside Kanou lab right now, Masataka knowing that this was where Rize is run by himself and start the massacre. Inside this lab, beside Rize, Kanou, Amon, and Juuzo there''s only failure ghoul over there.


    I was already using my observation haki ever since we got in. While Matasaka was going around blind I walk straight toward where Kanou, Amon, and Juuzo is.


    Echo:" Well well, what do we have here. It was just a week ago that we met and now both of you already discarded your humanity and become a Ghoul. Hello there Amon-Kun, Suzuya-Kun. How does it feel to become an evil existence Amon-Kun? Seeing you did not look crazy for food, you must have eaten human meat huh!"


    Amon:" Hollow, it was because of you that I became like this!" Amon says with a furious face.


    Echo:" Now now, why are blaming me on this? Is it not Dr. Kanou that turned you like that? Don''t blame me for it. By the way, how did human meat taste? I''m quite curious about how it tastes since I never tried it myself." I said while grinning.


    Kanou:" Now now, Hollow-san you can''t lie like that even if it was to get a reaction from Amon-Kun!"


    Echo:" Hello, Dr. Kanou! Who said I am lying? I''m really never had human meat in my life you know."


    Amon:" Enough of you lie. Because of you, I have to eat human meat and now you tell me you never eat it? You are a Ghoul!"


    Echo:" Hahaha, angry aren''t you! You see I am what you call a miracle!! Born from Ghoul''s father and Human mother. Usually from this union what will be born is a one-eyed ghoul like you are now! But I am different, even though I was born with Ghoul body with Kagune, Kakugan, Kakuhou, and other ghoul advantage, I still retain my humanity that makes me be able to eat Human food normally. That why I said I never eat human meat. Hehehe"


    Amon:" This! How is this possible?" Amon was shocked and in self-denial.


    Kanou:" This is interesting. This makes wants to dissect you see how to replicate it." Kanou look at me likes some specimen.


    Echo:" hmph you thought you are a genius Kanou? Let me tell you, the thing that you just finish. The artificial ghoul, I already did it long ago when I was still 13 and what you just want to try by dissecting me is already been done. How do you think that I can recruit so many ghouls easily? They long to be able to eat human food normally and I give them this that why they are loyal to me!"


    Amon:" Really? Then, can you give me it?" I look at Amon with disgust.


    Echo:" You really disgust me, Amon. When you are human you say that our existence is evil when all we do is to stay alive and now when you become a ghoul you still cling to life even if it was to eat human meat. You are a hypocrite the type that I hate the most. If a ghoul existence is evil, why not kill yourself when you become a ghoul?"


    I was about to continue to taunt him but it was cut off by Matasaka that comes in.


    Matasaka:" RIZEEE!!!"


    Echo:" Matasaka-san, you should have followed me. If you do that you would already meet with Rize."


    Matasaka:" Hollow! Where is Rize?"


    Echo:" She should be over there, inside that tank and then man over there is Dr. Kanou!" I told him while pointing at the tank before I point at Kanou.


    Matasaka hearing me suddenly disappeared from his place. The next time he appear, he was already holding Kanou head in his hand. He then walks toward Rize tank and rips it out.


    Echo:" Wait, Matasaka-san!"


    Matasaka:" What it is? I already finish my objectives. I''ll leave now!"


    Echo:" Let''s go back together! You also should bring her to my place first. If we leave her like that she will die in 24 hours. I can heal her if we bring her to my place." I told him while looking at Rize.


    I look back at Amon to see that he has a blank look on his face. Then I thought you Juuzo who was silent from ever since I arrived here. I look for him and he''s already nowhere to be seen. I try to feel him with my observation haki and found him running out of this place bringing his Quinque with him while snacking on the dead failure ghoul on the way.


    I was stunned by this kid survival ability and smirk. Now, this will become interesting. Get stronger kid, so I can have a playmate later. I''m sure that he will become a monster later. He is already a monster as a human now that he is a ghoul he will be more fun to play.


    As for Amon Koutaro, I''ll leave him alone for now. Go grovel around Amon Koutaro, live a life that you despised a lot. I want to see what your expression will be the next time we met.


    I thought as I left the lab with Matasaka.

 Chapter 41 - V 2 Ch 22

    Echo POV


    After we arrived at my apartment, we immediately go to my lab and start to cure Rize. Matasaka stayed with us for a while until Rize was cured.


    A week later, Rize woke up from her coma. She has to recuperate for two days until she was discharged. On that week, when Riza was still asleep, I and Matasaka fill our time sparring with each other.


    He takes a liking on my training place and asks if he can come from time to time for practice. Staying with us for a week, of course, he found out about how all of us can eat normal food. In the end, I give him the Serum. So, he won''t pester us anymore. After being able to eat normal food, his favorite food was food with a spicy taste, especially Chinese food. He always goes to visit Chinese restaurants every day.


    Finding out how Matasaka was able to eat normal food. Eto, Noro, and Tatara flock in our place and ask about it. In the end, I have to make enough for all members of Aogiri Tree. In exchange, they have to help me if I go in an all-out war with Washuu Clan.


    I got a call from gramp, a few days ago that they start to meddle with us again and this time they already prepared with their ammunition for the war.


    ---


    Echo:" So, where will you stay after this Matasaka-san and also Rize?"


    Matasaka:" Don''t know and don''t care. We will just go with Aogiri if it comes to worse."


    Rize:" Ehhh, But I like it here! Let''s just stay here!"


    Echo:" Sigh, the two of you can stay here. But, you have to work for me. I can''t have a freeloader in my place." they look at me, then nodded their head.


    With Matasaka face and body build, it was difficult to have him work at my restaurant. If he works at my Hotel it would paint a target on my back, since he was wanted by CCG so I just send him to work for grampa.


    ---


    Two months passed, I got a call from mom that they are attacked by Around five hundred artificial ghouls. They come along with 20 agents Vasuki leading them.


    Hearing this I teleport to home along with the twins and Touka. As soon as we arrived, we already heard a sound of combat. Running to the yard, we see all of our subordinates along with grandpa, grandma, and mom leading them to fight donning their Arkham Knight Armor. While our men were wielding Captain America shield along with their weapon of choice.


    I use Soru to arrived faster beside them.


    Echo:" How is the situation? How come the trap not activated?"


    Gramp:" It''s okay! We didn''t activate the trap since our men want to have a fight first before activating it. They said their joint is a little rigid from not having an opponent to fight."


    Echo:" Damn, I don''t know that our men were battle junkies!"


    Grandma:" and whose fault do you think that is?"


    Echo:" Ehh, who?" I ask quite puzzle.


    Yuuna:" It was your fault darling! They were idolizing their young master too much that they start to follow your footsteps and become a battle junkie."


    Echo:" Eehhhh, Seriously? Then I have to become an example and go to the front lines. Hahaha" I said and run to the front.


    Echo:" You rascal, come and follow me if you want a fun fight." I rally them then start to slaughter the ghoul in front of us.


    While fighting, I still have the opportunity to make a call toward Eto.


    Echo:" Hello, Eto! Right now my home was under attack by Vasuki. You think you could send your men to block them if they tried to run."


    Eto:" Wow, not asking for help but to block their escape route. You seem to be confident of your men."


    Echo:" Hahaha, what you can say? They are my men! Besides, there is me Touka and the twins and it looks like Matasaka-san is having fun butchering them."


    Eto:" you know, I envy you having all that power. Why didn''t you go and annihilate the Washuu? I''m sure you can do it."


    Echo:" And make ourselves look like a terrorist? Nope, not happening. Besides, they already have a plan that will go blow up in their own face. At that time is the time I will move. Anyway, hurry up and come. It seems that their morale already hit rock bottom and about to run away."


    Eto:" Okay, we are on the way."


    There are many that run for the fight. But, it was taken care of by the Aogiri.


    ---


    Three months after the raid, Touka was graduates from high school. When I ask her where did she want to study for college. She answers me that she didn''t want to go to university.


    Echo:" So, if you don''t want to continue to your school. What do you want?"


    Touka:" I want to go around the world and learn all cooking techniques and eat food around the world."


    Echo:" Sigh, alright then. But, you will start it three years from now! For now, just try to work in all my restaurants to get experience."


    I told her and she consents at my arrangement.


    ---


    Two years later.


    Touka was having fun working at the restaurant. Ayato who was living with us ever since he got his beating from Touka start to go back to school. Even if I have to chunk him to mom so he gets a sermon from her. In the end, he was defeated by Mother''s Power and start to go to school again.


    Kaneki under Arima flourishes and becomes strong. As his half master, I give him a Quinque made by me. His Quinque takes the form of Spears, I give it the ability to stop ghoul healing factors. Anything that was wounded by it won''t heal for a week.


    The CCG found out about Kaneki Quinque make a fuss about it. And demand Kaneki to give it to them to study it. If it was not for Arima as his backers he would lose it.


    Right now Kaneki was leading a new unit within CCG named Quinx squad along with Mado Akira. He came to our apartment to train in the training ground every three days with Mado Akira comes once in a while. They are so close that if he takes another step he could date her. The irony of it, since he was responsible for her father''s death although indirectly.


    Right now, I was with mom, Touka, and the Yasuhisa couple. We are at Kamii University right now to attend the twin''s Graduation ceremony from college.

 Chapter 42 - V 2 Ch 23

    It''s been five months since the twin''s graduation ceremony. Tokyo was now in turmoil, with Washuu, CCG, Aogiri, and my Yakuza family going at war with each other.


    There is also Variable like Suzuya Juuzo and Amon Kotaro who make the situation more chaotic. It seems that Juuzo has joined the Clown being recruit by Donato Porpora Aka Priest.


    Donato also tried to recruit Amon but he refused to be together with him. They even go on and fight with each other. In the end, Amon was working alone since he didn''t have a place to belong.


    Kaneki along with the Quinx also works hard taking out many stray ghouls that causing trouble. Since Aogiri ever since they were able to eat normal food did not search for trouble except for attacking the Washuu clan.


    In one of his job Kaneki who was with Akira at that time meet with Amon Koutaro. It was there that Akira found out about Amon fate after Cochlea Incident. Kaneki was also surprised that the investigator that he once fought was now a Ghoul like him since Echo did not tell him about it.


    Amon tried to explain his circumstances toward Akira but she did not listen to him and tried to attack him. This led to a big fight between Akira and Kaneki vs Amon. It was a hard fight for Kaneki and Akira since Kaneki only use his Quinque while Amon was in his Kakuja form.


    Amon didn''t want to eat Human meat again has been cannibalizing on the ghoul. It makes him form his Kakuja faster and make him strong since he''s been hunting other ghouls.


    The fight ended with a draw since Amon can''t heal himself from Kaneki attack. But, Kaneki also has to protect Akira that has fainted in the fight. In the end, Amon ran away from the fight while Kaneki was taking care of Akira. From this fight, Amon was Rated as triple S rank Ghoul for being able to fight Kaneki to a draw since he was Arima disciples and also an Associate Special Class Investigator with his fighting prowess and unique Quinque he was the strongest investigator after the White Reaper. Many thought that he was Arima''s little brother or illegitimate child with their hair the same white.


    ---


    Echo POV


    The night was quiet and beautiful. I was in the garden at the top floor of my apartment along with Mom, the twins, Touka, Hinami, Ayato, and Ryouko. We were doing a barbecue party since Touka wants us to taste her new recipe.


    It was fun and delicious. We are doing that until 8 p.m. I call Kaneki and Yomo to join us but they said that they are busy. Suddenly I got a call from grandpa.


    Echo:" Hello, Gramp! What''s up? Did you found out that we are doing a barbecue and want to join?"


    Gramp:" Barbecue? Do you still have time doing that? Right now Tokyo was in turmoil Aogiri and Washuu clans have clashed with each other and their fight was so big that it involves the civilian. We can even hear it from our mansion."


    Echo:" Really? Where did it happen? What is the CCG doing all this time?"


    Gramp:" CCG was busy leading the civilian to the shelter, they found out that their superior was a ghoul all along and many of their investigators also ghouls. Isn''t your subordinate also go infiltrate them are they going to be okay?"


    Echo:" They are going to be okay since I make a device to mask their race. But, it''s weird that I haven''t heard anything from them if it was as you say. Then gramp we should also send out our group to help civilians. It was time to move and make the civilians have trust in us."


    Gramp:" Okay, what will you do now?"


    Echo:" I will go there and look at the situation. If possible we will annihilate the Washuu once at all."


    Gramp:" Good, be careful!"


    Echo:" yeah, you too!"


    I close the phone and look at the other who was looking at me eavesdropping all this time.


    Echo:" Like you have heard, it seems that there is a fight going on between The Washuu and Aogiri. We are also going to go there. Go prepare yourself! Mom, are you going to come with us or stay at home?"


    Yuuna:" I think I will just go back to the Mansion and help the civilian."


    Echo:" Okay then. I will send you there." I said and cone to her side and we teleport to the mansion.


    Echo:" Yosh, we have arrived. Then I will go back! Love you mom."


    I teleport back to see that the other already wear their disguise. I nod at them and brought them to the 1st wards where the fight was going on.


    When we arrived, we see Eto was in her Owl form fighting a group of Vasuki agents while the other Aogiri member was fighting a group of a kid with the same facial features with white hair. Suddenly, when both groups were in a heated battle a variable got in between them and start to kill anyone from both sides and eat them up.


    This variable was Suzuya Juuzo who was broken up and brainwashed by Donato to create greater chaos in this fight. After eating many ghouls at once Juuzo suddenly starts to shiver and change into an abomination that starts to kill everyone around him and absorb them.


    ---


    At another place, Yomo, Yoshimura, Irimi, Koma, and other Anteiku members were in a confrontation with the Clowns.


    They are debating for a while until the group for Clown starts to attack. They fight for a while and in the end, Anteiku was the winner. Because of Yomo friendship with Uta and Itori, both of them were spared from being killed.


    ---


    In another place, Washuu Tsuneyoshi seeing Juuzo turned into Dragon start to look back. In his room, he was now alone with Amon who was strapped into a chair looking at him with hatred. All around them was a hundred corpse of ghoul.


    Amon, after his fight with Kaneki, was wounded. He can''t heal himself up because of the ability of Kaneki Quinque. In the end, on the third day when he was on the run. He was caught by Vasuki agent and was brought to Washuu Tsuneyoshi.


    Tsuneyoshi:" That Clown group really was troublesome. It seems that they found out about Dragon and create it themselves. Well, I also have it. Isn''t that right Amon-Kun? Now then, let''s also turned you into Dragon. Hahaha."


    He then walk toward Amon and starts to feed him with the ghoul''s meat around them. Amon resists at the start but can''t fight back since he was strapped into the chair. After a while, from ingesting too many RC Cells at once he also changes into Dragon. Tsuneyoshi was about to leave but Amon''s hatred toward his was so strong that he started to attack him first. In the end, he died being devoured by Amon who has lost his sanity.


    ---


    Back with Echo.


    Echo seeing Juuzo was smiling wryly even if he prevents Kaneki from turning. In the end, other people were taking his place and become Dragon. He was about to go and deal with it when suddenly on the CCG Building another Dragon appear shocking him.


    He thought that Kaneki wasn''t able to change his fate in the end and also turned himself into Dragon. But, he finds him still okay. Leading the CCG agent to fight with the abomination created by Dragon.

 Chapter 43 - V 2 Ch 24

    Echo POV


    I look at the situation and thought to end it in a flashy way to make our Yamagami Gumi named famous.


    Echo:" The Six of you, go there and hunt down all that creature created by that abomination." I said as I look at the six of them that is Touka, Shiro, Kuro, Hinami, Ryouko, and Ayato.


    Shiro:" What about you? Where are you going?" she asks, making the other look at me.


    Echo:" Hehe, I will deal with those two Abomination. It will be good to make a name for our group. That why I won''t wear a mask there. All of you go all out and uses your Kakuja form if needed." I order them.


    All:" Yes!!!" they all nodded and left me alone.


    I look at the two Dragon and see Eto was containing one of them with the help of Tatara, Noro, Rize, and Matasaka. While the other one was unattended and going around destroying anything it sees.


    I summoned Vimana out of Gate of Babylon. It''s been years since I bring it out. I get abroad on it and start to control it to fly above the Unidentified Dragon.


    Echo:" To everybody that was close to the Big Abomination on the CCG towers please evacuate yourself. My name is Echo, heir of the Yamagami Gumi. We have a weapon that will be able to destroy it. Please evacuate yourself so that you won''t become collateral damage from my bombardment!" I speak using magecraft to make my voice heard out loud.


    Every CCG agent that was close to the CCG building was hesitant at following my order but in the end, they follow it with Arima and Kaneki telling them to do what I said.


    Seeing that the surrounding was clear. I level the Vimana close to the Dragon and see that it was Amon that being turned into it.


    Echo:" Hmmm, after all these years. This was you are reduced to. Must be Tsuneyoshi work then. GATE OF BABYLON!!!"


    I shout and from behind me many portals started to appear. From it came out Noble Phantasm and Quinque start to aim at the Amon Dragon. I shoot it with all of it destroying Amon along with CCG building he was on.


    After done dealing with Amon, I also order the one close to Juuzo Dragon to also leave the premise. After that I did the same with what I do to Amon, annihilating it from the face of earth.


    ---


    Everyone who looks at it was awed by the display of power. The only thing in their mind is that the CCG was going to be replaced after it. With the scandal of its founder being a Ghoul and with the cleaning up of this fight done by the Yamagami Gumi, they will be on the rise after this incident.


    ---


    After this incident, the Yamagami Gumi work as disaster relief for the inhabitants of the 1st ward and it''s surrounding.


    Its name was recognized by the people and the government. They are now in charge of Tokyo and deal with anything related to the aftermath of Dragon.


    We also release the Serum for the Ghoul that was in hiding. Making them not needing to eat Human meat anymore. This starts the coexistence between humans and Ghoul.


    After the incident, I along with Shiro, Kuro, and Touka left Japan for a while to accompany Touka on her Culinary tour around the world.


    Ryouko live at my Mansion to accompany my Mom since she was lonely without her son and daughter in law.


    Yoshimura now lives with his daughter Eto and they continue to open their Cafe in remembrance of Yoshimura''s wife and Eto Mother''s who build it.


    All other Aogiri members start to work for our clan after that. I ask my men that infiltrate the CCG at that time about why didn''t they contact me when the incident start and they answer me while scratching their head that they forgot to do it in confusion since it was so sudden.


    Kaneki got himself a wife which is Mado Akira and he told her about his history and she accepted him since he has never eaten human meat ever since he changed into a ghoul.


    Washuu clan was hunted down to the last man by CCG remnant who was angry at being fooled by them.


    ---


    Five years later, we were back in Japan. Yamagami Gumi was now in control of many businesses all around Japan. We even have many branches in America led by Yasuhisa couple that will be taken over by the twin later.


    Two months after we are back. We are holding a ceremony of me marrying all three of them. Mom was crying in happiness seeing me getting married to the in-law she liked.


    A year later, the three of them got pregnant at the same time and after nine months Shiro was the first to give birth to a son which I named Aki. A week later it was Touka turn giving birth to a girl that I named Hana. The last to give birth Kuro giving me a twin girl which I named Lucy and Lynda.


    My grandpa died seven years after his great-grandchild was born with grandma following him three months later. Mom also died twenty years after that surrounded by all her grandchildren and great-grandchild. She was smiling in her last moment. Content with her life.


    Ayato and Hinami got married two years after we got a child and they got themselves a children a year after their marriage.


    Don''t want to see each other died first we told our children, grandchildren, and great-grandchildren that we will leave them by doing suicides together.


    After finishing farewell we take poison I make that will kill us instantly without feeling pain.


    ---


    After their deaths, there is a big Funeral ceremony for them with all Japanese citizens mourning them.


    Echo was the leading figure in making Human and Ghoul coexistence he also a scientist that makes their country advance with his invention.


    While they were mourning for them, Echo himself along with his wives was on the way of their new Journey to a New World.

 Chapter 44 - Prologue

    [I am sad, many people ask about what Psyren is. Since it was good manga, much better than many new stories now.]


    Echo POV


    I wake up with new memories in my head. It seems that because it was the first time I bring others with me. My memory resurfaces not at 3 years old like always but I was Six now. In this world, I was an orphan and lives in the orphanage along with all three of my wife that follow me on my Journey.


    After sorting my memories I tried to contact them through telepathy that was formed through them being bonded with me.


    Echo:" Hello there! Has all of you regain your memory?" I talk to them with a thought.


    Shiro:" Yeah, I have! It was an interesting experience to watch through my new life like a movie."


    Touka:" Me too, right now I was at the kitchen helping the matron cook."


    Kuro:" What type of world do you think is this?"


    Echo:" I don''t know, Kuro. But, we will found out later. It seems that we are in Japan now and it was in 1999."


    Shiro:" So, what do we do for now?"


    Echo:" We will leave this orphanage and live by ourselves. I will hypnotize the matron to let us leave and make the document for us. Don''t have to think about money since I have many of it inside my Gate of Babylon."


    Kuro:" Why do we have to leave?" she asked puzzled with my decision.


    Echo:" it is so that we can be free to do what we want. We don''t know if this world will be peaceful or not, so we have to train our body again to prepare."


    Touka:" I see, then let''s do that."


    ---


    A week later, we are now in our new Home. Abusing my ability to hypnotist I was able to get us a nice House in Tokyo with a nice garden with a Sakura tree in it, a pond and a good neighborhood. When I look at my Magic Circuit when we arrived at this world, I found out that it increases again in quantity and quality. It seems that every time I reincarnated it will become stronger than before. (Their House look like Nura Clan home from Nurarihyon no Mago)


    ---


    It''s been four years since we arrived here in this world. But, I still haven''t found out about which world it is. We all did not go to school since we deemed it useless as we already finish it in our last world and we have enough money to burn so we don''t have to work for it.


    Right now I was watching the TV and it shows a Piano concert by a young genius Pianist named Yagumo Matsuri. When I see her face I stood up as I found out where we are now. This was a Psyren world, where there is many Esper with the power to destroy the world roaming around.


    Now, that I know where we are. I know what I will do. Recognizing the Psyren future world atmosphere as a wealth. I go inside the Gate of Babylon as a test if I will get it. (if you don''t know Psyren world in the future where the people later time travel to has an atmosphere that will infect the person who stays there, in effect, it removed the limiter in their brain making them an Esper.)


    After staying there for a while, I start to show a symptom of being affected by it. My eyes go red, my nose was bleeding, and my head hurt so much. Having found this much I go back to my bed and start to sleep.


    An hours later I woke up more livelier that before. I immediately call the girls and told them about my founding. I let them go inside the GoB until they get the symptom then take them to their bed.


    After waiting for them for a while. It was Shiro who was up first after sleeping for two hours followed by Kuro ten minutes later and last Touka twenty minutes after Kuro. The twins get up faster was because of they are Rinkaku user that has faster healing factors than other types.


    After they woke up, I start to explain what type of power they just get from this ordeal, and what is PSI.


    Echo:" Now, I will explain about the power that we got. The power that we just got is called PSI. PSI is basically the ability to manipulate one''s own thoughts to do anything they d?s?r?. It is the power of one''s thoughts, released when all the cells in the brain function at full activity. PSI users are able to momentarily focus all of their five senses, or in other words their physical abilities, to incredible degrees. PSI is of different types, all depending on a person''s training and natural qualities. PSI is of different types, all depending on a person''s training and natural qualities. Once over-clocked, each person''s brain gives rise to it own unique ability. Most of these abilities can be classified within the three basic types of PSI: Burst, Trance and Rise. There are many possible resulting effects, all depending on a person''s training and natural qualities.


    Burst, In summation, Burst is the ability to manipulate the world around one''s own self. In essence, a person is able to channel and manipulate energy or matter in the surrounding environment. Burst has a number of forms it can take, ranging from the ability to move objects with only your mind, the power to command fire or lightning or even the ability to manifest as solid objects. Powerful Burst users are capable of unleashing absolute devastation, destroying or altering the world around them at their will. As if to counteract this, Burst puts a tremendous strain on the user, proportional to the power of their ability. In addition, breaking or even damaging the Burst, can lead to a breakdown of the mind or body or both.


    Trance, At its most basic form, it is the ability to manipulate the minds of others. So far, it has been used to read minds, "dive" into memories and force the target to see illusions. However, the possibilities for Trance go far beyond just what has been displayed so far, for instance, it is theoretically possible to completely control a target. However, there are less dangerous uses of Trance, such as being able to locate the enhanced minds of others using PSI or communicate with another PSI user/users, however unlike Burst waves, Trance thought waves are directly affected by the outside atmosphere and can be blocked by any defense in battles. In PSI combat, Trance is the way to counter Burst.


    Rise, Rise is used to manipulate any of the user''s senses. Rise powers can be further subdivided into three types: Sense, Strength and Healing.


    Sense-type Rise, This type increases either any one of the 5 senses or all of the 5 senses of the user (sight, hearing, taste, smell and touch) to extraordinary levels and also increases the user''s reflexes.


    Strength-type Rise, This type focuses on the user''s physical body, increasing the body''s physical strength, speed and endurance. It can simply be referred to as Super Human Strength.


    Healing-type Rise: This type ties into Strength-type but focuses more towards the body''s endurance. When trained properly, the user can reduce the amount of damage being taken and how long it will take for their body to recover from damage such as a large cut or bruise. There are also other types of people who can "share their rise to another person and heal their body instead of their own".


    Now, that you have heard about it, let''s start training it. Start with Rise, since we are all veteran fighter. We should easily be able to learn it than the other. Let''s go!"

 Chapter 45 - V 3 Ch 1

    It''s been four months since they activated their PSI. They were able to train their Rise easily and able to use it in the first try, all that left is to master it and make their control better.


    In a week''s time, they were able to find out their Burst ability. Shiro was Telekinesis and Telepathy user and she was quite good at it. Kuro got herself Gravity kinesis and Umbra Kinesis she''s been trying to merge herself with her shadow to make herself look like grim reaper with her scythe. Touka was an Electromaster with magnetic power with it. As for Echo himself, he has Space and Time power. He''s been experimenting to merge both of his power to create a unique power to steal the lifespan and ability of someone he touched. In the end, he only is able to steal another lifespan for now and he''s been experimenting it on animals. He thought that it won''t be long until he can find out a way to steal other abilities. When using it separately he was only able to teleport with his space power and it is also only around 50 meters. While his time power was stronger since he can stop time for a few seconds, slowing time, fast and rewind time. It was only a matter of time until he will be able to go back and forth to the past and future.


    In these four months, he also tried to search for Psyren calling card in his GoB but he didn''t find it. Maybe it was because the Psyren card was counted as other people''s ability that it was not counted as things.


    In the end, they have to wait for Shiro''s ability to grow stronger to search for it by reading the mind of the people in the city who have found it.


    ---


    Three years have gone since they got their PSI power. They are 13th years old now and they have been collecting Psyren Calling cards in that year and have collected around 60 of it. But they still haven''t tried to call with it yet.


    Their training got results Shiro got herself able to lift weight up to 10000 tons and her telepathy has been able to cover a small city. She was also created and learn many techniques Echo also gave her book about a technique used by Grana, one of the villains in this world and she was able to learn it. But, has not to reach his level yet.


    Kuro has been able to make her Gravity kinesis reach up to 5000 Earth gravity, we have been using it to train our body. But, her talent lies in Umbrakinesis with it she was able to control light and shadow. She was able to travel through shadow realm nullify PSI ability by touching the target make a weapon with her shadow and cloak herself make herself invisible through manipulation of light and shadow.


    Touka was more simple but as much as devastating as them. She was immune to lightning and has a technique name Lightning Empress Mode where she charges herself with lightning and becoming the lightning itself, she only able to use this mode for ten minutes for now. Her ability relying on her understanding on science so she has been learning all about it to make herself powerfull. Good thing that Echo has many books in his library for her to read and learn.


    Echo himself developed his power in a scary way. He was learning toward his time power when he trains. He was able to make anyone he touches aged or de-aged at a fast rate. He succeeds in creating his technique to steal lifespan or Vitality and the ability of the one he touches. All these years he''s been stealing the vitality and ability of animal and insect that he found. This ability make his body much stronger and suitable for the close-range fight which he likes so much. His space power enables him to teleport himself or others anywhere he has seen once. He tests his limit and as long as the weight of the thing that he teleports on did not exceed 1000 tons he was able to teleport it. His time power progress much further with him be able to go to the past and future for up to five years, he feels that if he goes to Psyren his ability will level up. He also is able to stop the aging of everyone he wants to.


    This year he''s been watching Yagumo Matsuri closely and if he found out he went missing for a few days, this means that she starts to go back and forth to Psyren which is the time that he was aiming to go for now.


    ---


    Five months later, I was in the living room with all my wives. We watch the news that Yagumo Matsuri has gone missing for the last two days. The report says that she was in her makeup room when she suddenly went missing. Seeing this news I call my wives up.


    Echo:" Now, that was the news that I''ve been waiting for a long time."


    Shiro:" Does this mean our adventure will start, Echo?" she asked as I''ve told them all I know about this world and its power level.


    Echo:" Yeah, all that we have to do is to answer the questionary on the payphone using the card." I answer her and look back to the TV.


    Touka:" So, when will we do that and what preparation we have to bring?" Touka asks while eating a snack she just made.


    Echo:" We will do it tonight''s and we don''t have to prepare anything. All the things that we need, I already have it inside the GoB. All that left to have fun fighting all those monster The Wise has created in the future and The Wise itself."


    Shiro:" Unn, I won''t lose to that Grana person that you told us."


    Kuro:" I want to fight that God Blade Junas. Sword vs Scythe I will show him that scythe was better." I sweatdrop hearing her claim. There is no better weapon but a better user. But, I am not commenting it.


    Touka:" then all that left is that burst user for me Dholaki the Explosia user." she said with eager expression.


    Echo:" Now now, don''t get ahead of yourself, we won''t go after them for now and just enjoy the game and train our ability." I told them and kiss their lips to calm them down from their eagerness. We continue to watch the TV while cuddling with each other.


    ---


    That night, we left for the park to use the Payphone that was put there. I do it first, I put the card in and after a while it got connected.


    [GREETING, YOUR WORLD IS NOW CONNECTED. YOU''VE REACHED THE IMMIGRATION OFFICES OF PSYREN. WE WIL NOW COMMENCE IMMIGRATION EXAMINATION. PLEASE ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTION. EACH QUESTION HAS TWO CHOICES. IF YOU ANSWER YES PRESS 1, IF YOU ANSWER NO PRESS 2.


    QUESTION 1. Are you Japanese older than 12? Please dials Yes or No.]


    I heard the voice of Grigory Seven the creators of Nemesis Q who will send us to the future. I feel a physics power trying to take a hold on me to control me which I immediately erased except the power which will send me to the future. I answer the examination until I finish all of it.


    Echo:" Who is next? Be careful when you answer the exam. It will try to get a hold of you as to control you. Erased it except the power that will send us to the future." hearing me, they nod their head.


    Shiro:" Me next then!" she said and start to use the phone and it continues until all of us finished it.

 Chapter 46 - V 3 Ch 2

    The next morning I woke up with the twins taking both of my arms as their pillows and Touka hugging my leg while her hand was on my crotch playing with it making it hard. I look at them and found out that they just pretending to sleep. So, I punished them by playing with their bodies until they are close to ?um then left them hanging.


    As I was about to leave our bed, they pull me back and we start the morning with s?x. After satisfied with the morning routine, we go take a bath together.


    Switching on the TV I watch the news and see that Matsuri has been back from her disappearance. Touka was in the kitchen cooking our breakfast while Shiro was using her Telepathy to search for someone I told her to find. Kuro was laying on my ??p watching the TV.


    Touka:" Breakfast is ready!" she shout for us to come.


    Shiro:" Coming!" hearing Touka call she open her eyes and stop searching with telepathy.


    Echo:" Let''s go Kuro, it''s time to eat." I told Kuro to get up and she nodded.


    Kuro:" Mnnn, kay!"


    After breakfast, we decided to go out on a date in the neighborhood. We''ve been at home training for a while, it''s not bad to relax once in a while.


    ---


    A week later, Echo POV.


    I was just relaxing in the courtyard when suddenly there was a ringing in my head. Touka comes out from inside and asks me.


    Touka:" Echo, is this the sign?"


    Echo:" Yeah, let''s change our clothes. Let''s use our Ghoul set without the mask."


    Shiro:" that''s nostalgic, even back then we never wear it again after Human Ghoul coexistence."


    Kuro:" Yeah, it was never necessary anymore at that time."


    Echo:" Haha, let''s stop with the nostalgia. Here the Nano machines bracelet to change your clothes. Also here your new weapon since we didn''t need Quinque anymore I give all of you a new one."


    The girls take the bracelet and start to change their clothes then they take their weapon. I gave them D rank nameless phantasm. After ready with our preparation we take out our phone and put it on our ear.


    Just one second we are at home when the next second we are at a destroyed building. We look outside and see it was covered in sand.


    Echo:" Now, let''s search for the Payphone. Shiro if you could search it! if it was far, relay it to me. I will take us there with Teleportation."


    Shiro:" Leave it to me! Wait for a sec." she said and closed her eyes to search for the phone. Not long after she opened her eyes again.


    Shiro:" Found it! It was close, just three floors under us. Also, there are around ten people beside us here!"


    Echo:" I see, let''s just take the stair then. It will be suspicious if we suddenly appear out of nowhere. They will think that we are the one who brings them here if that happens."


    Touka:" You are right. Let''s just walk, it''s not that far."


    Since it was decided, we start to walk downstairs.


    Kuro:" Hei, Shiro! Did you find Yagumo Matsuri when you search for the phone?"


    Shiro:" Yeah, what happens?"


    Kuro:" Nothing, just thought that it would be nice to get her autograph." she said with a smile.


    Echo:" We can do that later. We can even become friends with her." I told her.


    Kuro:" Unn, let''s do that."


    Not long after, we arrived at the site. The other drifter is already there confused and shouting at each other searching for someone to blame for their situation.


    Glasses Guy:" Hmph, an ?du?t bicker around like a child! Why don''t you search for a solution instead of blaming each other?" he said arrogantly.


    Thug:" Oioi, kid! Do you want to be beaten up huh! Don''t talk like you are above or anything." feeling insulted he was about to hit the Glasses guy.


    Glasses Guy:" What an uncultured person. Always solving problem with violence." he said bravely, but he was clearly shaken up from being threatened.


    Echo:" What are you people doing here bickering about? Why are there no people that pick the phone?"


    middle-age man:" A kid? What do you mean by picking the phone?" he asks confused, garnering the attention of the others who also listen to us.


    Echo:" Ehh, You mean that you come here without knowing anything?" I asked them feigning shock.


    Echo:" in the back of the Psyren calling card if you put it on your head there is an instruction about what it means to use it and come here!" I told them and they start to do what I say.


    Thug:" This!! What the hell is this? Changing the future? Do you think I should believe it? That Earth''s future is like this!"


    Echo:" Well, believe it or not is your freedom. Because I come here is to have an adventure." I told him and walk to the payphone with the girls following me.


    When I was close to it. It starts to ring and I pick it up.


    Bzzzzt bzzzzzzt


    [THOSE SEEKING PSYREN SHALL TASTE POWER AND DESPAIR, THOSE SEEKING PSYREN SHALL TASTE POWER AND DESPAIR]


    We heard a voice and suddenly there is a vision of a place and a Payphone in our head, then it stops itself.


    Glasses Guy:" Wh-what is that? Kid do you know anything about it?"


    Echo:" that must be the finish line. And there is a map showed on the phone. We can copy it. By the way, Matsuri-san you must already been here right? Last week when you''ve gone missing for a few days. Don''t you know how to play this game, created by Nemesis Q?"


    Matsuri:" It seems that you know about me, huh? You see, last week was the first time I come here and it was hectic. I only think about my own survival. By the end of it, I was already back at home."


    Echo:" I see, so you still don''t know about this game at all. Well then, now that I already have the map. I will leave!" while I was about to walk away. Kuro goes toward Matsuri and suddenly taking out a paper and a pen.


    Kuro:" Matsuri-san, please sign it for me." I heard her and facepalm.


    After getting a sign from Matsuri she invites her to come with us which she accepted since she wants to look after the four kids that come to this dangerous world. The other people knowing what to do start to leave the place and search for the exit. But, before they got a warning from Matsuri about the creature that lives in this world.


    Matsuri:" So, you four already know about this place before coming here? Is that why you are bringing weapons with you?"


    Shiro:" yeah, we have been training for this day. Matsuri-san have you awaken your PSI and train it yet?"


    Matsuri:" PSI? What is that?" she asks back, confused.


    Echo:" PSI is in a simple term Esper power. Last week when you are here, did you get a nosebleed, red eyes, and a high fever? That is the symptom of it awakening on a person."


    Matsuri:" Is that so? Is there a way to train it?" she ask curiously.


    Echo:" Yeah, by the way Nemesis Q who brings us here also Physics!" I inform her.


    Matsuri:" You know a lot. Does that mean you also Physics?"


    Echo:" Yeah, we are!"


    As we walk through the desert we meet with the Tavoo, the forbidden creature of this world, this one look like a fusion of a centipede with human head. It was taken care of by Shiro bashing it with her Halberd. The rest of the Journey gone passed like that and we easily arrived at the phone booth and pick it up sending us back to present.


    Matsuri:" Is that it? It feels so hard last week of me to clear it."


    Kuro:" if you learn how to use your power, you also able to easily do it Matsuri-san. If you want, you can come to our house and learn it."


    Matsuri:" is that okay? Won''t your parents got disturbed by me visiting?"


    Touka:" We are orphan! You don''t have to worry about that!"


    Echo:" Here is our address, please visit us anytime! Kuro will like it."

 Chapter 47 - V 3 Ch 3

    Matsuri POV


    It''s been a week since I was back from Psyren and now it seems I have to go back there again. This ringing has been going on ever since I left the concert hall. I have to prepare if I have to stay there for long.


    On the way, I bought so many foods with a long expiration date. As soon as I arrived home I change my clothes to clothes for hiking and put the food inside my bag. After all that done, I put my phone on my ear.


    The next time I aware I have already changed place to the Psyren world. I search for other people and find them inside a room. They''ve been bicker around and blame each other for a while now until someone told them to search for a solution in an arrogant tone. That set off the thug looking man and he tried to hit the man.


    When it was about to escalate we heard a child voice asking us why we haven''t picked the phone yet, and he starts to explain about this game and its rules that were written at the back of our Psyren Calling card.


    Damn, the one who created this thing is not right in the head. Who would do that just to see the rules? But, it seems there is someone that does it. Like this kid just now, it seems they know about this place and comes knowing about the dangers. I don''t know if they were brave or foolish.


    One of them seems to be a fan of mine and she invited me into their group. I follow them just to watch them so they didn''t do anything foolish. As we walk to the gate, the only boy of the group name Echo explains that anyone that has been exposed to this world atmosphere will get an Esper power.


    My worries about them seem to be unnecessary as despite their age all of them are strong and they also an Esper as they told me. With them dealing with the monster that comes out we clear the game in only an hour walking.


    When I arrived at my apartment after that. I go laying on my bed while mulling over his offer to train in my power. In the end, I decided to visit their home tomorrow at nine since I don''t have a schedule for tomorrow.


    ---


    Echo POV


    It was morning the next day after we first visit Psyren. Right now, I was checking my gain from going into the future passed my ability. I''ve been putting it off since yesterday.


    I tried to feel my power and found out that now I can go to the future or the past up to 20 years I can even go to its parallel Universe. This is good news since with this I can go to the future anytime I want.


    After eating breakfast I open my computer and start to gather information. There are people that power I want to take. For now, I was searching for a man name Usui and Eiji Kise.


    Usui was an agent of the government, who was charged with the task of uncovering the truth behind the many disappearances around the nation. His power Irregular Left is the one that I want from him. But, since he will die from it I will just take all his power.


    I will also take the ability of many people from Wise later. I will take it from the future version. For now, I will be content with this. As I was hacking on the government and police file to search for them. We heard someone ringing our bell. Touka goes to the door and looks who it was, she''s back along with Matsuri with her.


    She asks us to train her and I told her to train with Shiro since I know from the manga that she was a quite powerful Telekinesis user. As for her other ability, she can train it herself after we Shiro pound the basic into her. Kuro also goes to help her since she was her fan.


    ---


    Touka POV


    Shiro and Kuro just left to train Matsuri-san, Echo doing his thing with the computer. What should I do? Let''s just go test a technique I want to try. Yesterday I read a novel about a girl using her ability to make a railgun and sword from iron dust.


    I want to try it out. But, first I think I should read a book about Railgun mechanism first so I can try to recreate it. Echo said that my ability rely on my understanding toward science. Sigh, studying is not my forte but I have to grit my teeth and do it.


    Touka:" Echo, can you give me a book about Railgun and Magnetism. I want to try creating a Railgun like on the book you give me a week ago."


    Echo:" Railgun? You are trying to recreate Misaka Mikoto''s move? That''s great! Wait a minute I will compile all the book I have about it."


    Touka:" Don''t!! Just give me the one that you deemed important. I don''t think I can read it all even if you give it to me."


    Echo:" Now now, don''t do anything half heartedly. Just read it all and if you don understand anything, just call me and I will teach you."


    Hmm, getting taught by Echo. Just the two of us! That''s not a bad choice.


    Touka:" Okay then, just give me the book. I will call you when I got stuck." I said and he left inside his Gate of Babylon to take the books. Ten minutes later he''s back with a ton of book in his hand.


    Echo:" Right now, just read this first. I will give you more after you finish it."


    Ugh, how many books did he brings and he said there is more? Well, let''s just do it.


    Touka:" Okay, I will start to read." I told him and left to read the book.


    ---


    Echo POV


    I look at the twins as they left for the training ground and was back to my computer when Touka suddenly asks me for a book about Railgun to help her create the technique of Misaka Mikoto.


    I tease her by telling her that I will compile all the books in my library and she got flustered from it. I then tell her about not doing something half-heartedly and she bought it. I then go to GoB and take many books about Railgun and Electro magnetic and give it to her before telling her that I will give more of it later and her face paled from it.


    After she left, I am back on searching for information about Usui and Eiji Kise and found it. It seems that Usui is still haven''t gone to Psyren since he hasn''t got an order from the government to investigate it. But, I found many of the Eiji Kise crime scenes. The last news about his crime is around Shizuoka Prefecture.


    I teleport to Shizuoka at the last place of Eiji crime and start to deploy my Kenbunshoku Haki along with telepathy to search for him. After going around the place for an hour. I found him in one of the abandoned factories.


    I teleport behind him and hit him at the back of his neck, making him fainted. After he faints I start to use my steal''s ability and touch him. He starts to age at a fast rate and I got all his ability and lifespan. When it was done, he started to crumble to dust. I tried using his ability to phase through the building and it was a success. After that, I teleport back home.

 Chapter 48 - V 3 Ch 4

    Shiro POV


    Right now we are at the training ground. We teach basic things about PSI to Matsuri and as Echo has told us, she was quite talented in it. Even if we are not teaching her she would become strong on her own. We are just Hastings the process of her becoming strong.


    Kuro was now Fighting her to make her use Rise consciously and control it. At first, it was just her hitting Matsuri around. But after a few minutes, she starts to use her rise and able to dodge and even fight back.


    As we are about to change the training menu to train her Burst, I feel that Echo was back from wherever he went to. He was in the living room when suddenly he phases through the floor toward the basement, where the training ground was.


    Shiro:" Is that a new technique?" I ask him and he nodded at me.


    Echo:" Yeah, just got it a minute ago." he said with a grin on his face.


    Kuro:" Echo, what the name of the ability?" she asked as she stops the training and looks at us.


    Echo:" The name is Zone Diver, it makes be able to phase through everything." he told us and it was quite a useful ability.


    Echo:" So, how is the training, Matsuri-san?" he asked while looking at the exhausted Matsuri.


    Matsuri:" It was quite hard, but I will manage!"


    Echo:" Good, since you will not survive Psyren without it."


    Matsuri:" It''s been on my mind for a while, why didn''t you help the other drifter?" she ask confused.


    Echo:" You think they will hear me out? Just think back at their reaction at that time when I told them about Psyren. Even with proves they still thought that I was lying."


    Matsuri thinks back about yesterday and nodded at his word as she thinks it was reasonable.


    Matsuri:" then why did you help me then?" she asked confused.


    Echo:" Cause Kuro is your fans. She wants to be close to you!" ''can''t say that she was a supporting character that will be much involved in the story.'' Thought Echo!


    Echo:" Now, go and continue your training. I''m going to train my new ability." He said and I go back to train Matsuri.


    ---


    Narrator POV


    Two weeks passed since then and the got called again by Nemesis Q, Echo already to Matsuri that she didn''t need to prepare for anything to go there since they will bring any food for them.


    When they arrived there are only three people from two weeks ago back here again. The rest must be dead in the game or tell others about Psyren and get eliminated for it. The glasses guy was one of them!


    Echo:" Hmm, there are eight new people plus us five and three from two weeks ago! You three how many survive last time after we left?"


    Glasses Guy:" Six of us survive back then but I don''t know where the other three. You! Why didn''t you tell us about the monster?" he said while pointing at Echo.


    Echo:" They were dead then! It must be because they told others about this world! If I told you back there, will you believe me? You already know your and their own reaction when I told them about this world and you did not believe me! I don''t have the time to babysit all of you!" he said and start to walk to the phone. The man wants to answer back but he also thinks that they will not believe him back then.


    He picks the phone up and put it on his ears. After they get the destination they start to get dispersed.


    Matsuri:" So, we will do it like last week?"


    Echo:" Yeah, but you are the one who will fight this time! These chumps are too weak for us but good training materials for you. Go break some bones!!! Hahaha"


    Matsuri heard him sweatshop at that. but she does as he asks since she also wants to get stronger and the faster way to do that is through the real fight.


    On the way, they are met with a Tavoo which look like a scorpion. Matsuri immediately engaged in a fight with it.


    She uses rise to move fast then hits it with her fist that infused with a telekinetic blast. When it hit, the scorpion was blown away. But, it was back again and start to attack her with it''s Stinger.


    Echo:" Matsuri! If you are bored fighting it. Then destroyed the core that was in its body!" I shout at her.


    Matsuri:" So, that was its weakness? I will destroy it after I was satisfied. Is that play?" she shouted back asking for permission.


    Echo:" Do as you wish!" Echo said and he sits down along with the girls eating a snack.


    Hundreds meter behind them, the glasses guy was following them but Echo already knows about it and let him be. He was shocked by Matsuri''s power and also want to have it. He knows that she got it after meeting the boy, what he doesn''t know was. As he was spying on them there is another tavoo behind him. Just a the Tavoo was about to kill him, Echo teleport to his back and kill it.


    Echo:" You should watch for your surrounding in a dangerous place like this! So, what do you want by spying on us?" Echo asks after saving him. He was bored and hope by saving him there will be something interesting to pass time.


    Glasses Guy:" Umm, I think I haven''t introduced myself. My name is Machida Motohama, as for why I follow you. I thought my survival will be bigger if I follow you."


    Echo:" I see! Suit yourself then." he was about to leave Machida try to stop him.


    Machida:" Wait!! That power did you give it to her?"


    Echo:" No, I just train her! Everyone breathing in the Psyren atmosphere will get it. Two weeks ago did you have a fever, nosebleed, and red eyes? It was the sign that the limiter in your brain broke, making you be able to use power like that."


    Machida:" Then, can you teach me?" he asks in a hopeful tone.


    Echo:" Ugh, I don''t have time to train you. But, I will give you the manual for you to train."


    Machida:" That''s okay too! I will train it myself then. Thank you very much!" he said while Bowing at him.


    Echo:" Don''t mind it! Here the manual." he gives him the book and left.


    When he was back, Matsuri already finishes with her fight and they were waiting for him.


    Echo:" You''ve done? Let''s leave then!" he said and they left.


    When they arrived at the gate, the girls go and left first. When Echo was about to leave he got an inspiration. Instead of waiting for Usui to become a drifter, why doesn''t he just go to the future and take the power from his future self who''s power already more developed. He picks the phone while thinking about it.


    ---


    Back in the present.


    Echo:" Let''s go back home! Oh Right, you don''t have to come to our home Matsuri. We are going somewhere starting tomorrow. We will call you when we are back."


    Matsuri:" Going somewhere? How long it will be?" she asks while frowning.


    Echo:" I don''t know. It can be only a day or a week. It depends on how fast I find the things I search for."


    Matsuri:" I see, I will wait for your call then."


    Echo:" Yeah, see you later!" I said and we left.


    ---


    On the way home.


    Touka:" So, where are we going?" she asks and the twins look at me.


    Echo:" the future, we will catch my next target to steal ability there!"


    Shiro:" I see, so who is the target and what is his ability?"


    Echo:" His name is Usui and he has an ability to cancel PSI like Kuro. Later when you fight with his subordinate, don''t kill them. It''s a waste to let them die easily when I can take their ability for myself."


    All:" Okay!!"

 Chapter 49 - V 3 Ch 5

    Echo POV


    The next morning we get ready. After eating breakfast we gathered around in the yard. I look at the girl and start to jump into the future''t As soon as we arrived in the future, I teleport us to Akihabara region to search for him as that was where he stayed in the canon.


    When we suddenly appear close to his base, five people show up in front of use. They seem to be a PSI user.


    Echo:" he is not among them, I will leave them to the three of you to taken care of."


    Shiro:" Leave it to us, you just focus in taking out Usui!"


    Echo:" Well then, I''ll leave first!" I said and teleport to Usui position. He was with his right-hand man, Miyake.


    Seeing him, they immediately on high alert.


    Usui:" Who are you! Are you with Wise? No, you didn''t have that orb on your body. Another survivors also impossible with that get up! That''s left you are a drifter and another pawn of Nemesis Q."


    Echo:" Pawn? I have never been a pawn of another person!! Her power is not enough to hold me and her curse is too weak to affect me."


    Usui:" Her? Are you saying that Nemesis Q is a woman? So, what did you come here for? And how did you come here? I don''t think it''s time for another game since I know she just does one yesterday."


    Echo:" You think that she was the only one who can travel through time? Now, enough talking. It''s time for you to die and become my power!!" whoa, I look like a villain here. Well, as long as the one I kill is an enemy it won''t affect my conscience.


    Usui:" What''s wrong? Not able to use your power? I''ve been using my power ever since we started to talk. Hahaha" he laughs and about to start monologing like every respectable villain in the world.


    But, I didn''t want to hear it. So, I will silence him immediately. Since I can''t use PSI I will just use my Kagune and physical prowess to do the work.


    Using Ukaku to shoot at him disrupting his concentration then use my Quinque Kumo to cut his hands up. Since his power sources come from his hand.


    While he was distracted from pain. I use Soru and appear behind him and start to steal his power. It only takes a few seconds and all that left of his was only dust scattered around the place.


    Miyake seeing this was terrified and was about to run when suddenly he finds out that he can''t move his body. He looks around for the cause and he sees that he was already tied up by a string.


    I walk up to him and about to do the same thing I do to Usui when I thought maybe I can just steal his power without taking his lifespan. It''s worth a try and I do it. It was almost succeeded but since it was the first time, I failed only taking his power and killing him in the process.


    I spread my sense and see that the girls still fighting their opponents. I through that they need help. But, they seem to have it under control so I let them be.


    I look at the mass that thought of Usui as their savior watching the fight in a tense atmosphere. I feel around and find out that there is many PSI user looking at the fight and not helping them. They must be not as United as I thought. Feeling their thought I start to kill the one that is Evil. Leaving the one that wants to help the mass to lead this place.


    While taking them down I use them as training dummy to train at only taking their power and it was successful. As I just finish the last person to be killed. The girls have finished their job in taking care of Usui''s Guard. So, I teleport to them.


    Echo:" It seems all of you have finished your opponents!"


    Shiro:" Echo!! Where have you been since I don''t think it will be this long for you to finish Usui!"


    Echo:" Haha, you are right. he was just so weak that it was so sad fighting him. I just find out other Physic and deal with the evil one and left a few to lead this poor people. Now then, let me take their power!" I told them and use my power to take theirs.


    Finished dealing with them, we immediately left the place.


    ---


    Touka:" So, what now? Are we going back?"


    Echo:" Hmmm, since we are here. Let''s visit the Nemesis Q Creator and help her a little. She was a pitiful girl." I said, after thinking for a while.


    Shiro:" It''s not because she is a girl?" she asks in suspicion.


    Echo:" Only a little bit. HahahaNow, let''s go!" I said and teleport ourselves to Mukuro island.


    Arriving at the coordinates, we did not see anything. There is no Island here. But, we can feel that there is a barrier in front of us and we just bypass it using teleportation.


    We look at it then ignore it and went to meet its Creator. When we arrived, we see her n?k?d inside a glass tube with wire attached to her with tags on her glass tube, It says Grigori 007.


    Echo:" Hello, Nemesis Q Creator or should we call you Grigori 007 or you have another name?"


    G 007:" You can just call me Nana if you want to! So, what do you want by visiting me? Are you going to kill me because I bring you here to the future?" she talks to us through telepathy with an emotionless face.


    Echo:" Nah, we are going to help you out of your tube." I said nonchalantly.


    Nana:" that would be impossible, I can''t survive without this anymore because of the experiment I underwent here." she said still emotionlessly but if you are perceptive. There is a hint of helplessness in her tone.


    Echo:" For others it was impossible. But, it was not for me! I can heal you back to your prime." I said to her and start the procedure to take her out of the glass.


    After she was out, the girls help her wear clothes. After she was clothed in, I walk to her and use my time power to give her the lifespan I stole from others and create a serum that will bring her motor skill back to normal.


    Feeling her body back to her prime, she tried to get up and have a feel of her body by walking around and test her own strengths. After she was satisfied, she looks back to us and talks again through telepathy.


    Nana:" Thank you for your help! I didn''t think that I will be saved by the one that I forced to participate in this game." she said still emotionless.


    Echo:" Forced? Please, we come with our own will. You are not forcing anyone and can you stop talking to us through telepathy?"


    Nana:" That will be hard. It''s been a long time since I''ve been in a conversation with another person."


    Shiro:" How long have you been in this place?"


    Nana:" hmmm, it was just before the world become like this. When the world was about to end. They all abandoned this place to save themselves."


    Kuro:" What a poor girl. Echo let''s stay here for a while!"


    Echo:" Okay, we will be back when she was about to call the drifter here."


    Touka:" I will go to cook food then. Echo, the ingredients." she said while extending her hand toward me.


    Echo:" Here you go!" I give her the ingredients and cooking utensils and look back to the twins who were talking with Nana.

 Chapter 50 - V 3 Ch 6

    Echo POV


    Thirty minutes later Touka finish cooking and all of them start to eat. Nana was immediately captured by the food taste and eat with gusto. It seems another foodie was born.


    She''s been in her tank for so many years that she must have forgotten about how the food taste, Poor girl. We stay at Mokuro island and help her train back her motor skills and teach her how to talk again like normal.


    Nana:" Echo, should I stop the Nemesis Q program? Now that you can help me uncover the truth about my brother?"


    Echo:" Hmm, please continue doing it for a while. I won''t deal with your brother for now."


    Nana:" Okay then!" she answered with a nod.


    Echo:" By the way, if I bring you to the past will it be a problem? There will be two at you then."


    Nana:" I don''t think it will be a problem since I was still in captive at that time and I don''t think it will be a problem even if I meet with my past self." she said after thinking for a while.


    Echo:" Good, then let''s bring you back to the past or our present!"


    Shiro:" That''s a good idea!"


    Kuro:" I will teach her many things, she is to detach from civilization."


    Touka:" I will cook many things for you then, Nana-san. Please look forward to it."


    Echo:" They seem eager to have you with us. So, how about it, Nana?" I said and look at her.


    Nana:" I will follow you then. Besides, there is nothing here."


    I nodded and we group together then I start to use my power to bring us back.


    ---


    Back to the present, now we were back at our house. The twins immediately brought Nana over to choose her room. I go back to my room and start to change my clothes.


    Echo:" Hello, Matsuri-san. We are back now, so you can visit us again."


    Matsuri:" Ohh, you are back! It''s only a day and a half. I will visit you tomorrow then!"


    Echo:" Yeah, we will wait for you then." I answer her and close the phone.


    ---


    The next morning Matsuri comes and train with the girls.


    Matsuri:" Hey all! Where did you go yesterday? Did you bring a souvenir for me?" She said as she walks into our house.


    Kuro:" Matsuri-san! Are you not busy? Is there no concert going on?"


    Matsuri:" Nah, I clear away my job for a while since I don''t think I can focus on this Psyren thing going on!"


    Echo:" Hahaha, Rejoice Matsuri! I just got the power to disable the Psyren calling cards. So, we won''t be called again. Besides, we got the creator of Nemesis Q with us now! We bring her from the future yesterday."


    Matsuri:" What!! So, you are going into the future yesterday? Why didn''t you bring me? Also is it okay to bring Nemesis Q creator with you? Is she safe?"


    Echo:" Yeah, it''s okay. For the detail, I will let the girls tell you about it. Now, give me your card so I can disable it." I said to her and she gives me her card.


    After disabling it I let her converse with the girls, with Nana following them.


    ---


    Touka POV


    After finish cooking I follow the others to the basement. Shiro and Kuro were telling Matsuri-san about our adventure yesterday and introduced Nana the her.


    Hearing about her story, Matsuri felt pity toward her.


    Touka:" all of you, let''s eat breakfast first before you start to do your training."


    After we finish breakfast we start to train our power. Matsuri was working on her unique ability Requiem it creates a concentrating a large quantity of Burst energy into various spheres which she conceals about her person. When released, these spheres expand dramatically in size.


    I then start my own training to create a railgun, I concentrated a large amount of concentrated lighting and about to launch an iron marble with it when it suddenly disappears.


    Echo:" That''s technique is dangerous to try it here. We should use a pool in order to use it safely. Try to use your Magnetic power to make a pool here. Count it as training!"


    Touka:" Right! I forgot about that. Then I will start making the pool." I said and start to make a pool.


    It was quite hard since I tried to use a magnetic force to move sand. But, I was able to do it in the end. It takes me three hours to get a hang of it and another four hours to finish it. Echo, sees me finish making a hole for the pool, help me coat it with marble then fill it with water and the pool was ready.


    After that, we go to eat since we''ve been training since morning. Matsuri looks exhausted while the twins did not look any different. Nana has been training her body to make it fit.


    ---


    Echo POV


    A month later, We were now back to the future using my ability. Matsuri and Nana come with us now. While the girls were fighting the Tavoo, I was checking the Neo Amakusa group now that Usui has died.


    Usui bodyguard that I let live and has their ability stolen seem to have theirs a bit back. I teleport in front of them, then start a conversation.


    Echo:" So, how did your power back after I take it?" I ask them and they were surprised to find me behind them and start to shake feeling terrified of me.


    ???:" Umm, right after you left. The next day we were going through the same thing we go through when we first awaken our PSI. After that we retrain our ability again and easily train it back to it was previously." he answers a little scared of me.


    Echo:" Interesting! It seems if I stole their ability, it will not permanently disappear. Well then, thanks for the info. I will leave you to your job." I said and go back to the girls.


    ---


    When he was back he sees that the girls were changing the landscape by trying out all their destructive technique.


    Touka:" Echo, we should come here every time we have to try out our skill. We don''t have to worry about collateral damage here."


    Echo:" Hahaha, I can see that. Then just tell me every time you need to be here!"


    After they were satisfied with the workout we go back to our time.


    ---


    Our lives continue on normally with every once in a while visiting the future to play around. Matsuri was the one who likes it the most since she can let out all the stress from her work.


    And like that two years have passed. Right now, I was in front of Matsuri who told me she wants me to pull out someone she knew from the Nemesis Q programs. Her name is Amamiya Sakurako.


    Matsuri:" Please Echo, I don''t want anything to happen to her!"


    Echo:" I won''t do it!" I said to her firmly.


    Matsuri:" What! Why?" she asks angrily at me.


    Echo:" Calm down Matsuri. I said I won''t pull her but I didn''t say that we won''t help her. You must know that with my time power I was able to glimpse into the future! And in the future, her going to the Psyren was the trigger on someone following her in order to save her and this someone was necessary for our fight with the Wise! It is only a year and this year we will train her and I will let you go with her every time she was going to Psyren. How about it?"


    Matsuri:" Good! Then I can go accompany my Sakurako." she says grinning from ear to ear.

 Chapter 51 - V 3 Ch 7

    Echo POV


    A year after Matsuri become a drifter again. I was watching a TV when suddenly Nana who was doing registration for a new drifter through her telepathy start shouting then close the telepathic conversation.


    Echo:" What happened to you?" I ask confused.


    Nana:" It''s the boy that you told me to watch out for, Yoshina Ageha! I don''t know why, but talking to him makes me annoyed." she said with a huff.


    Echo:" Hooo, so it''s already about the time!! When is the schedule for the next jump?" I ask a little bit excited.


    Nana:" Tomorrow, what? Do you want to go?" she asks while raising her eyebrows, she is more expensive now after living with us for three years.


    Echo:" Nope, I will go next time. They would come here for training I think." I said to her.


    While we were talking Shiro and Kuro come out from the basement.


    Shiro:" What happened? Why do we hear Nana shouting out all the way in the basement?" she said then sit beside me.


    Kuro:" You better not bullying her now, Echo!" Kuro follows her and takes my other side.


    Echo:" Why did you think I bullied her? She just did registration and a little annoyed toward the person. By the way, where is Touka?" I ask while looking around.


    Kuro:" She said she was about to break through her limit so she will train a little longer."


    Shiro:" She said that after this breakthrough she will be able to control the iron inside the human body easily."


    Echo:" Wow, that''s good! We should go get her life target and she is in luck that we will go play in the future in a while!" I said to them. Then suddenly my phone ring.


    ---


    Matsuri POV


    Echo:" Hello, Matsuri? What did you need? I thought that you are at a concert right now?"


    Matsuri:" Echo, did you know what happens to Sakurako? The news said that she went missing!"


    Echo:" Ohhh that! You don''t have to be worried. She is okay and about to get reinforcement you can also go get her. The next jump is tomorrow if you want to go!"


    Matsuri:" Good! Then I will go tomorrow. Please come here and activated my card!"


    Echo:" Okay!" he said.


    Echo:" Give me the card!" and suddenly I heard his voice behind me, making me surprised.


    Matsuri:" Did you have to appear suddenly like that? You almost kill me in a heart attack!" I say to him jokingly.


    Echo:" Hahaha, sorry sorry! I just want to try that once!" he said while sticking his tongue out.


    I give him the card and he takes it before taking out an unused card and sends the number value to my card.


    Echo:" Okay, that''s done. By the way, we will go again two jumps after this!" he told me and disappears from the room and someone knocks my door.


    ???:" Matsuri-sama, it''s time for the concert!" sigh, let''s end this concert and tomorrow I will beat up the Tavoo as stress relief.


    Matsuri:" Okay, I''ll be there in a while!" I shout back and start the preparation.


    ---


    Echo POV


    After back from charging Matsuri card, I go to the basement to sees how Touka''s doing. When I get there, she was concentrating on her training to make a breakthrough. After watching for a while I see her stop the training and was about to go into the Healing Pool.


    Echo:" You are done with your training?" I said and she looks back at me.


    Touka:" Yeah, I broke through the limit!" she said and start to take off her clothes.


    Touka:" Want to join in?" she said while smirking at me.


    Echo:" I will be joining then." I say and also taking off my clothes.


    Echo:" Want to try out your power? Tomorrow you should go with Matsuri to the future and give send her a healing potion for Sakurako. I forgot to give it to her just now." I said and submerged myself in the pool.


    Touka:" Okay then, why not going there yourself?" she said while sitting in front of me and leaned back to me.


    Echo:" Ahh, I have something to do. So, I won''t be able to go." I told her while hugging her body.


    Touka:" Ohh, what are you doing tomorrow?"


    Echo:" I''m going to deal with the present Usui." I told her and start to play with her body.


    Touka:" Nghh, you naughty boy."


    Echo:" Hehehe, I just want to give you a reward for breaking through." I say and kiss her and we have s?x in the pool after that.


    ---


    The next day, I went to follow Yoshina Ageha until he left for the future. I see that he goes to school and starts attending class.


    Not long after I see Usui and Miyake snooping around in the park around a phone booth. That must be where Ageha uses the Psyren Card.


    ---


    Matsuri POV


    I woke up quite late, at around 9.30. I take a bath then order for breakfast. After finish eating, I do a light exercise to help digest the food.


    At around 11 o''clock, a ring starts to sound out in my head. I change my attire and pick my phone up and the scenery changes into a dessert one.


    I spread my sense and look for Sakurako and found her killing a Tavoo in order to save a boy wearing a school uniform from the same school as her.


    Touka:" You shouldn''t be distracted in a place like this Matsuri-san!" I was shocked to hear Touka''s voice from my back and look back.


    Matsuri:" Touka!! What are you doing here? Are the other also here?"


    Touka:" No, just me. Echo forgot to give you this for Sakurako. This is a healing potion for her in case she was hurt or exhausted since it can also increase stamina."


    Matsuri:" I see, thanks for bringing it. Now, let''s go to see her." I told her and we start to run to Sakurako location.


    When we arrived she was piggyback by the boy that she saves. When we appear he immediately becomes alert and ready to protect her. Good boy, I''ll be sure to train him later.


    Matsuri:" Boy, can you put Sakurako down? We came to save her." I told him and start to walk toward them.


    ???:" And why should I trust you?"


    Touka:" You don''t have to! Since you don''t have the strength to oppose us!" Touka speaks and suddenly appears behind him then takes Sakurako from his back and goes back to her position.


    After laying Sakurako to the ground she starts to feed her the potion but because she faints it was impossible.


    Touka:" Want to feed her mouth to mouth?" she said and look at me.


    Touka:" I can''t since my lips are for Echo, Shiro, and Kuro''s only." she says jokingly.


    I take the vial and put it on my mouth and start to feed it to Sakurako. The boy seeing this was dumbfounded and gulped to himself.


    After giving her the potion Sakurako begins to regain consciousness.


    Sakurako:" Matsuri-san, are you coming to rescue me? Touka-san also here!"


    Matsuri:" Yeah, we come for you! How is your body? Echo sent us a healing potion for you. How do you feel?" I ask and she starts to get up and feel her body up.


    Sakurako:" I''m good, the potion work so fast!" she says, shocked by the recovery power of the potion.


    Touka:" Why are you so shocked? That potion comes from the same Echo who made a pool of healing liquid." Touka speak and Sakurako makes an '' it makes sense'' look.


    Sakurako:" You are right, I shouldn''t be surprised by his invention." she said and nodded to herself.


    Matsuri:" Enough of that, let''s go to the starting line. By the way, your boyfriend still looking stunned like that. Is that fine Sakurako?"


    Sakurako:" Ageha! He''s not my boyfriend Matsuri-san! Just a classmate."


    Matsuri:" hoho, just a classmate. But, he comes just for you." I tease her as we walk to the starting point.

 Chapter 52 - V 3 Ch 8

    Third POV


    After she was satisfied with teasing Sakurako, Matsuri and co went to the starting point. There they see the other drifter was fighting with each other trying to blame each other, the same occurrence every time there are new guys or in this case, all of them were new guys.


    Touka, knowing that it was useless to talk to them and didn''t want to babysit them immediately go for the phone. The other attention was drawn toward her who walk with purpose. One thug seeing her beauty block her way only to be zapped by her, who was repulsed seeing his lecherous face.


    The other seeing this was afraid and take their distance from her.


    Matsuri:" Touka-chan, you can''t just zap him like that just because he blocks your way!" Matsuri talks to her with a smirk.


    Touka:" He made a disgusting face! It was just a reflex." Touka answers her and smiles.


    Matsuri:" Hahaha, that''s his misfortune then for making a disgusting face in front of you."


    While talking with Matsuri, Touka arrived at the phone and pick it up. Getting the vision of the gate then she starts to copy the map.


    Touka:" Let''s go Matsuri-san! Time to go home. As for you lot! There is a map in the phone that will lead you to the exit. Look at it and you are on your own after this." she said and left the building. Matsuri and Sakurako following her.


    Ageha:" Wait! Why didn''t you help them? And tell them what is this place is all about?" the one who answers him is not Touka but Sakurako. Sakurako walks to him and hs to him and holds his face and looks at him with a creepy look and says.


    Sakurako:" Because they never listen when they are told about this place. They will only think that we are crazy!" after that, she goes back to walk with Touka and Matsuri.


    Ageha did not give up and walk back to the room and to see that they did not believe in her and left to the position of the sirens that they see from the building.


    He tried to persuade them only to be told that he was just a coward. He did not give up and start to follow after them in case they were attacked by the same monster that attacks him just before this.


    In the end, his prediction was right and they were attacked by two of the monster. He succeeds in killing one of it but was not able to fight the other ones that look like a human.


    ---


    Touka, Matsuri, and Sakurako did not leave and observe him and will come to his rescue if Ageha was in danger. After all, he came for Sakurako so it did not feel right if they just leave him alone.


    Also for Touka, he was a person that Echo''s been waiting for this person for a while now. Seeing Ageha was able to defeat one of the Tavoo she nodded at his bravery for fighting it with only human strength.


    Seeing he was cornered by the humanoid Tavoo, Touka shoots her railgun and kills it in one hit then they start to walk toward him who was now with another high schooler.


    Sakurako:" Now, you see right! They won''t listen to you no matter what we told them. I''m sure even if they survive this place, they will die in the end because they are trying to tell others about the Psyren!"


    Ageha:" What do you mean by that? Why would they died because telling it to others?"


    Sakurako:" Because it was the rules made by Nemesis Q! Now, let''s go leave this place."


    ???:" Wait!! Did you mean that you know about this place and you didn''t tell us about it? You let them die like that!"


    Touka:" I already told you about the map. It was your fault for not believing it. Don''t ?ssume that I have to take responsibility for your choice!" she said and left the place.


    Matsuri:" You shouldn''t blame others for your mistakes, Boy!" she said with a smile and follow Touka.


    Sakurako only glared at him and left, she has her own share of trouble from doing this for a year. The boy heard them aware that the fault comes from themselves that did not want to listen to them.


    After arriving at the gate, they start to use it to go back to the present. When they are back to the present they get separated from each other. Sakurako look at the boy and Ageha then talk.


    Sakurako:" This night, both of you will get a fever, red eyes, and nosebleed. That is a sign that your power activating. Tomorrow, come to this place and we will explain all about Psyren. Well then, Good night! Ageha and Asaga-kun"she told them and give them a piece of paper.


    Asaga:" So, you remember about me huh. Sorry about my outburst earlier." Asaga ask for forgiveness and bowed toward her.


    Sakurako:" it''s okay, well then. Bye!" she said and left the two of them.


    Ageha:" Asaga? Are you Hiryuu Asaga? That chibi?" he asked, shocked while looking at him.


    Asaga:" Yeah, that''s me! By the way, i am not a chibi anymore, twerp!" Asaga answers him then mocked Ageha about his height.


    ---


    Touka was now back at home and see that Echo, Shiro, Kuro, and Nana was waiting for her with food on the table.


    Echo:" So, how is it there? Looking at your face, it must be boring!"


    Touka:" Yes, Nana must have watched about the situation. Why not ask her?" she said with a sigh then sit at the table and they start to eat.


    Echo:" Haha, I just want to hear about it from your mouth."


    After finish eating and Touka taking a bath. They talk about the jump she has today.


    ---


    The next day, Echo got a call from Matsuri asking him if they can bring Ageha and Asaga to his place.


    Matsuri:" Hey, Echo! Sakurako ask, Is it okay to bring Ageha and Asaga to your place? They need to start their training!"


    Echo:" Yeah, just come here! But, don''t expect me or the girls to train them! Search for another teacher to teach them."


    Matsuri:" it''s okay, I have an acquaintance that quite good. I will ask him to teach them."


    Echo:" I see, good then! When will you come?" he asks for the last time.


    Matsuri:" tomorrow! Today we will teach them about the basics first. Well then Bye!" she said and close the line.


    ---


    The next day, Matsuri comes along with Sakurako and the two boys Yoshina Ageha and Asaga Hiryuu.


    Echo:" Welcome, So this is Sakurako-Chan acquaintance? Well, you can go to the basement and start to train." he said and left them alone.


    Ageha:" Hei, Amamiya! Who is that?"


    Sakurako:" That is Echo-san! The owner of this Mansion also the one that trained Matsuri-san and me! He won''t be training the both of you though. Matsuri-san will call someone else for that."


    Asaga:" Is he that strong? He didn''t look like it." ha ask skepticaly while looking at Echo back.


    Sakurako:" He can level a town with ease, that''s how strong he is."


    Matsuri:" The three of you! We don''t have time to chat about. Start training!" She shout and they left for the basement.

 Chapter 53 - V 3 Ch 9

    Third POV


    A week passed and Sakurako with the other go to the future again. Matsuri did not go since she has a concert that day. When they are back, there is a new addition to their group. Which is Oboro Mitsuki and Kabuto Kirisaki.


    Oboro Mitsuki was a young star and an idol in present day Japan, appearing in various films and television dramas. While Kabuto Kirisaki is a local playboy who seems to spend his time hitting on attractive women.


    Matsuri brings her acquaintance to train them in Raise. His name is Hyodo Kagetora, he was Matsuri die-hard fan and has been proposing to her many times.


    Matsuri seeing that Ageha did not have progress in controlling his power gives up and comes to Echo for help.


    Matsuri:" Hey Echo! Can you please help this boy control his power? Or at least point a way for him to be able to control it!" She said while pointing at Ageha.


    Echo:" Hmmm, his power is Melchee Door huh? What a good ability! Okay, I can point a way for him or more precisely point him to someone for him to learn, but there is a price!" He answer with a smile.


    Matsuri:" What it is? It''s not like you to take something for helping others." asks her confused.


    Echo:" Hehe, he is special. His power I want it! I want to take his power! You don''t have to be worried since his power will be back to him a day later after I take it from him. So, how is it?"


    Matsuri:" Ageha, it''s your call. You choose for yourself!" she said looking at Ageha who is been watching at the side.


    Ageha:" Okay, as long as it will be back." he said resolutely.


    Echo:" Good, then I won''t hold back." Echo then moves towards Ageha and starts to take his power.


    After taking the power he left the training ground with Ageha. He then goes to the future bringing Ageha with him. His destination is Mukuro island.


    Ageha:" This is! Where are we?" he asked Echo.


    Echo:" This is Mukuro Island, we will stay here for a while until your power is back! By the way, you will have a fever again like when you first awaken your PSI! So, be prepared for it. While we are at it, let''s train your body up to standard." He says with a scary smile.


    The next day Ageha left to Elmore Woods to train his power according to Echo suggestion. Oboro and Sakurako decide to go with him since Oboro was acquaintance with them while Sakurako is just worried about him.


    While Ageha was training with Elmore Wood, the other was continued to be beaten around by Kagetora in order to train their Rise. By the time Ageha was back, he has a confidence look on his face and told them that he manages to control his power.


    ---


    Echo POV


    Echo:" By the way, we will also come with you all from now on. Matsuri, if you want to also bring Kagetora it was fine! I have many unused cards that I''ve been collecting." I said as he looks at Ageha''s group that reunited with each other.


    Matsuri:" Hmmm, not for now. Though it was very annoying to hide it from him for now."she says after thinking for a while.


    Echo:" Well, okay then. All of you be ready since it was tomorrow that we will go!" I told them and they dispersed then went back to their home.


    The next morning, all of them were gathered at my place then Nana order Nemesis Q to start the call. When we arrived it was only our group that was called right now minus Kabuto who seem to go solo. The reason is that I told Nana to stop circulating the cards since it was enough with only our group.


    When we arrived Asaga was quite adamant about going alone searching for his Kouhai which was stopped by Sakurako who said that she is going to use telepathy to try searching for him.


    I let them be since this way, we will meet with Touka''s chosen opponent which us Dholaki the Explosia user.


    Echo:" Touka, it seems that you are the first to get to fight your chosen opponent!" I told Touka with the twins and Nana heard us.


    Touka:" Ohh, he will come after us?" she asks excitedly.


    Echo:" Yeah, let''s follow them for now!" I say to them and start to move.


    Shiro:" Then when will it be our turn?"


    Echo:" Hmm, it''s not one of your targets but there will be another one that comes. You can go after him! He is Shiner, and his power is teleportation."


    Kuro:" I will take him then!"


    Echo:" do as you wish! But don''t kill any of them since I want to take their ability!"


    Kuro & Touka:" Okay!!"


    Shiro:" in the end, I didn''t get to fight!" she said with a pout.


    We arrived at Kabuto''s uncle Vila and go to the bunker that his uncle build. Seeing that it was a steel door Touka open it with her power and converted the steel door into marbles as ammunition for her fight later.


    They start to look around and Asaga found a generator to turn the electricity on. They read many newspapers about the Wise and the declaration of war then they found a video about the declaration of war and sees the Elmore Children fighting the Wise and was killed for it.


    Ageha was the one who was most devastated since he was quite close to the children and Oboro calm him down and told him that all of this still hasn''t happened in their time.


    As they were searching for more clues. I along with the girls was outside waiting for Dholaki to come.


    Not long after, someone attacks us with Explosion and it was stopped by Kuro who absorbs it with her shadows creating a black hole and throw it back to the ?ssailant.


    Touka seeing her opponent comes immediately change into her lightning empress mode and start to shoot railgun at Dholaki. Dholaki, feeling that it will be dangerous to take her attack on start to use his explosia to make a miniature sun to surround himself and melt the marble she shoots at him.


    Seeing him blocking her attack she moves at lightning speed and starts to bombard him. While Dholaki''s attention was focus on her, she sends all excess lightning to the clouds and it starts to gather.


    When she feels that she has gathered enough she stops her movement and raised her hand.


    Dholaki:" You damn wench, it''s about time that you stop and out of gas! I''ll murder you!"


    Touka:" hmph, who said that I''m out of gas? KIRIN!" she shouts and a Kirin made entirely out of lightning comes down and strikes Dholaki out.


    Echo:" Oioi, I said not to kill them since I will take their power!" I say a little disappointed.


    ???:" Fiuh, good thing that I came on time or you would be a goner Dholaki!"


    We heard a voice and see someone show up with a half-dead Dholaki. He wants to say something buy unable to speak.


    While this was going on, the group that stays in the bunker is already out and sees what going on.


    Ageha:" Damn, I don''t think I will be able to fight like that!"


    Asaga:" I don''t think we all can!"


    Matsuri:" you can as long as you train enough!"


    Echo:" Kuro, there he is! Your opponent, I will take Dholaki while you deal with him. The rest of you can deal with those Tavoo!"

 Chapter 54 - V 3 Ch 10

    Echo POV


    Echo teleport then kicks Shiner and takes Dholaki from him. Shiner was blown away and Kuro was waiting for him on the other side she makes the area around them thousands of times Earth gravity and make him fall down heavily.


    Her shadows spread around 1km with her as centers creating a domain where PSI Ability not working except for Rise. She then fights Shiner at close quarters where he clearly lacking and was defeated easily.


    While she was working on Shiner, I was busy absorbing Dholaki''s power and after finishing him up I go towards Kuro who just defeat her opponent and do the same to him. Now Wise was missing two of their numbers.


    Echo:" Good job on dealing with him!" I told her and gives a thumbs up.


    Kuro:" He is too weak! Take away his ability and he was sitting duck." she answers with a pout.


    Echo:" Hahaha, it won''t be the same with Junas later!"


    Kuro:" I hope so!" she said and we left to see at the other.


    When we arrived, they already finish with their opponent Shiro, Nana, Matsuri, and Touka did not help since they thought it was a good experience for them.


    Echo:" So, what do you feel about this fight?" I asked Ageha''s group.


    Ageha:" Ugh, we are severely out match and in need of more training!" he says with a wry smile.


    Echo:" Good, then more training for you when we are back!" I told them and we left the place.


    ---


    Third POV


    Back to the present, Ageha and friends start to train harder that it makes Kagetora who is their coach confused.


    A few days later, Kagetora asks for Ageha''s help on his job since he doesn''t have many friends who can catch up with him. Ageha was in a dilemma and about to refuse him when Echo cut their conversation.


    Echo:" Why don''t you just go!"


    Sakurako:" Echo-san! But, he can''t we are just too busy!" she shouts, telling him her disapproval.


    Echo:" Calm down Sakurako! He''s the type that gets stronger in a fight. This job might serve him well in making him more experienced." Echo told her of his reasoning and she decided to trust him.


    Echo:" Ageha Go break a bone! If you are injured it can be easily healed. So, don''t think of anything and just fight to your heart content!" he told him and Ageha nodded then left with Kagetora.


    ---


    While Ageha left for a job with Kagetora, Echo has to train the new power that he gets from Dholaki and Shiner. The one from Shiner was easy to master since he himself a Space user. It was Explosia which he struggles and this power still has many potentials unearth because the last user is stupid.


    Touka:" Do you need help in mastering that power?"


    Echo:" It''s okay! I can handle this. By the way, it''s time for all of you to master Nova!"


    Shiro:" Really? Then, what are we waiting for?"


    Echo:" Let''s go to the future so we don''t have to think about collateral damage and time since I can just go back around the time we left." he answer and they left for the future.


    After training for a month in Mukuro Island, Touka was the first to master Nova with Nana follows two days later. The twins master it at the same time a day after Nana.


    Nana in Nova state can use her ability to hijacked others to use their abilities upgrade. Where before she has to be connected to them through a PSI cable she made, now she can do it like a wireless network at around ten kilometers.


    Shiro was able to use her telekinesis to manipulate molecules, she can even move it to create friction between the molecules to make it combust. (She basically becomes Phoenix from X-Men)


    Kuro was a black hole embodiment when she was in Nova state and she can make all PSI power useless five kilometers around herself.


    After seeing that the girls have master Nova, Echo brought them back to the present and they take a rest from training for a while.


    ---


    A few days later, Ageha is back with a new information about the Wise or their leader Amagi Miroku. He told them about his encounter with him and about his ability.


    Nana:" So that what he is called now!" she said, making the other that didn''t know about her real identity look at her.


    Nana:" I believe that the one you encounter was my little brother, Ageha!" She told them and start to tell them about her past and that she was Nemesis Q creator.


    Ageha:" What the fu?k! So, all this time it was you that brought us here to this mess!"


    Sakurako:" Calm down, Ageha!"


    Ageha:" Amamiya, don''t tell me you know about this?" he asks her heatedly.


    Sakurako:" Yeah, Matsuri-san and Echo-san already told me about it."


    Ageha:" Wha!" he was about to continue his tantrum when Echo cut him off.


    Echo:" You seem to not realize the severity of this incident, Ageha! We have to make a sacrifice in order to prevent the future that about to happen!"


    Ageha:" But, you can just told the drifter about it and I am sure they will help!"


    Echo:" And compromising her whereabouts? And what the use even if they know? Are they going to be useful in fighting Amagi Miroku and his comrade? The reason for us to continue this is to search for someone competent enough to help us in defeating them and prevent the bleak future!" hearing this he was silenced and Oboro touch his shoulders making him sit.


    Oboro:" He is right about that! They were clearly very powerful that the government can''t stop them from destroying the world!" hearing what he says, Ageha starts to calm down since he also found their excuse reasonable.


    After the discussion, Ageha left to Elmore Wood to calm himself without telling anyone about it. This results in making his sister worry and his father angry that they go to Elmore Wood and have a big fight with him that resulted in his father cutting their ties with him.


    ---


    Ageha:" Echo! What are you doing here? Do you need something from me?" he ask when he see Echo coming through the gate.


    Echo:" Yo, Ageha! I heard that you got into a fight with your father? This must be your sister huh!" Echo ask and look at the woman next to Ageha that was dealing with the kid.


    Echo:" And nope, I did not come here for you. I have a business with the Grandma living here! I am going to talk about Psyren with her and her future! You can also bring your sister so I can tell her about what you''ve been doing all this time since the Nemesis Q curse did not work on me!"


    ???:" Is what you said true? That you are not affected by Nemesis Q curse?" someone ask and Echo look at the door to see Tenjuin Elmore walking out from the Mansion.


    Echo:" Yeah, I am too powerful when it tried to implant the curse on me that I nullified it! Let''s talk inside since it will be quite a long talk this time!" Echo told her and they start to walk inside with Ageha sister following them with the kids in tow.

 Chapter 55 - V 3 Ch 11

    Third POV


    They sit down and start the conversation.


    Echo:" Well then, let''s start with why I am here first!" Echo says seriously.


    Ageha:" Isn''t it because you want to tell her about Psyren?" he asks confused.


    Echo:" there is also that, but if it was only that I won''t ever come here since it was troublesome. The reason I come here is to stop you from leaving tomorrow! The plane that you will take will malfunction and crash, taking your lives with it. You can also call your acquaintance in the government to check on it since it can save many lives!"


    T. Elmore:" What! I see so that''s why I can''t see into the future anymore. It was because I am already dead by that time!" she said after thinking for a while.


    T. Elmore:" Thanks for telling me this and I also will call my acquaintance to check on the plane later. Now, about Psyren I know that it was the future about this world but how can it become like this? And what is Nemesis Q''s purpose in taking people in this era to go there?"


    Echo:" Hmm, the reason for it is because of this country''s darkness! Our country Japan has a group of scientists that work in studying Physic and search for a way to enhance it and to create a soldier from it. The name of the organization is Grigori!" Echo says until here and sees if they have digest about what he says. Seeing that they nodded, he continues.


    Echo:" In order to do this they need a human test subject who is a Physic. The first time they do it, they took a DNA sample from many existing Physic discreetly and create a Physic user from scratch. This experiment succeeded with the creation of Grigori 01. When Grigori 01 was born its power exceeds all their expectations. But, as a child born in a lab and has been living in that lab all his life. Grigori 01 run away from the facility and slaughter all personnel that was there before he destroyed all information about himself. Because off this, the Government deemed that this experiment was a failure." he stops again and looks at them to see if they have understood.


    Fubuki:" They reap what they sow!" Fubuki, Ageha''s sister says that with disgust.


    Echo:" Hehe, but they did not stop here! Not long after that incident, they do this again. This time instead of creating from a scratch they decide to take orphans that show talent in Physic. Here they get Gregori 5 to 7, you already meet with the two of them, Ageha! They are Gregori 6 & 7 or now was know as Amagi Miroku and Nana! This time, the government learns from past mistakes and controls their lab rat more ruthlessly by putting many restrictions and safety control on them." Echo stop and drinks tea in the table then continues.


    Echo:" Amagi Miroku was a bright and innocent child. He has been told by them that if he cooperates and helps them in their experiment, he would meet with his parents later. But it was, of course, a lie and he has been feed with this lies up to his reaching teenage age making him close himself up and see human in disgusted. On his birthday he deceives a newbie scientist that felt pity for him and ask him to switch off his PSI blockers that day as that day was his birthday. As soon as the Blockers was undone he starts to laugh crazily and start to slaughter all personnel except for that newbie scientist, following him him was Grigori 05 who was now called Junas. His sister Grigori 07 did not follow him since she thought that the path that her brother choose is a path of destruction and she also has already sealed all her emotions at that time to save herself from going crazy." by this time, all the listener. Listen to Echo seriously, except for the kids that have already asleep.


    Echo:" after his escape, Amagi Miroku starts his plan. That is to create a world especially for a Physic user and for that, all humans must be eliminated. He starts to gather many Physic user that has the same ideas with him and help him with his plan. One of it is Grigory 01, who has a strong Telekinesis power that he can call a meteorite to Earth. With his power they summon a meteorite that they called the Promised Tears that they used to gain a connection with a comet named Ouroboros which has intelligence and call it to Earth which also the thing that destroyed the Earth in the future. It was also the Gas that was released by it that makes the drifter becomes a Physic user." hearing this Ageha was shocked.


    Echo:" Well, that''s it! After that their group that calls themselves the Wise starts to hunt down everyone that survived the calamity. as for Nana or Grigori 07, she was moved to Mukuro Island before the calamity and was abandoned by the Grigori when the end of the world started. Wanting to know what happens to her brother and uncover the mystery about why he destroyed the world. She created the Nemesis program that will take people from the past to the future and uncover the reason why did her brother does that!" up to this Echo stop talking and start to get up.


    Echo:" That''s that. I tired from all that talking. So, I''m going home! Fubuki-san, Ageha was involved in all this so be lenient on him." he said and teleport back to his house.


    ---


    As Echo has left, Ageha, Fubuki, and Elmore sit in silence digesting all the information that he dumped on them.


    Fubuki:" So, you''ve been fighting with someone who has the power to destroy the world! Ugh, why is it that you always make me worried!"


    Ageha:" Sorry, Aneki! It''s not my fault that I got involved in this. I don''t know about it at that time and only focus on trying to help Amamiya." he said while scratching his cheek.


    Fubuki:" Sigh, please promise me that you will be safe!" she asks with a tinge of worry.


    Ageha:" Yes, I promise!" he answered her resolutely.


    T. Elmore:" I got to make a call about the plane tomorrow." she said and left the room.


    ---


    Echo POV


    I just got back and see that the others were waiting for me.


    Shiro:" So, how is it with Elmore?"


    Echo:" Hmm, I already told her almost everything. Besides, it won''t be long for us to stay in this world. After we defeated all of the Wise, we will go to the next world."


    Nana:" I''m still shocked that reincarnation exists and all of you are Reincarnator."


    Touka:" Well, we also surprised when he told us for the first time."


    Kuro:" I wonder what world will it be next?"


    Echo:" Heh, I just hope it will be full of strong people to fight like here."


    ---


    The next day, they gathered in his house waiting for the jump to start. Ageha is still with Elmore and will be going from there.


    Matsuri decides that it was time for Kagetora to know since he already meets with Amagi Miroku so she asks for the card from me two days ago. It was 12 o''clock, and Nemesis Q has appeared in front of us.

 Chapter 56 - V 3 Ch 12

    Echo POV


    We arrived in the future and our surrounding was a danger Zones with many Tavoo surveilling the places. Not only that, it seems that our group was separated from each other.


    I spread my sense and start to teleport around and gather them in a cave.


    Echo:" It seems that because we kill two of their commander, they start to look around the area close to where we disappear last time." I told them and they make a serious face.


    Matsuri:" That seems to be the case, so what do we do now?"


    Shiro:" What else? We kill them as fast as we can before the leader comes!" she said as she was eager to fight.


    Ageha:" that seems to be our only choice." he agreed with her like it was the only choice. But, you can see that he was looking forward to the fight.


    The other was agreeing with it then we go out and start a massacre of the Tavoo. After we finished killing them I feel two strong aura coming toward us.


    When they arrived, I was shocked when I see one of them. The one that comes was Junas and the other one was someone I know. He was the Glasses man that I give the PSI manual to train, Machida Motohama.


    Echo:" Well well, talk about coincidence. Long-time no see Motohama-san." I said with a smirk.


    Motohama:" Kid! Yeah, it''s been a long time. 11th year''s I think! Thanks to your book I was able to get strong and survive in this world. You still look young even though you are not implanted with Illumina Core." he look at us confused.


    Echo:" Hmmm, it seems that you forgot that we are a time travelers. While it was 11 years for you it was only three years for us." I told him with a smirk.


    Motohama:" Ahh, So that was real. I never believe in it all this time. Also, after the last time we meet. I only go there again for two times since my ability helm me removed the curse of Nemesis Q."


    Junas:" Mystic Eyes, you know about them?" he inquired about their relationship.


    Motohama:" Yeah, the boy was the one that gives me the manual to train my PSI when I just awaken my power."


    Junas:" I see, and from what I heard it seems that they have a power to time-travel. Looking at how they suddenly disappear and appear like that and how they dressed, that seems to be the case. Well, whatever since they look like the are an enemy. We will just eliminate them!"


    Motohama:" Yeah, be careful that despite their looks they are all quite strong. I don''t know how much stronger they were now after all this time."


    Echo:" So, who want to fight that sword wielder? I will take care of Motohama-san since it was my responsibility. It was me who gives him the book for him to train after all!"


    Matsuri:" Let''s take him together since we don''t know how strong he is!" she said as she look at the other.


    Touka:" I won''t participate since I already fight last time. The rest of you need the experience fighting physic."


    Kuro:" Then I won''t fight too. Even though he was my target. But, I will let all of you have fun."


    Shiro:" He is not my target. So, I won''t fight!" she said then sit on a rock.


    Nana:" Then me too!" she just follow Shiro to sit on the rock.


    Matsuri:" Sigh, then I and Tora will only observe and help when you need it. Ageha, Sakurako, Oboro, Asaga, and Kabuto! You five will fight with him as practice."


    Junas:" You all really underestimate me huh. I will make you regret it!" he said and draws his blade and suddenly many energy blades appear behind him.


    Echo:" Well, shall we dance?" I said with a smirk.


    Motohama:" Don''t think that it will be easy for you!!!" he said seriously then suddenly a beam shoot out from his eyes.


    Echo:" Laser eyes! Really? How did you get yourself out off Nemesis Q curse with that power?" I asked him curiously.


    Motohama:" That''s only one of my eye power!" he said, then my instincts warn me of danger and I teleport from my place. When I look at my last place, I see the area around it petrified.


    Echo:" Eyes of Petrification! Now, that is a good ability." I comment on his power.


    Seeing that I evade his power he attacks me again, this time he appeared beside me like he was teleporting. On his hand was a sword that appears out of nowhere.


    No, that''s not a sword but an iron dust! The heck, how many abilities do he have? Not like I can complain since I also have many abilities. I look at his eyes when suddenly I found myself back in Hellsing fighting with Alucard. This must be an illusion then I break out of it.


    As I was out of the illusion, I found my feet have been petrified. I use the time power to rewind the time around it and dispelled the petrification.


    When I just finished dispelling it, Motohama''s iron dust sword already close to striking me. It looks like a whip now.


    I stopped time and walk out of the striking range. Feeling curious, I read Motohama''s mind to find out what his power is. His power is called Gekokujou, He was able to overthrow the ability of his opponent and if he succeeded he will gain a copy of their power although not as powerful. The conditions are he has to look at the ability being used with the time he has to look is according to how strong his opponent is.


    Echo:" Now, this is a troublesome ability. Can''t fight him for too long! Let''s end this."


    I then teleport next to him and caught him with my left hand then start to steal his power and vitality. He died not knowing how it is.


    I look at Ageha''s group fight and see that they just end the fight with Junas run from them with one of his hand severed by Ageha Melchee Door.


    When I look at the other to see why they didn''t catch him, I see that they now look like having picnics! Eating sweets and drinking tea, Kagetora did not participate but he didn''t go after him also. I walk to them and ask.


    Echo:" Sigh, what are you doing? Why didn''t all of you catch him?"


    Shiro:" Hehe, I thought that maybe he will bring his comrades here if we let him go! I also want a fight."


    Echo:" Hmmm, so all of you want to wait here?" I asked them and they just nodded at me.


    Seeing them being like this, I just sit down and take a cookie then eat it.


    ---


    I look as the kids go fight that man when I heard a chatter behind me from the girls. I look back and see that they are having a picnic here.


    Matsuri:" Ugh, what are you girls doing?" I ask just to make sure.


    Nana:" Making ourselves comfortable?" she said or more asking to herself.


    Shiro:" Come on sit here, Matsuri-san! I think they can handle this. We just have to watch them." she calls out to me. After thinking for a while, I decided to join them.


    We watch as the fight going on, Echo''s opponents look like he was winning. When suddenly he died with Echo standing where he was last time.


    As for Ageha''s groups, Sakurako connects them with her power and lets all of them able to see through Kabuto''s eyes. He seems to be able to see dangers with his Vision. While Ageha, Asaga, and Oboro were the attackers.


    Oboro has a good rise and uses himself as a distraction while Asaga using his power to block enemies attack and trying to hold him down and Ageha as damage dealers since his power is especially for attacking with no support ability. They were able to defeat him by severing one of his hands. He looks like he was about to run, I was about to stop him when I feel someone stop me.


    I look at who is it and see Shiro was holding my hand.


    Shiro:" Let him be! This way, maybe he will be back with his comrades. Then we wi take care of them and be done with this charade." she said seriously. In the end, I sit back and watch as he runs from here.

 Chapter 57 - V 3 Ch 13

    Echo POV


    We wait for the Wise to arrive but after waiting for a while, the one who comes is the Elmore children. They are Marie, Shao, Kyle, and Frederika.


    Kyle:" Yo, Ageha! Hahaha, grandma was right when she told us that all of you will be here."


    Ageha:" Kyle! Is that you? Wow, look at you. All grown up!"


    They were about to continue when suddenly Marie jump and start to hug him. Sakurako seeing this got annoyed and glared at them. Marie seeing this smile at her with a smug expression.


    Matsuri:" Hahaha, Ageha seems to be popular! You should be careful, Sakurako! Or he will be taken by others. Except you are able to share him like them!" she pats at Sakurako and says with a smirk.


    Sakurako:" Ma-Matsuri-san! What are you talking about!!!" she said with a blush and look away from her. Seeing Ageha looking at her she hides behind Matsuri.


    On the other side, Kyle also nudges at Shao who was in love with Marie.


    Echo:" Well, we can do the reunion later! You should have a base right! Bring us to your base then, I have enough seeing desert today."


    Hearing me the Tenjuin all look at each other and nodded at us.


    Kyle:" Yeah, let''s leave before the Wise come here!" after that, they brought us to the Root. Which is what they named their base. Roots were built underground beneath the Elmore General Hospital that was built by Granny Elmore with the help of Government officials that has a life debt to her.


    ---


    Third POV


    When they arrived at the Elmore Roots it was filled with so many people, different from the canon. They found out that it was because Ageha''s father brought his co-workers and help as many people as he can.


    Ageha''s sister was married to Ian, one of Matsuri acquaintances and pursuers in the past, also a well-known physic healer. He was heartbroken when he found out that Matsuri has gone missing after going out to find a survivor and it was Fubuki that brought him out of depression and they got a son now.


    While Ageha got reunited with his family in the future, the other went and meet up with Granny Elmore.


    ---


    We walk into a room and see Granny there sitting in a wheelchair with Van behind her pushing her wheelchair. Seeing this Marie goes and takes his place to help her.


    Echo:" Yo Grann, How is the airplane incident?" I ask while walking in. She chuckles and starts to talk.


    T. Elmore:" It''s okay, thanks to you. I got a lot of support because of this to build this place later when I need it at that time."


    Echo:" Good, now tell us about the wise and it''s members. I''m sure many will change since we meddle in many things to change the future."


    T. Elmore:" hmm, I''m sure you already know Miroku, Grana, Judas, and Mithra. Besides them, there is Caprico, Uranus, and mystic eyes as star commander and under them, there are many more subordinates that they recruit."


    Matsuri:" After this jump who else which survived?" Matsuri cut our conversation and ask her.


    T. Elmore:" All of you survive! But only Ageha, Sakurako, you, Kagetora, and Kabuto who cones back. Echo and his group decide to stay and help us from the future since Echo knows that this time there won''t be any time corrections and this future will be like an alternate universe where it will stay broken no matter how you tried to change the future. Hiryu decides to stay to find his Junior while Oboro decides to Explore this world for a while since he won''t get a chance again in the future."


    Echo:" Well, for now, lets us celebrate for our reunion even though it''s only been just yesterday for me. Hahaha"


    Echo:" Here a snack from the past since I''m sure all of you haven''t eaten any of them for a few years now!" I said while dumping out many snacks from the Gate of Babylon.


    While we''ve been having a party for a while Ageha decides to come just now along with his family and Sakurako. I told Matsuri and decide not to tell Ageha about what we''re talking about just now since he''s too emotional of a teenager and will make a judgment based on his feeling which is not good and Granny Elmore''s also support it.


    ---


    The next morning, after the party last night where it continues for long since the inhabitants of the Root heard about the snack for the kid, while the ?du?t immediately runs to us when they found out that there also a need and many other alcoholics beverages.


    After partying for a while we''re wasted and start to sleep. Since the Elmore kid knows where the exit point, Ageha group decide to immediately go back today and I also already gave them a mission to do in the past while we take care of the future.


    After saying goodbye and sending them off. I take the girls to the Wise base to take care of this problem immediately with only me, Shiro, Kuro, Touka, Nana, Ageha''s father and the Tenjouin kid beside Van since he has to take care of Granny.


    Arriving at Wise base using my Teleportation. We were greeted by Wise Goons to which I let the Kid and Asuka-san take care of them while we go after the leader.


    When we go to their place, the wise already grouping up and ready to take us on. Shiro seeing Grana immediately go after him and change the place for their fight. After that Touka goes after Junas who was still injured and was accompanied by Caprico. Then Kuro takes on Uranus. All that left is me and Nana.


    Echo:" So, want to talk to your brother now Nana?"


    Nana:" No, I will just take care of the one who led my brother astray. You take care of him! But, please don''t kill him." she said and left to take care of Mithra who hasn''t shown up.


    A. Miroku:" So, you will leave just like that, Nee-san? After so long we haven''t met each other. You''re so cold"


    Nana:" There''s nothing to talk about now. I''ll let Echo take care of you first until you see reason. While I take care of the woman who led you astray." she said and disappear from our view.


    Echo:" Hehe, don''t take it to heart. Inside all of that, she still cares for you. Not, let''s us dance and fulfill your Nee-san wish to make you see reasons!"


    A. Miroku:" Hmph, let''s see if you can!"


    With that as a signal, he starts his attack. From all around us many trees of light start to grow and attack me. I dodge all his attack still not using any of my ability only using my body that''s been enchanted by the Spiderman Serum. Using spidey sense to dodge to the limit from all his numerous attacks.


    After feeling around his ability for a while, I spread my spider net and disrupt his PSI ability subtly and when there is an opening I dash at him trying to get a hit. A hit is what I got, but he heal itn within second.


    A. Miroku:" Well, that was quite a strong hit. If I didn''t plant my seed around the tavoo and all that subordinate ill be a goner just now."


    Echo:" Hmmm, You''ve come prepared it seems. But, how long will it last?" I ask, then suddenly teleport beside him and give him a kick. But he seems to be prepared for it and able to block it, he even got a time to counter-attack me.


    Miroku was about to continue his attack when suddenly he can''t feel his power, even if it was just a second it was fatal for a fighter of their caliber and I was not one who let go of Opportunity. Shooting of a spider web in a net form he got to bind Miroku, then I grabs him with my left hand neutralizing his power. After that, I hit him with enough force to make him fainted. Seeing him fainted I start to take his power, completely defeat him.


    Not long after, the girls back along with their opponents that already been defeated and fainted. I do the same to them, taking their power and let them lives except for Mithra since she''s dangerous to be left alive.


    COMMENT 36 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 36 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation

 Chapter 58 - V 3 Ch 14

    With Nashiro


    After leaving Echo''s side, she was now in a large clearing with Grana.


    Grana:" Girl! Are you strong? Will you be able to entertain me with our fight?"


    Shiro:" Let''s see who entertaining who shall we!" She answers with a smirk.


    Grana:" Haha, let''s talk with our fists then."


    As soon as he finishes talking Grana immediately launched himself up toward Shiro and as they got close he punches her with PSI clad fists.


    Seeing Grana want to get a feel with close combat first, Shiro takes out her halberd and bash him with the side of her halberd. Can''t do with accidentally killing him since Echo wants him Alive.


    Seeing the halberd, Grana brought his arm up to block. But as the strike got close he feels a sense of crisis raised in his heart, so he hastily uses his power to make a shield between him and the weapon which is a good judgment since his PSI shield broke easily and he himself was launched by the force, good things that he jumps following the weapon inertia lessening the damage that he would get if not.


    If it was other, they would be shocked and scared by the power carried inside that little body of her, but not Grana. He just grinning himself like mad from finding someone that might be his match.


    Grana:" Hahaha, Good thing that we are quite far from the others. Can''t have the goons implant with Illumina Core dying from exposure of sunlight after all." he said to himself and raised both his hand up like someone giving a prayer.


    Suddenly the cloud parted ways above them, then something like glass layered on top of each other.


    Grana:" Accept my strike! ''Nichirin Tentsui"


    Seeing this ability that Echo told her to master, she just smiles and raised her own hand. Making the same glass-like membrane and redirect the sun rays towards Grana.


    Grana seeing his own moves to be used on himself was surprised, but he immediately got his bearing back and dodge the attack. But Shiro already waiting for him in the place where he moves and hit him again with the flat side of her halberd like someone playing baseball, launching himself back toward where the sunray still striking. To save himself from being burn into a Mummy he makes a


    many-layered of force field to protect himself. But it still gets himself burned a little and consumes his power. Leaving himself battered and bruised on the ground.


    With Kurona


    Uranus did not chitchat, as soon as they arrive at the designated place for their fight. He suddenly attacks Kuro by launching an Iceberg. Kuro seeing this summoned her scythe and cut it in two making the two-piece fall beside her creating cloud dust.


    With vision being hampered, Kuro go through her shadow realm and come out of Uranus shadow then attack him from the back. Feeling danger from his back, Uranus summon his ice armor to lessen the damage while using ice skate to move away from where he is.


    His armor got cut and his back gets a light cut. He brings out his ice gun and starts to fire it at her while moving around with his skate.


    Kurona got annoyed seeing him moving around and attack her spread her shadow and nullify the ice that is around them making Uranus unable to skate again. Then su?k?d him into her shadow realm along with all the junk and destroyed building around them. When she''s done su?k?n? everything around, she recalled her shadow. Leaving a clear plot of land in its wake.


    Feeling around her shadow realms, she can see Uranus tried to use his power but it was useless since no one can use their power inside her realms. She controls all the junk and building rubles to attack Uranus all around until he fainted. When she sees that, she throws out everything inside her shadow realms include the fainted Uranus and starts to drag him toward where Echo is.


    With Touka


    Seeing there are two opponents for her, even though one is injured while the other looks like a kid. She decided to get serious from the start. Electricity started to dance all around her and because of it, iron sand start to fly and get attracted to each other. She then condenses it and vibrates it in a high frequency.


    Jonas feeling danger creates many sword constructs and launches it at her which she cut down with her iron sand. While the iron sand taking care of the sword, she created an iron marble from the iron sand that closes to her.


    After three minutes of indiscriminate Railgun attack. All that left is only her and her two opponent that look like they have been wethering storm. Not wanting to prolong their fight to much she just stunned them with her lighting and drag them to Echo.


    With Nana she don''t want take long taking care of Mithra. As soon as she find her, she lance a surprise attack and hijack her ability. After that, she shut her brain down making her fainted.


    ---


    The Elmore children are having a blast beating around the goons of the Wise. With all frustration from seeking their destroyed world and the feeling of being oppressed for eight years. They get loose and brought out their full power with Asuka supervising them and help them taking care the one that they missed.


    After finished with them, they go after Echo with the girls. As they arrived, they see Echo flying up with his hand raised and all the star commander was tied up and fainted on the ground with the girls standing beside them.


    ---


    Echo after taking all Wise member power, decide that this world deserves to get their sun back.


    He flies up and uses his ability and starts to gather all the cloud covering the earth and sends it inside his Gate of Babylon. Two hours of hard work and he succeeded in bringing the sky back to normal. He then goes inside the Wise base and sees a tree, a creation of Miroku contains a life force that he takes from people of the earth.


    He got close to it and place his right hand on the tree while his left hand on the ground. Using his power he transfers the life force inside the tree and transfers it toward the earth making the land around them to start having a life with grass and tree start to grow around them and the Earth becomes fertile.


    Echo:" Nana, can you send back all the drifter to the past? Don forget to remove the Illumina Core on Hiryu Kouhai so he doesn''t die."


    Nana:" Okay, wait a minute." she said and closed her eyes. After a few minutes, she opens it again."Done, they''ve been safely be sent back."


    Echo:" Good, let''s go back! It stands for celebration and we can let the kid that hasn''t seen the Sun since their birth to feel what it''s like!" I say with a smile.


    The Elmore''s look at each other and start to shout.


    Kyle:" Ooooohhhh, let''s go get the other out of the root!" he shout excitedly.


    Marie:" Grandma will be happy!" she said while crying from happiness


    Shao touched her shoulder with a smile while Frederica just look the other way smiling with tears on her eyes. Tsundere much that she is.


    ---


    A month has passed after the fight with Wise. Echo and the girls have been busy at this time they''ve been going around the world searching for survivors and they find many of them in other countries since Wise based themselves in Japan and did not bother with another country besides yearly inspections.


    The Elmore and all the survivors inside the root along with the one that Echo''s found are busy building their own place they''ve been brought to Japan since only Japan is having a large land that is fertile. It will be long before the life force that Echo gives to the Earth to spread all around the world.


    Echo did not forget to go to the past to see how the Ageha''s group doing and find out that they succeed in defeating the Wise. He also takes his time along with Kagetora, Matsuri, and Sakurako to go save Nana of the past.


    A year after that Echo try to use his power to go back to the world that he has been visited. In Tokyo Ghoul world it''s only been sixteen years since he left it so there is no change to it.


    It was in Hellsing world that made him shocked. He finds Integra along with Seras still lived, even it has been hundreds of years since he left this world.


    Integra:" You! Who are you? Why did you have my little brother''s looks?" she said to me alert making Seras got herself ready for a fight with her guns pointed at him.


    Echo:" Hey, Integra! It''s me Echo! It''s been hundred years since we met. I didn''t think that you''re still alive all this time." hearing this Integra frowned.


    Integra:" That can''t be since my brother already dies after his fight with Alucard."


    Echo:" Hmm, you won''t believe me if I just narrate it so I''ll just show it to the both of you." after that using telepathy Echo show Integra and Seras how he gets reincarnated after his death and how he got the power to cross dimensions now.


    Echo:" So, how have you two been since I died?"


    Integra:" Is that all you can say? You should have brought me with you when you first reincarnated! You bastard of a brother!" she said as she punched him again and again. After she''s exhausted, she hugs him.


    Integra:" I miss you." she said while crying. After she stops, he asks again about their life. It was Seras that answer his question since Integra is already asleep, did getting old make you prone to be more childish?


    Seras:" Because of many of your inventions. Britain becomes the strongest and wealthiest county in the world and since you exterminated all Ghoul and Vampire we get a peace for a while. It changes since forty years ago when a twenty years old Charles Zi Britannia takes the throne with his brother who was now called V.V as his adviser. They start to campaign and conquer many lands around the world. His slogan is that there is no equality in this world, that everyone since birth has been destined to their life''s a commoner has commoner life, a noble has a noble life like that and now they almost taking over the world using many of your inventions and fifteen years ago they build something called Knightmare Frame that change the course of the wars. Making Britannia stronger. also, I don''t know-how. But, V.V seems to be Immortal since he looks like 10 years old up till now."


    ''Damn, this world become a Code Geass because of my interference? That''s sick man. Now lets brought the girls here and stay in this world for a while, hehehe''


    Echo:" I see, so how have you two been living all this time? From what I see we are now in China right?"


    Seras:" We protect the throne for ten more years, after that we left Britain and explore the world and we''ve been staying here ever since that Charles start his campaign. We don''t want to meddle with it anymore."


    Echo:" Well, that changes now with me here. We will go to Japan and help them. I can make it that they think that we are Japanese that''s been living there since young with close ties to the imperial family Hehehe. By the way, how is integral still alive? Did you turned her?"


    Seras:" Oh no! It was also because of you! Your Super Soldiers Serum raised her lifespan up to 500 so she will live that long while the weaker version that you give to the Hellsing Soldiers makes the lives up to 200, they are still alive you know, they follow us in our seclusion, you can go out and look for yourself."


    Echo:" I see, but last time I see her she grows old. Why did she look like in her teenage years look now?"


    Seras:" That, we don''t know. She''s been growing young when she lived passed 100."


    Echo:" Whatever, I''ll go bring my wives here. Tell Integra that I''ll be back if she wakes up!"


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 27 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 59 - V 4 Ch 1

    Immediately after I bring the girls to which Nana and Frederica decide to follow then left them with Integra and Seras. I go to Japan searching for an empty plot of land close to Mt. Fuji. After finding a place, I go back to Helsing manor only to see Integra was Glaring at the girls with them looking at her awkwardly.


    Echo:" What happened here? Why did you glare at my wife''s Integra?" hearing my voice, she looked at me softly then she exclaimed.


    Integra:" Even if I don''t get your Virginity, I''ll have you take my Virginity now! And since you''re already reincarnated in another world, which means we are not blood-related now. That''s mean it''s safe." She said righteously while nodding feeling pleased with herself.


    That''s it, her age is really affecting her mentality. Her personality is now like when she was in her teenage years before she unseals Alucard.


    Well, I''ll follow along with her if the girl was okay with it. Poor my sister she already goes beyond the requirement of being a Sage. She is a Virgin longer than me. I look at the girls and they smile at me wryly, even Seras was now facepalming now.


    Echo:" Ignoring that for now, do you have an empty room? I need it to place the Cerebro''s!" hearing this Integra pout but she answers anyway.


    Integra:" We have, follow me! But, after this you have to take my and Seras Virginity!" she said and Seras blush from her statement.


    Seras:" Integra-sama why did you have to say that!"


    Echo:" Seras, you still a Virgin? With that big weapon, I don''t think anyone would refuse you."


    Seras:" Echo-sama, please you also. Don''t talk about something like this! I just haven''t find the right person."


    As we talk we arrived at the room and I start to take out the Cerebro''s. Connecting to Cerebro''s, I spread my telepathy all around the earth. I then make it that they think our presence in Japan normal and we born in Japan and have British blood on us with our ancestors living in Japan since before Charles reign, I make it that we are Integra descendants. Because of this we are recognized by both Brittania and Japan with Japan close to us as we already live in Japan soils since long and Brittania did not dare to touch us as we are Hellsing descendants. I also control the government personnel to forge our identity. While I was at it, I copy the memory of all the genius scientists around the world.


    Coming out of the Cerebro''s, I then continue to work. Closing my eyes and spread my PSI, I then teleport ourselves with the manor along with the Hellsing soldiers with their house to the plot of land I just found.


    Echo:" Well, that''s done! Integra, go and gather all our soldiers. They will be confused with me teleporting our place to Japan so we will tell them of our plan!"


    Ten minutes later, all personnel has gathered. When they see me, they were shocked that I was still alive and looks so young. I tell them what happened and my plans asking them if they want to participate, to which they shout that they have been waiting for this and they have been feeling so bored these last few years wanting to go into war again like the past. Fighting with Vampire and Ghoul.


    Finish giving them an announcement Integra drag me along with Seras. I use telepathy to ask them if they were okay with this to which they consent. Then Nana says that she wants to join and she runs after us. This night was challenging, catering to three women''s p???sur? and one of them is a Vampire with big stamina.


    ---


    One room inside the Underground base was filled with 146 Knightmare Cockpit Simulator for training which is the number of our people and I told then to go train in it. Our training place was different from them. Two night later Frederica sneak into my room and ask me take her also to which I consent, after all this ill just take the one that wants to be with me.


    ---


    Five months later, using the knowledge that I steal and my own technology I create 146 Generalized Knightmare for the soldiers. The end products are more look like Gundam than Knightmare and I use Arc Reactor as it''s fuel, not Sakuradite. Its body armor was created with Adamantium and they were equipped with a Vibranium shield, a beam rifles, and beam saber was able to fly while Brittanian Knightmare was still in a testing phase. Besides that, there is 8 more personalized Knigtmare for me and the girls.


    Today, me, Touka, Shiro, Kuro, and Frederica go to Ashford Academy as a transfer student. Integra, Seras, and Nana stay at home since they can''t go to school with us.


    Arriving at Ashford Academy, we were greeted by Student Council President and her Vice President, Milly Ashford and Lelouch Lamperouge.


    Milly:" Welcome to Ashford Academy. We of the Student Council welcome you to our Academy. You must be Mr. Hellsing, your name and looks are the same with your ancestors, are you sure you''re not his reincarnation? Or a Vampire maybe? Since from History it is said that Hellsing is a Vampire Hunter in the past." She starts her introduction but by the end of it, she starts to fire off question after question. Yep, she''s the same as Canon.


    Lelouch:" Now now President, you''re scaring our transfer student! I''m sorry about our President, her personality is just like that. She says she wants to be a Journalist."


    Echo:" It''s okay, that''s a job that fits with her personality." I said with a smile.


    Milly:" You think so? Look Lelouch, even Echo believes in me becoming a Journalist! hehe" she said with a smug look at Lelouch.


    Lelouch:" Sigh, Anyway let us give you a tour around campus before we take all of you to your class."


    The tour is fun since it''s been three lifetimes that I did not go to school, choosing to be home school. It is more fun with Milly animately explaining the school with its facilities for us.


    In the end, I and Touka were now in the same class as Lelouch with Nashiro and Kurona in a class beside us we are in the second year and Frederica was in the first year.


    By the end of the day, we go back to our home which we bought two months ago close to Ashford then teleport back to our Manor. There is a security camera that will tell us if there are visitors there so we can just teleport back.


    COMMENT 31 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 31 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 60 - V 4 Ch 2

    Four months have passed since we become a student. After the initial nostalgia, it becomes boring since first, I already know the materials and second, there is no thrill. Good thing it will end today.


    Kallen excused from school because of health reasons which I know that it is not since she is healthy. Lelouch and Rivalz go playing chess with noble and they will get caught in Terrorism.


    As I was thinking of this, a big-screen turn on. In it, Prince Clovis shows up and starts his show of drama. I got to say, that he is good at acting dramatic.


    Now, what should I do? What do I want to do in this world? At first, when I heard how this world change. I got thrilled, Mecha fight! I want to try it. After that, I thought of which side to choose? Britannia? The Empire that grew strong because of me! Japan? To take the weaker sides and become an underdog! Lelouch? No way, I like him in anime but I don''t trust someone like him. For all he said him hating his father and Britannia. He''s his father''s child. Maybe he''s seeing too many of himself in his father that he hated him. Making my own faction and make all of this Messier. Ugh, nope! That''s a big no! I want to have fun but I don''t want to make others suffer for it. My conscience will haunt me because of this.


    Now, back to what I want with this world! Looking at the news that is now reporting what happening in Shinjuku Ghetto I thought. Maybe I can help change this world become less bloody. Like this incident, I can help so that the resident of Ghetto did not die like a lamb in slaughter like that. With great power comes great responsibility! But, I can''t bring myself to care!


    I don''t like Charles and Britannian slogan at large, but I can''t deny that! Human is really not born equal since I was an example of inequality. My cheat is inequality at the finest and I acknowledge that. But, the way Charles brings it, again and again, is also not okay for me. You got power so you start to trample the less fortunate that I can''t do. Except maybe toward my enemy! I''ll trample them whoever it is. Sigh, thinking all of this making my head hurt.


    Back to what I want again! I want a thrill of fighting Mecha but I don''t want to inconvenience others for it. But I think it will be boring fighting with my Mecha. I got too excited when making it that it was too strong. With my Soldiers and Mecha that is over quality, it will become boring fast.


    Nothing will be done if I just sit here! I get up and left the class. Touka seeing me left, decide to follow me while telling the others about it. I can hear it through our bond.


    Arriving at the rooftop that has no people in it.


    Touka:" Echo, what happens? You''ve been quiet for the day. Then you suddenly left here."


    Echo:" I was just thinking! About what I want in this world. Not finding the answer I decide to go to the Ghetto and fight with Prince Clovis Army. Maybe after I fight it out I will get my answer." I don''t care about plot! Or if Lelouch will be able to create the Black Knight. I will just do what I want and what I best to, FIGHT!!!


    Kurona:" We will go fight with you!"


    Echo:" No! I will fight alone. All of you will be securing the innocent civilians that got caught up in this mess. As much as I want to not care about them, my conscience tells me to help."


    Touka:" Okay then, we will do that. Right Guys!"


    All:" Yeah!"


    Echo:" Good now wear this!" I said as I take out Arkham armor from GoB. To hide our identity and for safety.


    After we wear them, I close my eyes and spread my sense around the Ghetto to search for a large place where we can take out our Knightmare.


    Back to Ghetto, we immediately get on our Knightmare and go to the Army. While the girls go around and protect the civilian from foot soldiers I go around methodically destroy all Knightmare in the area. It was too easy, the spec is too different.


    Shiro:" Echo! I secure the so-called Poison Gas. There is Lelouch there and a Britannian soldier! What should I do?" I heard Shiro from our channels.


    Echo:" Let them be! Just take the Poison Had with you!"


    Shiro:" Roget that!"


    After taking out more than half of the Knightmare on site, I was blocked by Lancelot. Then, this means that Suzaku is already roped in Lloyd Asplund to become his test pilot. He fights well, clearly a genius. But, he''s still too naive to fight me on equal footing. Not only he was outclassed in machine performance he is also outclassed in fighting experience. After playing around for a bit. I disabled his Knightmare and left him there then continue hunting the others.


    After decimating the Army and shot Clovis Mobile base, I left with the girls.


    ---


    After having done all that, I think I got my head cleared up and now I know what I have to do! When we arrived at base I bark ou an order.


    Echo:" To all Hellsing soldiers! Take your Knightmare and take over all Britannian institutions! Kill their soldiers but don''t harm the civilian!"


    All:" SIR YES SIR!" they answer and start to get aboard their Knightmare.


    Kuro:" What will you do now, Echo?"


    Echo:" Make a statement! First, I''ll hack all satellites so I can send the word all over at once and it was easy as they still use the model that I design. I have a backdoor to use!" I told her and she nodded along with the others.


    Echo:" All of you please help me organize a room for me to make a speech! Ask Integra and Seras for help" they nodded and go do that. ''Now, let''s get to work!''


    ---


    Lelouch POV


    What misfortune, wanting to help others but got me in a Terrorist activity. I thought as I listen to the radio.


    Lelouch:" Good, now that I have the information I can make a plan to leave."


    I thought as I get up when suddenly the truck hit something. "What now!" I say when the hatch opens up. I hide for a while looking to the so-called Poison Gas when a Britannian soldiers attack me.


    He starts to babble about how foolish it was to use a Poison Gas to which I answer that in the end, it was Britannian work. He suddenly got shocked when he sees my face and called out to my name. But, before we can continue a Knightmare got in the place. I look at us for a while, then take the Poison Gas.


    The men that with me take out his helmet and show me that he is Suzaku! My childhood friend that I got when I was first sent to Japan.


    Lelouch:" Suzaku! You become Britannian soldiers?"


    Suzaku:" Yeah, I have! Anyway, what are you doing here? What do you think you are doing involving yourself with a Terrorist."


    Lelouch:" Sigh, I just got involved in this!" I said and start to narrate of how I got myself here.


    Suzaku:" I see, let''s get ourselves out of here then" he says and we left the place. Not long we arrive at Britannian camp when Suzaku suddenly got taken by Lloyd Asplund. He says that he needs him to be his test pilot.


    With nothing to do, I decided to stay around and see how this incident will end. When watching the video, I was blown away seeing how just one Knightmare annihilated Britannia Knightmare unit one by one until the white one that Suzaku was in block it.


    They fight for a while, but I can see that this unknown Knightmare was just playing around. And I was right when it feels bored it immediately disabled Suzaku Knightmare and finish it''s job before killing Clovis.


    COMMENT 18 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 61 - V 4 Ch 3

    Third POV


    Night after Shinjuku Ghetto incident Britannia was mourning. The news of the death of the Third Prince of Britannia, Prince Clovis la Britannia spread fast. Emperor of Britannia show himself in public, with all the music that makes his entrance more dramatic and give a feeling of sadness that also rousing the heart of listener. Emperor Charles Zi Britannia takes the podium and was about to start his speech when suddenly, everything went silent.


    Every Television''s channels and Internet Media in the world only show Black screen music went silent and with it every citizen that watch also went silent with it. Only the crew that takes the video proceeding of Charles''s speech went panic. Charles himself only frowns as he watches the screen in concentration, he knows that whatever it is that will happen will change everything. His guts feeling telling him that.


    Not long after, it lights up with a dimly glow showing a person who is clearly young from his body build. But his face was still hidden by the shadow of the light. At the back of his person shows a glorious flag with a word Hellsing in the middle of it. The setting makes it mysterious and dangerous vibe of it. Maybe feeling that he has built the tension enough that person speaks with a soft but frightening voice that contains anger and sadness within it touching the heart of the listener. This is Echo, he''s been unconsciously deployed his Haoshoku Haki and Empath ability through his voice. Making the listener felt awe and feel what he feels.


    "Hellsing, since long ago before great Britain was built, we fight a great evil that always threatened weak human. A freak monster that feasts on human blood from the shadow, spread fear, and terror. After the Great Britan was built we show our alliance to her majesty and become a sword that swore to cot down great evil and protect the weak. We had done that continuously along with the raises of Great Britain until 1999 a great war begins in Britain soil. With great difficulty, we fight off and exterminated the invader of our land. A group of Monster! Vampire, Ghoul, Were people, Werewolf, Enchanted Human, Cyborg. We fight and win! That is where we start our great prosperity. My invention brought great wealth to our country making us the wealthiest country in the world. We share our prosperity to the world bringing peace to the world. For thirty years we work and we succeed. I feel it was enough and decided to take a long sleep so I can see my future generations leaving my subordinate that faithfully protect my body in my sleep. Last year I woke up, only to see the peace that I fought for destroyed. In the hand of the country that I protect and raise with the invention I build. It gave me a sense of sadness and anger! After I defeat a great evil, I created something more terrible. Charles Zi Britannia, you say human was never born equal and I agree with that! But is it feel that great to Lord over it to the less fortunate? With Great Power Comes Great Responsibility is the word of wisdom that I hear from someone I respect. You have Great power Charles Zi Britania, but you never fulfill your responsibility for it. All it''s done from the wake of your reign is Conquest and Bloodshed. You''re no different from the Barbarian of the past that sought Conquest and wealth! You are no Emperor! Just a Barbarian that ?ust and greed are so great that you trample everything in your path. I, Echo Fairbrook Wingates Hellsing declare War to you! And will bring the hammer of justice to your head." he paused for a while, then continue again


    "This day the third prince of Britania has done something unforgivable. In order to hide his human Experimentation that was stolen, he orders the extermination of civilians to hide it. And we bring the hammer of Justice to him!" he said and show video of Clovis doing the deed that he just says making the watcher shocked.


    "Today, all military base of Britannia that is stationed in Japan has been taken over by me. From this day onward I will lead Japan to fight you Britannia and end your reign of terror!" finish his speech the screen was back to the previous channels showing Charles face that go from blank to anger as he order his subject to prepare for war.


    ---


    Echo:" Fuihh, how is it girl? Did my b*lshiting level gone up?"


    Hearing my word, they burst out laughing.


    Shiro:" Yeah, it''s good! You got us fooled if not for what you say just now!"


    Echo:" Hehe, good then! This means that others will likely believe it." we laugh and go to eat.


    ---


    Third POV


    The world was in turmoil from that declaration. Britannia starts to gather their military personnel and tried to contact their base in Area 11 or Japan to no avail.


    All enemy of Britannia was joyful seeing that Britannia just find himself an opponent of equal footing and hoping to join Hellsing from their endeavor in fighting Britannia. From what was shown in Videos, this Hellsing got a Knightmare that was more advance from Brittania.


    The Britannia citizen that lives in Area 11 Japan got restless about what their fate after Hellsing wrests control of Japan from Britannia.


    ---


    The next day, Echo was seen walking through the gate of Ashford Academy which makes students a bit scared. But, he didn''t do anything to them and that makes them feel relief a little. One Milly Ashford is quite brave that she talk to him and even joke that her initial guess when first meet was right that he is the real Echo from History.


    Looking around the campus for a while, he found Kallen and ask her to have a talk.


    Kallen:" So, What is the leader of Hellsing want with me?" she ask a little nervous.


    Echo:" Kallen Steadfelt, I want to recruit you in my Army!" he told her with a serious face.


    Kallen:" Ehh? Why would you want someone like me in your army? I am just a sickly high school student." hearing this echo smile which unnerved her.


    Echo:" I know that you are the one who pilots that red Glasslow from yesterday terrorism. Instead of doing something childish like why not work for me to make a better future? I will let you think of it. Here is my phone number, call me if you want to join." he said and left the school. Lelouch was watching him as he went through the gates. He wants to join him but his pride got in the way as he didn''t want to be the one who asks to join but being asked to join.


    COMMENT 22 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 62 - V 4 Ch 4

    After trying to recruit Kallen, Echo goes back to Hellsing base. Today, the Japanese old family wants to meet with us. They must be trying to join our group for this war. Well, not that I complain that I get human resources. As long as they follow my rule I don''t have a problem with it. I''ll let Integra deal with it, that is not my forte.


    While I let Integra do her job, I go to Shinjuku Ghetto and go around recruiting every able man and woman to work for me. I told them that as long as just only one of their family join my army. The life of the rest of their family will be guaranteed and I can even take them now back to my base and give them a proper home and easy access to food, job, and Education.


    Hearing my offers they got hooked and start to spread the news. Many Japanese Civilians that were all around Japan start to go to former Britannian embassy and military Barack to meet my man and sign themselves through them, and if they did not trust me afraid that this was a trap. They can just send one person with the list of the person that wants to sign in on their area.


    For the next week, I let out my spaceship piloted by our people to bring the new soldiers and their family members to my base. While I, Touka, and Shiro work around our base creating a town using our PSI power.


    We finished all of it in three days. With our level of power, we can do it easily and fast. All that left is furniture that I bring out from GoB and put it in every household.


    When the trainees come, we let their families choose their own place after signing document as not to get confused from not knowing data. The trainees immediately brought to the underground base and start being doctrine by us to stay loyal. After we bring them in and count how many we got from this recruitment and was satisfied that we got 25 thousand me recruit and that was enough.


    What I need is a loyal army, not a powerful one as I can easily make them powerful. But it was harder to get a loyal man. Three days after they come, I got called by Kallen telling me that she will join me but she wants to bring her comrades with her. Which I don''t mind, to be honest. as long as they follow my command and rules.


    After hearing her decision to join, I take out Guren and Lancelot from GoB, Guren for Kallen and Lancelot for C.C if she joins. I already upgrade it from its original design to follow our Knightmare specifications like changing its armor and engine so it now uses arc reactor and Adamantium armor. She is already here and starts her training in using Knightmare since a week ago with her comrades.


    In this past month, Britannia has been sending an army to harass us but it was useless with Kuro, Nana, Seras, and Frederica leading our initial army''s to repel them.


    Today, I was inside a room with a half ball something. It''s the sealed container of C.C and I have been putting it our off my mind with how busy this past month is.


    Getting close to it, I use Telekinesis to open it and from inside C.C comes out.


    C.C:" You! You destroy my plan. Our plan for me to be with Lelouch!"


    Echo:" You mean your plan with Marianne to use Lelouch to get your objectives? For you to pass on your immortality and die? Why is it that you want to die so much? Is it because you are lonely living your life alone? Without anyone to share with since every time you love someone they will outlive you!"


    Hearing my questions she stopped speechless since all my questions are spotted on.


    Echo:" Then you should stay with us! We won''t leave you alone and live long with you. I can even take away that immortality easily. In front of me, there will be no Immortals stay Immortals I can make them mortal again and kill them." I say with a smirk.


    C.C:" Hmph, We will see about that! For now, I will stay with you!" hearing her answer I smile.


    Echo:" You won''t be disappointed. Now, follow me meet with the others."


    After a month of being doctrine, the recruit was now loyal only to Hellsing and me. I then distributed the SS Serum and inject them with it. The day after they were injected with the SS Serum, I use Cerebro to send knowledge straight into their head. All they need after this is to train and make their knowledge into muscle memory. They also start to train in operating Knightmare. I gave them the latest Britannian Knightmare unit that I have inside GoB. It would be troublesome to upgrade all of them to our standard. It seems that the one that I upgrade and created was already counted as unique artifacts so the GoB won''t produce as many copies as I want. But the one created by Britannia is not, so I will just use the one I can easily obtain.


    Third POV


    Right now, in a stadium, there was a match. Between a red with gold lining Knightmare vs a black-white Knightmare. This was Guren and Lancelot after the upgrade. Echo change Lancelot color since it was already used by Suzaku.


    The match was intense, both parties were quite good at controlling their Knightmare. Around the stadium seated the Hellsing trainees soldiers as they watch the Knightmare fight. Today, they have a competition to get their rank in the army and this was the opening fight between Kallen and C.C.


    ---


    With Echo.


    Seras:" those two that you recruit are good, Echo-sama. Both were talented in using Knightmare. You really good at picking talent Echo-sama!" Seras speak as they were watching the fight in the VIP room.


    Echo:" Nah, I just know beforehand that they were good. Not that I have talent at picking talented personnel. Besides, even the untalented will become strong after I''m through with them."


    Seras:" You are right! Right now our Army, even though smaller than Britannia but compose of an elite soldier that can easily defeat any Britannia soldier." she said with a grin.


    Echo:" Well, in the first place. That SS Serum was our way to fight Vampire and Ghoul. So, using it to fight human was quite overpower."


    Touka:" then you have given them the latest model Knightmare that even Britannia hasn''t create!"


    Echo:" All is fair in love and war! They like to bully the weak. Let''s see how they feel when they were the weaker ones being bully. Heh."


    COMMENT 20 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 20 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 63 - V 4 Ch 5

    Third POV


    Three months after the tournament. There are many skirmishes with Britannia and now after all this time Hellsing was ready for war and they start to send their army to Brittanian soil.


    They were intercepted by the Britannia army at the Chinese soil and they start to fight there. It was such a one-sided war. Even though Britannia brought out their newest Knightmare they would be defeated by a red Knighmare from Hellsing side which leads the army. It was Kallen who riding Guren.


    ---


    Echo was on an airship watching monitor showing all the fight between them and Britannia. Kallen was at the front along with C.C behind her. Chinese feeling that this was a chance to get revenge on Britannia decides to do a guerilla tactic and target their command post just to make their life harder while they are dealing with Hellsing.


    After three days of continuous fight. Hellsing won and able to capture Cornelia li Britannia. She was defeated by C.C and was brought to airship by her alive. Right now she was put into the jail in the airship.


    Shiro:" It''s boring! After fighting with Mecha for a while, I like fighting with my body better than this." Shiro said while looking at the monitor.


    Echo:" Yeah, that why we have to hurry to defeat Britannia. So, we can leave this world one for all!" he answers her and this makes her excited about hurry up and ends the war.


    Shiro:" I will go end help them up then so we can hurry and leave! Kurona, let''s go!" she said and brought Kurona with her. Touka, seeing them leave decide to follow them along with Seras and Frederica. Nana and Integra stay with Echo in the airship.


    With the girls goes into the warzone, the war was going along smoothly with them helping around. They continue to advance from China to India and lastly they arrived at EU.


    It was in the EU that they have to slow down a bit since Britannia starts to send many Geass users with a new Knightmare unit. They were led by Schneizel el Britannia which is quite good at using tactics.


    But, after a week of meet up with him, they were able to defeat him. His tactic might be able to easily defeat an opponent who was as strong as them or a little stronger than them. But, it was useless with someone that is too much stronger than them.


    Schneizel died when Touka shot down his airship accidentally. Right after there is no command from him. Their army was easily brought down even with the Geass users.


    ---


    Arriving at Britannia they quickly defeat the Knight of Round and capture all prince and princess. V.V and Charles were nowhere to be seen.


    Echo:" C.C, can you tell me the way to C world? I''m sure that those two brothers were there!"


    C.C:" Sure, follow me!" she said as she led Echo toward the castle.


    Arriving at the C world, he could see Charles looking up all alone with his back on him.


    Charles:" We would never have thought that our ambition will be crushed by our own ancestors. But, I will never give up! I will defeat you Echo Fairbrook Wingates Hellsing!" he said, and look toward Echo. Then use his Geass to him which is useless since he was immune to it, with his strong mind.


    Echo:" It''s useless Charles you petty power will not work on me!" he says and starts to walk toward Charles. As he was in front of him he hit him and brought him to his knees. He then starts to steal his power and life force killing him in the process.


    He then uses his new power from Geass Code and connects himself to the C world. There he was met with his two rather long times acquaintance. They were Alucard and the Major.


    Major:" Hehehe, never thought that the kid from Hellsing was still alive to this day!" said Major in a condescending sneer.


    Alucard:" Kukuku, my master won''t be defeated with your petty trick Major!" Alucard says as he was chained on something.


    Echo:" Ugh, never thought I would meet you here Major! Alucard, what happened that makes you lose to this looser and get chained like that?" Echo shout at him.


    Alucard:" Hmph, it was not him that has done something like this. It was the work of that mad God that says I still haven''t finished my punishment for forsaking him!"


    Echo:" I see, it seemed that this world God always meddle with mortal business. I''ll put him down for this then!"


    he says and from his Gate of Babylon comes out Enkidu and it shoots out to the sky and toward the Major. Feeling that it caught something. He tugs it down and brings down God with it. Using many of his God slayer weapon. He shoots it toward God and kills it. He looks at Major and also kills him.


    Echo:" So, Alucard! Do you want to be back to the living world?"


    Alucard:" Kukuku, nope! With the Gods gone. I will just stay here for a while before I got erased from the world. I want my rest which I thought I would get after our fight."


    Echo:" I see, we will not able to see each other again then since I will also leave this world shortly!"


    Alucard:" Yeah, it is a farewell, My Master!" Echo nodded and go back to the real world and close the connection from the C world to earth. C.C follows him back to the Castle. After this they start to take over Britannia and stop all invasion. For the country that has been conquered by Britannia. They were brought in but without segregation and caste system between them. Everyone of them is Britannian citizen and have the same right.


    At first, Echo thought about letting them go. But, with them not having any military to protect themselves and was left alone for another country to take if he let them be independent. So, he decides to just take them in.


    ---


    Ten years passed and Britannia has become stable after his and the girl''s hard work on making the peace stay long.


    Having felt that he finished his mission on this world and feeling enough of work. He left the Britannia in the hand of Cornelia and Euphemia to take care off. While he left the world taking Integra, Seras, C.C, and Kallen with him.


    He tried to go back to his original world only to have the world reject him and kill him for it. Then he was reborn in a new world with the girls follow him.

 Chapter 64 - V 5 Ch 1

    AN: I will change the format of my writing to be the same with my other novel A Certain Scientific Void Empress.


    ---------------------------------------------


    Echo PoV


    I woke up and was ?ssaulted with new memories. It seems I died when I tried to cross over to my first life world. Before I died I catch a glimpse that my Earth was like a hub that connects to the multiverse. By seeing the connection I now have saved their coordinates. This way, I will be able there later with my power.


    Now, let''s leave that for later! I have to reorganize my mind and look over my memories to know where am I.


    Seeing my new memory I find out that I was in One Piece world. Born as the first son of King Riku from Dresrossa. I was three years younger than Scarlett and three years older than Viola. I am six years old now, two years before Pirate King''s death. My name is Echo Doldo.


    I use my connection to the girl to found out where they are and found out we are all scattered around the world. Kuro and Shiro were triplets in this life, they are now at Wano Country as the triplets sister of Kozuki Hiyori. From what they say, they are on a run now after Toki sent Momonosuke to the future. I told then to hide for a while and I will Teleport to their place and take them out of there.


    Touka was at the place where she thrives in, She is at Weatheria, one of the sky islands. I told her that she should visit Birkan and took Goro Goro no Mii.


    Integra and Seras were at Water Seven as an orphan and I told them to rule that place. Frederica is at Alabasta as the little sister of Prince Nefertari Cobra. I told her to start to recruit orphans of the country to build a secret Army. I will help her train them later.


    Nana was at Kuen Village, North Blue. It was the Village where Baby 5 was born. I told her to stay there for a while and take Baby 5 later.


    Kallen was in East Blue Logue Town. The last C.C was in West Blue Ohara. I decide to take her and Nico Robin three months before the Buster Call. After confirming their location I send them Rokushiki, Sword Training, Hashoken, and Haki manual so they can start to train in it.


    I get out of my bed and take a bath. After that i goes to the dining room to eat breakfast with my family.


    "Echo, today was your Birthday. What do you want as a gift?" my new father King Riku ask me.


    "I want to build a secret Army! I want to recruit an orphan to work for me as my secret army!" I told him making him shocked and stop eating.


    "Why is that? We are a peaceful country and I don''t advocate war!" he asks seriously


    "Father, I just read a book and there is a quote that stuck in my mind and it was quite a wise word." I say equally seriously.


    "Ohh, pray to tell your father what it says that makes you want to make an Army."


    "It says, ''A king must not seek for war, but he also has to be prepared for it!''. I know our country is peaceful, but we also have to be prepared in case some unforeseen event that will force us to fight." I say seriously, after taking a quote from MCU Odin.


    "Hmm, that''s quite a wise word and I have to agree with that. It seems you take your role as crown prince seriously." said King Riku with a smile.


    "Of course, I will make this country prosperous." I answer him with confidence.


    "Hahahaha, I was blessed with a good successor." he laughs while my mother and Scarlett smile at us while Viola looks at us with confusion.


    ---


    Ten years time skip


    Two days after the conversation with my father, I brought Shiro, Kuro, and Hiyori to Dresrossa. My father started to take in Orphan for me to build my Army, we got 60 orphans.


    Four years after that I bring C.C and Robin to Dresrossa. Three years after that I bring back Nana with five years old Baby 5 which we change her name to Shiina.


    While doing all that, I go around searching for orphans all around the world. The easiest place where I got an orphan is from Wano as right now that country is in turmoil because of Orochi and Kaido. Next is Kuen Village where they usually abandon their child. The last I get the slaves that running away when Fisher Tiger running amock, I take only the one that doesn''t have a place to go. It was there that I met with Boa Sister and help them out. I even help removed the Slaves seal on them and make Amazon Lilies one of my allies.


    I use Denial of Nothingness and make Capt. Jack Sparrow Compass. I use it to find Monet and Sugar and also Yami Yami no Mii which I exchange with a poisoned fruit that I make to look like Yami Yami no Mii, I don''t need Kurohige in this adventure. I also recruit Jewelry Bonney and Law when I met them. While I am at it, I also collected Devil Fruit that I know of. Like Arm fruit, Snow, bomb, ope, hobby, and time fruit. I have a copy of it in my GoB but I just want to collect it as I go looking for member of my Army.


    In these ten years Integra and Seras also successfully control half of water seven. It won''t be long before they control it fully. I send them a Blueprint that I make to change water seven into a floating island.


    Frederica take my advice and build her own Army, she got around 2000 of them with the weakest at Commodore level and the strongest is Admiral level. Alabasta give her title a Battle Princess for it.


    Kallen was training swordsmanship in Shimotsuki Village. She was there to prevent Kuina''s death. It was a waste of talent that she died young.


    ---


    When I was 18 years old. My father gets down from the throne and makes me into a King. Frederica was representing Alabasta to attend my Ascension. We make it that way so we can meet and act that we got in love and become a fiancee then make an alliance with the Alabasta Kingdom. We make a trade with each other helping each other economic situation.


    Since I was a King I make so many changes to Dresrossa making my Kingdom Advance. My secret Army has reached the number of 750 Elite which I train up to the Vice-Admiral level with ten at Admiral level. I even gave them devil fruit. 300 of them got themselves a Zoan with Insect power, human-size Insect is overpowered especially when you got an ancient one. Another 150 got themselves Paramecia while the last 300 choose to not have the devil fruit with 200 of them becomes a Master Swordsman, the majority of them so the one I took from Wano. I got them to train in Rokushiki and Haki. It was easy to make them proficient in it. I''m not a demon instructor for nothing. I also train the average Army that was not hidden but integrated into our Kingdom for public Their numbers reached 5000 in total, the majority of them are at the rear admiral level.


    COMMENT 47 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 47 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 65 - V 5 Ch 2

    Echo PoV


    Two months after my Ascension to the throne. I was working at my office when someone knocked and got in. I look up to see Viola come in with two years old Rebecca with her. She is Scarlett and Kyros''s daughter and my cousin. In canon they hide their relationship and live outside the castle. But, with me here they don''t have to do that.


    "Viola, why is Rebecca with you?" I ask confused.


    "I was asked to take care of her by mom. Scarlett and Kyros go on a date on mom orders while mom who are going to take care of her got something to do at the last moment." she answers and gave Rebecca to me which I received.


    "Hello, Becky! Want to play with uncle?" I ask her with her nickname that I made up which make her laugh.


    Looking at the paperwork and then to Becky. I decided to left it and play with her. Two hours after playing with Becky, mom is back and takes her away and scold me for leaving my job which I say I''ll finish it later.


    ---


    Two days later, I order hundreds of my secret forces to go around the world recruiting people to work for me. But, never let someone know about it.


    This was for information network which works consist of. First is to search for information, second to sell information that can be made money, third spread information that will make our enemy look bad which will be World Govt and Marine if they cross me.


    I also sent out Hundreds last batch of recruit which at age range of 10 to 12 to infiltrate marine and World Government which is CP group. After making them loyal to Dresrossa and me of course. I train them to just enough for Marine and World Govt to look at them for now. I can enhance their strength again later after they join for them to get promoted.


    ---


    Three days later, I thought of which DF to eat. Ito ito no Mii is a must since I was a string user. Besides, I want to see Doflaminggo face when he sees me using the same power as him which I''m sure that I was the better user. Next is Fuwa Fuwa no Mii which is, for in the chance that the world government decides to attack us, Last is Buki Buki no Mii I''ll be a better user than Baby 5 or Shina now her name is. Okay, that''s it for now! I''m still not interested in Logia or Zoan.


    I take out the DF and start to eat it without tasting it. I''m not a m?s??h?st to taste it. Speaking of taste what happens to Touka when she eats it? Her tongue is close to God Tongue. I''m sure she''s suffering from eating it. Let''s check!


    "Touka! I just want to know. What happens when you eat the Goro Goro no Mii? How did you deal with the taste?" I ask her through Telepathy.


    "You ask this now? I never eat it of course! Like hell I make myself suffer eating something disgusting for a power that I already have. You must be not thinking when you gave me that order." ugh, that sting. I really did not think about it as she was close to the place and I just tell her to take it.


    "Uhh, sorry about that. I just remember about it right after I eat it myself." I says, feeling a little guilty.


    "Sigh, maybe next time we should think of the plan together instead of you shouldering it alone." she says with a sigh.


    "Okay, we will just do that. You still want to stay at Weatheria? Or should I bring you here?" I ask her.


    "Hmm, take me there! I''m bored staying here." she said, and I teleported to her location and bring her back with me.


    After that, I test all my DF power and got satisfied. I try touching SeaStone and it did not affect me. I go to the sea and it also did not affect me. Which is good that I have perfect body.


    That night is a night of passion between me, Touka and the twins. It''s been a while since it was only the four of us. Hearing this Nana and C.C comes the next day for their turn.


    Three months later, I was in the middle of the sea. Fishing Bonbori With Pure Gold, I''m going to give it to the girl so we can stay young forever as long as we wear it. But I''m afraid that Bonbori will come after them so I will kill it first.


    Bonbori comes out and I caught it with telekinesis. I absorb it''s life force killing it after an hour of work. Inside the Bonbori there are two life force which I exclude from my life Steal power. After Bonbori dead all that left is it''s bones and an island inside it''s stomach, also the two life inside it. Myskina Olga and her father Myskina Acier.


    I feel it a waste to just throw away the land. So I bring it back to Dresrossa to expand our island. Bringing the father and daughter also with me.


    ---


    After arriving at Dresrossa and put the island next to Dresrossa I send Telepathy to the twin so they told my Family and Citizens of Dresrossa that it was my work. So, they don''t have to be afraid. After that, I go meet with the Myskina''s.


    I teleport to Olga then teleport again to Acier.


    "Wha-Where is this? Who is the two of you?" ask Olga while Acier just look at Olga shocked.


    "Hello Myskina Olga and Acier! My name is Echo, I already killed the Bonbori and brought this Island close to my kingdom. If you want, you can stay in my kingdom." I told them.


    "What? You are the one who kills the Bonbori? So, what your motive in inviting us? If it Pure Gold you want. I don''t have it." Acier asks a little wary.


    "oohh, This person is the one who kills Bonbori? I can use him to protect me and give me food. I have to use my cute face to control him!" Olga said thinking that she just thought it out.


    "I can hear that!" I told her


    "Oohhh!" she shouts shocked.


    "Anyway, I don''t need Pure Gold since I have many of it to make every citizen in my kingdom have eternal youth. I just offer you protection since if word about you comes out. World Government and Pirates won''t stop hunting you." I told them.


    "Now, come with me if you want to stay. You will also be trained by my Army for a while, Acier! You are too fat. Also, Olga should take off her ring so she can grow up normally. As for her illness that you and your wife to prevent is already has a cure. So, it''s okay!" I say and walk off to Dresrossa with them following me and Olga realize that her parents creating Pure Gold was to save her which maker her cry a little.


    COMMENT 22 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 22 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 66 - V 5 Ch 3

    Two months have passed since the Myskina father and daughter live in Dresrossa. Acier got himself buffs up from all the training he gets himself in, gone is all the fat he accumulates in his 400 years life inside Bonbori''s.


    Olga got her illness cured and also start to train herself after seeing all the girls close to Echo was strong.


    The island that now southwest of Dresrossa was cleaned up from any dangerous beast which Echo relocated to another place. Right now, there were many people who were working to develop a town over there.


    ---


    Echo was training he let Robin help him with paperwork, like hell he torture himself with that kind of deskwork. He''s an outdoor person except for an experiment he didn''t want to work indoor.


    "You ditch your work to Robin again!" said Viola as she walks toward him with Scarlett, Kyros, and Rebecca.


    " It''s okay, I trust her to do the job and report to me later. It''s not my thing to work indoor like that. Kyros, come! have a duel with me!" Echo smiled as he invited Kyros for a duel.


    "Haha, Echo-sama likes to be with soldiers more than staying in a room fighting paperwork." Kyros laughs as he takes a sword and making stance in front of Echo.


    "Heh, you know me. Now, let''s start our spar!" he said and start to take a stance.


    Kyros has sparred with Echo so many times. He knows that Echo''s main weapon was Strings he also has a solid Martial Arts and also good at using a sword. Seeing his stance Kyros knows that this is a pure Martial Arts stance.


    Kyros move and he suddenly appear in front of Echo. Sword is drawn and brought down toward Echo who just dodges him easily. Echo who was now at Kyros'' sides punches him with a fast jab to the rib which Kyros block using the flat side of his sword.


    Seeing that he got blocked, Echo did not relent and start to bombard Kyros with punch after punch. Being occupied by Echo punch, Kyros did not realize that his feet are kicking toward him which make him fly from the force. After that he follows just as Kyros land, Echo was already in front of him with his hand on Kyros throats in a knife position.


    "You are too strong, Echo-Sama! Even if you only use Martial Arts, you can already take out average Vice Admirals." He said as they walk to Scarlett, Viola, and Rebecca."You also feel so experience in combat, even though I never seen you go out fight in a life and death fight that it''s weird." he continues while looking puzzled.


    "Hahaha, that''s good then. This way I can protect this Kingdom easily." he answers while laughing."Now, Becky come and play with uncle!" he says looking at Rebecca.


    "No!" she answers and look away.


    "Eehhh, why? Did uncle do something that makes you mad?" he asks.


    "Stink." she said while hiding her face in Scarlett''s br??st.


    "ugh, maybe I have to go take a bath now. What all of you be doing now?" he asks them.


    "We will go around until Rebecca tired."


    "Okay then. See you later." Echo then left them to their own device.


    ---


    Five months later, Echo goes to Alabasta to get Frederica''s hand of Marriage from King Nefertari Cobra.


    "So, in your Ascension to the throne. You meet with my sister who goes to Dresrossa representing Alabasta to attend your Coronation and the two of you fell in love?"


    "Yes, and now I want her as my Queens!" Echo answers with a firm voice.


    This was part of his plan to make strong ties with Alabasta.


    "Hahaha, I like you! If my tomboy of a sister got herself a man. Who am I to prevent it? We agree, please take care of my sister!" Cobra says as he bows toward Echo.


    "Now now, this is not good at all! You can''t bow to me as we essentially a family when I marry Frederica." he says with a smile.


    "Hahaha, you are right. Now, tell the chef that we got a party today!" said Cobra, he was so happy that his tomboy sister got herself a man. It was quite hard to get her like someone as her requirements are too high.


    Now, she got herself a king of another Kingdom and they also love each other. How can he not be happy? Now, he can breathe a little easy with her away as he was a little tired of her shenanigans.


    "You must thought that you get rid of me!" said Frederica in a haughty tone." too bad for you, I will stay here even if I''m married to watch over this country and not to let my Army grow weaker." she says.


    "Ehhh, don''t you want to stay with your husband? Also it is not good for a queen of another country to not stay on their country!" said Cobra a little afraid.


    "Ohh, that! You don''t have to worry about that. Echo can send me here every morning and let me work using his teleportation ability." she said with a smile making Cobra feel despair.


    ---


    He can change his body to any weapon based on science no matter how strong it is. Right now he changes his hand into a Railgun and starts firing to a pirate ship that was blocking their way. The result, anything around 10 km is obliterated and the sea was cut into two parts for a while.


    He tried to change into a weapon like Noble Phantasm which he can''t. He thought that he has to awaken the fruit for it to happen. Maybe he can even make a conceptual weapon or detached it from his body not like now where he changed his body into the weapon.


    ---


    Echo PoV


    Since I was in the first half. Let''s go visit Integra and Seras for a bit. Although I always visit them using teleportation. Visiting them this way is more fun as I don''t have to hide myself to not let others know my ability.


    Although it was useless now that Alabasta knows my ability. I''m sure it won''t be long before it was spread. But I''m not afraid anymore since My Army is already prepared and I''m strong enough.


    Not long we arrive at Water Seven and Seras already waiting at the Dock to tell us where to Dock our ship.


    "Welcome to Water Seven Echo-sama!" said Seras.


    "Seras, how many times do I have to tell you to call me Echo. You''re one of my girls now!" I told her.


    "Hehehe, it''s just a force of habit. I can''t change fast."answer Seras


    "Ohh, come on!! It''s already been 22 years since you become one of my girls!" I said and she just smiles at me. I think it was her way to tease me or maybe her fetish.


    "Anyway, let''s go meet Integra!" I say and we go to Integra office.


    COMMENT 24 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 24 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 67 - V 5 Ch 4

    As soon as Echo gets inside Integra office he got himself glomp by Integra.


    "Echo!!! I miss you so much." Integra said as she drags Echo to the sofa and puts him in a ??p pillow.


    "We just not see each other for a week Integra!" Echo said as he looked up at her.


    Now, Integra already becomes the Mayor of Water 7 and she already starts to change Water 7 according to Echo Blueprint.


    "So, how long will you stay?" asked Integra excitedly.


    "hmm, a week maybe! I can just teleport if there is something urgent. For now, I am having a holiday!" Echo answers making Integra smile. Even though he can just visit her via teleportation it''s just not the same with him visit normally.


    The next day, Echo was touring around Water 7 and see a sight that he once watches in anime. Tom with his two apprentices working on making Sea Train in one of the Dock. He thought for a while and realize that this year was the last year of Tom''s deadline to get a pardon for his crime in making Oro Jackson.


    Echo thinks for a while if he has to interfere with this incident before deciding to let it be and save Tom after faking his death. It''s not worth it to antagonizing World Govt now for a stranger. But, it is a waste to just let him died so he will fake his death. Besides if he saves him now there might be no Cyborg Franky in the future because of it.


    Back at Integra office after a day of touring around.


    "So, How was your day? Are you having fun?" asks Integra.


    "Hmm, it was good and I see something interesting. How about you two?" Echo asks after answering her.


    "Boring, it was the same as when we still manage Hellsing. Now, that you already having fun for the day. You have to have fun with us from now on!" Said Integra ?ustfully with Seras looking at Echo predatory. That night Echo stamina was tested by Super-Soldier Integra and Super-Vampire Seras.


    ---


    The next morning there is a commotion as he woke up in the Mayor''s office with Integra and Seras. They get dressed and walk out to ask about what happened.


    "What happens here that you lot make a ruckus about!" shout Integra clearly annoyed that her cuddles time with Echo was interrupted.


    "Integra-sama, There are people from the World Government comes to talk about Tom''s work on the Sea Train!" said one of Integra workers.


    "Ohh, and what is the ruckus about? You can just tell them to wait!" she says clearly not in her right mind now.


    "Now now Integra, you know how unreasonable World Govt Dog can be. Let''s see what do they want here and they still annoying after that we can just secretly kill them out of this island!" Echo tries to make her calm down before whispering the last part of his sentence.


    Integra hearing it smiles and nodded to him.


    "Alright, Let''s see what did the want here. You want to come with me Echo?" she asks.


    "Nah, I''m a king from another kingdom. It''s not good for me to barge in a discussion for another place. Just tell me about it after this." Echo told her.


    While Integra was meeting with WG agents, Echo spread his Observation Haki around Water 7 and it''s surrounding. He has quite a reach having lived for so long.


    He was able to see that the one Integra was meeting was Spandam and there are many agents around Tom''s shipyard observing him.


    Not long Spandam left Integra office with his arrogant manner toward the shipyard. Integra watch as he left and reveal a cold glint in her eyes.


    "So, he is annoying?" Echo asks as he appeared beside her.


    "He is imbecile Echo-sama!" Seras answer him with a huff. "For someone who rides on his parent coattails, he''s so arrogant that I want to put a bullet in his head." she continues obviously quite angry.


    "He has to die, Echo!" only now that Integra speaks.


    "Okay! I got a good way to kill him without making it suspicious of us. Just stay in the Mayor''s office for a while for an alibi!" he says still following Spandam with his Observation Haki.


    He watches as Spandam throwing his weight around toward Tom''s and his worker. Franky who is young can''t take it anymore and hit Spandam with a rifle. Spandam left after making threats to them.


    When nighttime close to morning, Spandam steals one of Franky battleships and goes off to the sea. Echo follows him using Geppo and three hours later, around one km in front of them is a convoy of a ship.


    Seeing this, Echo knows that this was the ship of Jury that Spandam attack to frame Tom''s worker especially Franky. Echo goes toward the ship and uses his string to control the soldiers manning the ship. When Spandam attacks them suddenly, Echo controls the soldiers to strike back with superior accuracy and hit the ship right where Spandam is Killing him in the process.


    After that, he just left it alone for them to investigate who was inside the ship. He thought that with this he will change history since Tom''s worker won''t be charged with a false crime making Tom giving himself to be killed.


    But, after finding that Spandam was working for WG, the Jury got scared and decide to frame Franky for killing Spandam with his ship.


    "Wao, here I thought he will escape his fate after I killed that trash Spandam. Who thought that it will become like this." murmured Echo as he watches the drama.


    "Yeah, he is really unlucky that even after being helped he still got framed." Seras says as she also watches along with Echo.


    "What is Integra doing now?" he asks.


    "She stays in the office as you ask her Echo-sama!" she answers and they continue to observe.


    As the Jury about to give judgment to Franky and the others. Tom come and start to shout that he was the one that builds the ship like how he build Pirate King ship and he was proud of it making the surrounding goes restless. After hearing it the Jury decides to capture just him and bring him to Enies Lobby.


    "Sigh, it seems I have to fake his death after this. I want him to work for me." whisper Echo.


    Puffing Tom''s, the first Sea Train left with its first job is to send its creators to Jail. Franky goes in the middle of the rails trying to stop it and was hit by the train, his fate unknown.


    After seeing all this, Echo slips himself into the train and arrived at Tom''s cell which is not watched by a guard.


    "Hello Tom!" greet Echo.


    "Who are you? I''ve seen you once in Water 7 when you see us working." Tom asked


    "Hoo, you remember me from all the people that going around that day?"


    "How can I not! You stuck out like a sore thumb."


    "I see, anyway! I come here to invite you to my kingdom. You don''t have to be afraid of the World Government again since we will fake your death here."


    "Can you really do that?" he asked a little skeptical.


    " it''s easy! Just let me do the job!" he says and they teleported to Dresrossa leaving behind the fake corpse of Tom who bit his tongue.


    "You stay here in my Kingdom from now on." he says as he looks around and sees Robin. "Robin! Please take care of this person''s accommodation and hide him for a while. I have to go back to Water 7 for now. Tom, please follow after Robin for a while. Don''t wander around until I get back." Echo told them and teleport back to Water 7.


    COMMENT 14 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 14 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 68 - V 5 Ch 5

    It was four months after the Water 7 incident and today was Echo''s wedding day with Frederica.


    The mood is festive and everyone is happy with the celebration especially Dresrossa citizens as they get a new Queen for their kingdom. Cobra is also happy for his sister whom he worried all this time due to her personality making her hard getting a boyfriend.


    Echo other girls were jealous at Frederica for her wedding ceremony with Echo. Except for Touka and the Twins since they already experience it. The one who the most Jealous is Integra who declared that she will be next! they party for a week and it was done without an accident.


    ---


    After their wedding, everything back to normal and now we find Echo training his DF power. He succeeded in awakening his String String and Float Float Devil Fruit. It won''t be long before he awakens his Arm Arm DF.


    He gave the Time Time fruit to Hiyori as it was her mother''s power before she died. The girls decide not to eat a Devil Fruit and just developed their own power except for C.C who ate the Bomb Bomb Devil Fruit.


    Integra after developing her PSI get power like Junas where she can create a physic blade. Seras got her Vampiric power enchanted and she is now as strong as Alucard at his peak.


    Kallen got herself become the strongest Swordswoman after two years going around the world after her sixteenth birthday as Bounty Hunter and become Kuina''s idol for her achievements.


    She duels Dracule Mihawk and got a draw from it and they decide to retrain for the next duel while also look after Kuina who is now eight years old and trains her.


    In her journey, there are many times that the Marine comes and invites her to join them. She declines them with a reason that she already tied to Dresrossa Kingdom as Echo''s concubine and they stop their attempt after hearing her answer and confirmed it with Echo.


    ---


    Shimotsuki Village with Kallen.


    "Kallen-nee, why''s dad always say that I can''t become his heir because I''m a girl when you can become the strongest swordswoman. I hate him!" the eight years old Kuina cried in Kallen''s ??p as she says her frustration to her.


    "I don''t know what Kyoshiro-san thinking but your nee-san believe that you can achieve your dreams and become a strong swordswoman." Kallen said to her giving her encouragement.


    "Really? Why not strongest Swordswoman then?" she asked.


    "Hehe, that because you have to surpass me first for you to achieve it and I''m not letting you surpass me." she said with a smirk which ignites Kuina rivalries and fighting spirit.


    "Hmph, just you see! I will train so hard and surpassed you, It''s a promise!" she shouts while raising her fists up.


    "Hehe, then I will wait for you and stay at my peak power so you can come take the title from me!" she said with a smile.


    "Yeah! It''s a promise okay. I won''t forgive you if you get defeated before fighting me!" Kuina says with a smile.


    "Okay okay, now let''s get back to training! I''ll also change your diet so you can easily get strong." Kallen said after deciding to ask Echo for help in getting food to help Kuina get strong. While Kuina was training herself she closes her eyes and contacts Echo.


    "Echo, can you help me to train Kuina? She wants to become strong and surpass me and I want to help her." she said through her bond with Echo.


    "Kallen! Of course, I can. I will send you Nutrition Serum and Healing Pool for you to train her at maximum. I also need your help, there is a girl that looks like Kuina twin but younger in your hometown Logue town. I want you to train her along with Kuina. Also, if they want. You can also take them here to Dresrossa." he answers her.


    "Okay, just send it here then while I will go to Logue Town to search for her." she said and cut the connection.


    "Well, you don''t have to do that as I''m going to go there and take her." says Echo who suddenly appear behind her surprising her.


    "Echo! Don''t just go appeared out of nowhere like that! You almost give me a heart attack!" she said pouting at Echo.


    "Hehe, I just want to surprise you!" he said and kiss her making her blush.


    Kuina who sees Echo appear out of nowhere and get intimate with Kallen stop her training and walk toward them.


    "Nee-san, who is he? Is he your boyfriend?" she asks with a smile.


    "Yeah, I''m her boyfriend. My name is Echo, nice to meet you Kuina-chan!" Echo answer her with a smile.


    "Heee, how did you know my name?" she asks


    "I heard about you from Kallen." he answer.


    "Really? Why did she never mention you? Also, how did you suddenly appear like that? Did you come here to take her away? I won''t let you!" she said and start to fire off questions after question.


    "She never mentions me because I told her not to. I appear here using my power to teleport when she asks me to help train you and I also want her to train someone along with you who looks so much like you. Do you want to meet her?" he asks her.


    "Really? Are you strong that even nee-san ask you for help? Someone who looks like me? Is there someone like that? I want to meet her." she said excitedly.


    "Good, let''s go then! We will go and bring her here." he said and stretched out his hand for her to take.


    "I''m going to wait here and inform Kyoshiro about your departure." Kallen said and left them.


    "Okay, see you in a few minutes." Echo said and they disappear from the island.


    ---


    In Logue Town, in front of one of an orphanage. Echo and Kuina appear suddenly. After appearing there he walk to the orphanage and knocked on the door and was greeted by the Orphanage matron.


    "Hello, what can we help you?" asked the matron.


    "Hello, my name is Echo. I''m searching for a girl named Tashigi to have her join my family. I heard that she was here." he answer and the matron look at him, then she looks at Kuina and she was surprised because she looks so much like Tashigi just without her glasses.


    "Please come in, wait for a minute while I go look for Tashigi-chan!" she said and run inside.


    Not long after, she was back. With Tashigi along with her. Kuina look at Tashigi and was surprised at how similar their looks are, Tashigi also look at Kuina with a shocked face making Echo smile looking at them.


    "Nice to meet you Tashigi-chan, my name is Echo and this is Kuina. I''m here to take you, do you want to come with us?" he says while he sits down to match her height.


    "Ummm, Nice to meet you Echo-san. Why do you want to take me?" she asks.


    "Because I want you to be with Kuina-chan here. Don''t you want to play with her?" he asks and Tashigi smiles at the thought of playing with Kuina who looks so much like her. After a while, she nodded and decided to follow them.


    After signing the paperwork Echo took both of them back to Shimotsuki village. He stays there for a while building the training hall for them and left Kallen with the Nutrition Serum and so much food that he created with GoB function using Sea King meat with rare herb and vegetables which is nutritious. Of course he makes them for girls so it can help them stronger but not sacrificing girls natural beauty.


    COMMENT 22 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 22 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 69 - V 5 Ch 6

    Arriving at Shimotsuki Kuina immediately left Echo and brought Tashigi to her home to meet her father and surprise him.


    "Dad! Where are you! Look I got a new sister!" she said while looking around the dojo.


    "Don''t run around and shout like that! It''s unbecoming." he scolded as he comes out along with Kallen. His face still has a smile as he scolded her but change to shocked when he sees Tashigi.


    "Who is this? Last time I check I don''t have another daughter and you are not a twins!" he said still in shock.


    "Hehehe, this is Tashigi! Echo-san take me to bring her here!" she said and pushed Tashigi in front of her to let her father look at her.


    "And where is this Echo-san you talk about? From what Kallen told me, he is her Lover!" he asked with raised eyebrows.


    "Hmm, He said he is going to build a training place for me and Tashigi!" She said nervously as she forgot about him as soon as they arrived in the village and left him like that.


    "Hoo, so it''s not because you left me because you got excited?" asked Echo as he walked into the dojo and hearing his question make her embarrassed.


    "Sorry, I get too excited." she said with a red face.


    "Haha, it''s okay! Anyway like you said I''ll go build the training place. It was nice to meet you Kyoshiro -san, thanks for having Kallen-chan all this time as it was me who orders her to train here." he said to Kyoshiro.


    " It''s okay! She is a delight to teach." he says with a smile.


    "Anyway, I''ll go first as I''m going to build the training place! Kallen, follow me!" Echo says and left the dojo.


    He stays for a while, building the training hall and left after giving Kallen a spatial ring with anything she will need for training.


    ---


    Third PoV


    Four years have passed since he gets Tashigi. Now, Echo was 22 years old. Two years after Kallen start training both Kuina and Tashigi, they visit Dresrossa to fix Tashigi eyesight since it was quite a nuisance for her making her clumsy.


    A few years ago, the World Government start to implement Warlord system and recruit a few pirates to their cause. Which is Donquixote Doflaminggo, Hawkeyes Mihawk, Bartholomew Kuma, Crocodile, Jinbei, and Gekko Moria. Hancock did not join or even become a pirate on Echo order. He can help them for livelihood so they did not have to resort to piracy.


    Why did we talk about it now? Because Doflamingo arrived in Dresrossa and now have a meeting with Echo and the rest of Royal Family.


    "So, you come here to take over my Kingdom and make me a villain for it?" He said with a cold face.


    "fufufufufu, and what of it? It''s the roles of the world that the weak get stomp and the strong triumph." he said arrogantly making Kyros mad and was about to attack but was hold by Scarlett since she know her brother can handle it.


    "Hehehe, you says that like you are strong when I see you as the weak one here. You think just because you got the WG backing that I''m afraid to make a move on you? Even if it was the WG itself that came and make a trouble I still won''t look at them as an equal! You are beneath me, trash!" Echo says with a smile while looking down on Doflamingo.


    Hearing his word make Doflamingo angry and he starts to attack him and the rest of his family with his string. But, it was blocked by Echo with his own string which surprised Doflamingo.


    Echo uses Soru and kicks Doflamingo out of the castle and shout.


    "Dresrossa Army, capture any Donquixote pirates on our land! Their captain tried to kill the Royal Family and take the Kingdom by force. They say they got the backing of the World Government and they are above law!" shout Echo and every soldier on Dresrossa start to capture every Donquixote pirates. While this happens, Shiro and Kuro were streaming all of this to the world.


    Doflamingo gets up from his place and starts to attack Echo again with his strings which Echo just slapped it away with his Armament clad hand. Since he can''t let the world know that he has the same ability as Doflamingo.


    Doflamingo thanks to his Observation Haki clad his inside with haki even thought just a little he gets to minimize the damaged to his body. But, Echo was relentless. Before he even gets to oriented himself Echo already gave him three more strikes which hit Doflamingo right to his ears, above his heart, and his neck. Making him stunned and weak, he then finished it with a finishing blow by using his Kagune to decapitated him.


    Actually, Echo can easily kill him from when they are in the throne room. But, he wanted to make a show, a show so there won''t be other pirates have guts to attack his Kingdom also to damage WG and Marine prestige since it was them who implement the Warlord System.


    ---


    For a few days, the world was in turmoil by the work of Echo who streams his fight with Doflamingo. His own intelligence network also start to spread the news, painting a bad picture about the Shichibukai system.


    Crocodile who has been trying to become a Hero since his arrival to Alabasta Kingdom was killed by Frederica. After she also aired out their finding that Crocodile has been hiring pirates to attack Alabasta to portray himself as a Hero. But, it always failed since the pirates were always defeated and captured by Frederica''s personal Army.


    Then after his dirt was spread out they get the reason to kill him. With this incident the Shichibukai System was abolished. Because of the outrage of every Kingdom that has ties with World Government since they thought what will happen if it was their Kingdom which becomes the target.


    ---


    Back to Echo.


    After his work on Doflamingo, Echo was now thinking of Wano. He thought it was time for him to help the triplet to reclaim their home country.


    Puru~Puru~Puru~ Gacha.


    "Hello, this is Echo!" He said to the Den Den Mushi.


    "Report King Echo! I am Reinheart, Information officer that was stationed at Konomi Island Kokoyashi Village at East Blue! Right now, Arlong Pirates has touched down on this island and start to demand a ransom. He also declared that the Island will become his base! Please give me your instructions about this!" he relays the information to me.


    "Hmm, how many personnel you have there? If I order you to kill them, Can you do it?" he ask after thinking for a while.


    "We have three personnel here and we can dispatch them easily!" he answers confidently.


    "Good, then Kill him! Also, there is a woman who raised two adopted children there her name is Bellmere. I want you to recruit her and her children. Report to me if she accepted!" he said and close the line then back to his musing about Wano.


    COMMENT 38 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 38 Table of Contents Display Options


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor:

 Chapter 70 - V 5 Ch 7

    With Reinheart at Konomi island.


    Right now Reinheart was standing along with two of his comrades in an Orange farm. Surrounding them was the corpse of Fishman.


    Just now Arlong was about to kill Echo Recruitment target, Bellmere and her two daughters. Because of this he immediately moved and kill all of them, saving her in her desperate state.


    "Are you okay, Bellmere-san?" he asked as he looks at Bellmere who was looking at her two daughters to see if they were okay.


    "Huh, yeah, thank you for your help! Who are you people? How did you know my name?" she asked a little nervous with all these strong people around her who know her but she never met any of them.


    "My name is Reinheart! I was ordered by my Superior to protect you and tried to recruit you along with your two daughters to join our Kingdom. But, who knows that something like this happens. So, we have to take care of them. I''m sorry for letting your daughters see such a sight." he answers and apologizes to her.


    " It''s okay, they will see more brutal sight of their mother being killed if you did not come. Why would your kingdom try to recruit us, I don''t think I have any talent that will make people to put their sights on me." she answers him and asks.


    "I don''t know, I just follow instructions from above. Just think about it, our King won''t let his subject suffer if he has a say in it. We also will train you, so that event like this won''t happen again not to count about the payment. If you want to join, please come to this place." he told her and start to leave to search for other fishmen all around the island.


    While the two ?du?t was talking, they didn''t realize that the two kid was listening to them and Nami was interested in this savior of them. So, she decides to join them later. Especially when she heard about the training and payment, she didn''t want to be weak again. Since the man said that it was their family that got invite so it will be okay even if it was only her.


    ---


    Echo just get the report from Konomi, his agent has already killed all the fishman in the island and invite Bellmere. But have to wait for her answer which he doesn''t mind. Him, inviting them is just a whim if him. Whether they join or not, he didn''t care.


    Right now, he was reading the news he got from his spies. World Government has issued a BusterCall to Alabasta. At first, they want to also send one to Dresrossa but as our Kingdom locate in New World, they can''t carelessly make a move in case the Yonko gets involved.


    He left his office to search for Frederica who was with the others playing. The only one that was not here is only Integra and Seras. Even Kallen also here looking at Kuina and Tashigi practising their swordsmanship.


    "Hey guys, what are you doing here?" he asked as he walks toward them.


    "Rica-chan, here read this!" he said and give her the file. After seeing she finish reading it he asked.


    "So, you think your army can defeat them?" he asks with a smirk.


    "Hmph, of course, we can! We also have a more modern fleet that you give me as a dowry. A mere fleet of a backward ship won''t be our opponents." she said confidently.


    "You are right, I think we have all it takes to make this world ours. Next, we will get Wano back first. After that we will declare war with the World Government. But, before that. I will have to weaken them first. I just got information that the former Marine Admiral Zephyr had his family killed by pirates. When in reality it was WG agent disguised as a pirate. I can make him work for us with this info." he said with a smirk.


    "Echo, when will we go to Wano then?" asked Hiyori.


    "Soon, after Alabasta defeated this BusterCall from Marine!" he answers her.


    "Now, let''s go Rica-chan. You have to prepare for the Marine fleet Welcome Party! Hahaha" he said and touch Frederica in her shoulders and they teleport to Alabasta.


    ---


    After sending Frederica back to Alabasta. Echo and the girls also start to work. They will be streaming the video of the fight between Marine and Alabasta Army.


    He even has one of his spies records what happens on the Marine sides and spread to the world what makes them initiating Buster Call. He even goes on and told the world what is a Buster Call and an example like Ohara which was destroyed just because they want to learn about History.


    Two days later, the Marine fleet arrived at Alabasta. With them all three Marine Admiral Akainu, Kizaru, and Aokiji leading the march.


    They were greeted By Frederica and her fleet which is so much different from this world ship, They were made full of metal And they hover above the sea. Just to even the odd, Frederica was accompanied by Touka and C.C. They were met 10km away from Alabasta.


    "Nefetari Frederica, in the name of Justice we Marine, will erase Alabasta from the surface of the earth!" said Akainu in a loud voice.


    "Hmph, a mere dog of World Goverment talk about Justice with me. I''ll make you regret attacking my Kingdom unprovoked!" she shouted back.


    "Arara, it looks like we are the bad guy here!" said Aokiji.


    "Since long ago you marine was the bad guy, you Marine is just a pirate on a larger scale!" said C.C with her usual expression or more expressionless face.


    "Hmmmm, You can''t liken us with mere Pirates! We represent justice." said Kizaru in his usual slow speech.


    "Enough! We will just destroy them with Absolute Justice on our side!" shout Akainu."Fire the Canon!" he ordered the Marine.


    After hearing Akainu order the fleet start to fire the Canon toward Alabasta fleet. Just as it was halfway through, the Cannonball stopped and goes back with speed of Railgun. Seeing this Kizaru moved to intercept the attack. Even with his speed he let ten slipped pass him which three was blocked by Akainu while Aokiji block only two. The other five-hit its target destroying the Marine ship.


    They look at the Alabasta fleet and see Touka surrounded by lighting while flying in front of the fleet.


    Seeing that it will be troublesome Aokiji decides that it will be more to their favor if the three Admiral take on the three girls. So, he froze the entire sea to make a platform for them to fight.


    Seeing this the other two Admiral knows what he thinks and start to walk toward them. Frederica, Touka, and C.C seeing this count it as their challenge and accept it. They start to walk toward them. Frederica takes on Akainu, Touka takes on Kizaru, while C.C left with Aokiji.


    ---


    They also found out that there is a traitor in their midst since one of the clips is on their meeting. They try to stop the streaming but whoever this does not use the same tech with them making their efforts useless.


    COMMENT 38 comments VOTE Load failed, please RETRY


    ¡ª New chapter is coming soon ¡ªWrite a review Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download Weekly Power Status See Who Voted -- Power Ranking -- Power Stone Vote 38 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Translator: Editor: